GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  of  LIBRARIES 

A  Manual  for  Students 
in  the  University  of  Illinois 


By 


MARGARET  HUTCHINS,  A.B.,B.L.S. 

ALICE  S.  JOHNSON,  A.B.,B.L.S. 

MARGARET  S.  WILLIAMS,  A. B.,B.L.S. 

Reference  Librarians  in  the  Library  and  Lecturers  in 

the  Library  School  University  of  Illinois 


URBANA,  ILLINOIS 
1920 


Copyright,  1920,  ly 
MAKGABET  HUTCHINS 
ALICE  S.  JOHNSON 
MARGARET  S.  WILLIAMS 


PREFACE 

This  manual  is  intended  to  serve  as  a  textbook  and  basis 
for  problems  in  the  course  on  the  use  of  books  and  libraries 
as  given  at  the  University  of  Illinois  for  freshmen  and  sopho- 
mores. It  is,  in  its  present  form,  a  development  from  outlines 
and  lecture  notes  used  in  this  course  for  a  number  of  years 
past.  Although  there  are  several  excellent  textbooks  on  li- 
brary practices  already  published,  none  seem  to  meet  the 
needs  of  a  course  for  college  underclassmen,  in  which  weekly 
problems  are  assigned  to  be  worked  out  by  the  student.  This 
book  lays  no  claims  to  originality,  nor  does  it  contain  any- 
thing for  the  trained  librarian  or  scholar.  It  seems  justified, 
however,  because  its  use  will  leave  free  for  recitation  and 
discussion  the  part  of  the  class  period  formerly  consumed  by 
the  students  in  detailed  note-taking  from  lectures. 

The  course  for  which  this  manual  has  been  prepared  was 
started  at  the  University  of  Illinois  in  the  fall  of  1898  by  the 
late  Katharine  L.  Sharp,  formerly  Librarian  and  Director  of 
the  Library  School,  and  has  been  continued  by  successive 
members  of  the  Reference  Department  of  the  Library,  as- 
sisted by  members  of  the  Faculty  of  the  Library  School.  It 
is  an  elective  course,  accepted  for  credit  in  the  undergraduate 
colleges  of  the  University.  Its  purpose,  primarily,  is  to  give 
to  the  students  early  in  their  college  career  some  knowledge 
of  the  resources  of  the  library  and  a  familiarity  with  refer- 
ence books  which  will  help  them  in  the  preparation  of  assign- 
ments in  other  studies.  Recitations  are  conducted  by  a  com- 
bination of  the  question-and-answer,  topical,  and  lecture 
methods,  but  the  most  important  feature  of  the  course  is  the 
laboratory  work  in  the  form  of  problems  which  necessitate 
the  use  of  the  library  records  and  books  described  in  the 
manual.  These  are  assigned  each  week  and  on  being  handed 
in  are  corrected  and  returned  to  the  students  at  the  following 
class  period.  (See  Appendix  II  for  sample  problem.) 

The  compilers  are  glad  to  acknowledge  their  indebtedness 
to  Mr.  Phineas  L.  "Windsor  for  advice  and  encouragement  in 

H 


the  planning  of  this  work,  and  to  Miss  Frances  Simpson, 
Miss  Emma  Felsenthal,  Miss  Sabra  Vought,  and  others  who 
have  taught  the  course,  for  their  part  in  the  preparation  of 
lectures  and  outlines  from  which  this  manual  has  developed. 
From  the  following  books  especially,  helpful  suggestions  have 
been  received :  Kroeger,  Guide  to  the  study  and  use  of  refer- 
ence books;  Fay  and  Eaton,  Instruction  in  the  use  of  books 
and  libraries;  Lowe,  Books  and  libraries;  and  Ward,  Prac- 
tical use  of  books  and  libraries. 

M.  H. 

A.  S.  J. 

M.  S.  W. 
Urbana,  Illinois. 
July  1920 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  SECTION 

PREFACE 

I     INTRODUCTION   1 

II    THE  UNIVERSITY  OP  ILLINOIS  LIBRARY 2-7 

- —  III    CLASSIFICATION 8-17 

IV    CALL  NUMBERS  AND  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF 

BOOKS  ON  THE  SHELVES 18-23 

V    SHELF  LIST  24 

VI    CARD  CATALOG:   GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 25-37 

VII     CARD  CATALOG  (Continued):   DETAILS....  38-55 
VIII     CARD  CATALOG  (Continued)  :  PUBLICATIONS 
OF  GOVERNMENTS,  SOCIETIES  AND  INSTI- 
TUTIONS    56-61 

IX    ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  IN  THE  CATALOG.  .  62-75 

X    PARTS  OF  A  BOOK 76-86 

XI    REFERENCE  BOOKS  87-90 

XII    MAGAZINES  AND  MAGAZINE  INDEXES 91-106 

XIII  ENCYCLOPEDIAS,  ANNUAL  CYCLOPEDIAS  AND 

ALMANACS 107-119 

XIV  DICTIONARIES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE.  .120-134 
XV    BIOGRAPHY 135-142 

XVI  GEOGRAPHY 143-157 

XVII  HISTORY 158-185 

XVIII  SOCIOLOGY 186-215 

XIX  RELIGION 216-223 

XX  LITERATURE 224-243 

XXI  LITERATURE  (Continued)    244-267 

XXII  FINE  ARTS 268-275 

XXIII  SCIENCE 276-290 

XXIV  AGRICULTURE 291-304 

XXV  HOME  ECONOMICS 305-316 

XXVI    ENGINEERING 317-327 

XXVII     COMMERCE  AND  GENERAL  BUSINESS 328-347 

XXVIII    EDUCATION 348-357 

XXIX    UNITED  STATES  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS 358-369 

XXX    BIBLIOGRAPHY 370-389 

APPENDIX  I:  QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

APPENDIX  II :  SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

INDEX 

5 


CHAPTER  I 
INTRODUCTION 

1.  Libraries:  their  function  and  use. — Libraries  were 
once  regarded  simply  as  a  place  in  which  to  keep  books,  a 
storehouse  of  knowledge,  where  stress  was  laid  on  preserv- 
ing rather  than  using  records.  But  during  the  last  few 
decades,  the  trend  has  been  to  make  the  library  also  an 
active  agency  in  the  community.  Our  larger  public  libra- 
ries assist  in  meeting  civic  needs,  educational  and  sociolog- 
ical as  well  as  recreational.  So-called  "special"  libraries 
maintained  by  large  business,  manufacturing,  and  engineer- 
ing firms  meet  a  definite  demand  by  furnishing  information 
along  the  lines  of  the  firm's  particular  interest. 

LThe  college  library  has  a  somewhat  different,  though  very 
real  service  to  perform.  Here,  in  addition  to  supplying 
reading  and  study  room  facilities,  the  primary  purpose  is 
to  make  possible  the  investigation  of  any  subject.  The  li- 
brary becomes  the  laboratory  of  both  students  and  teachers, 
irrespective  of  their  special  interest,  be  it  engineering,  agri- 
culture, commerce,  science  or  the  liberal  arts. 

However,  only  those  who  know  something  of  the  subject 
can  make  the  best  use  of  a  laboratory.  Equipment  in  a 
physics  laboratory  of  only  passing  interest  to  a  casual  ob- 
server has  much  more  meaning  to  one  who  knows  how  to 
use  it.  Likewise,  the  library  offers  things  of  interest  to  even 
the  uninformed  mind,  but  an  adequate  use  of  its  facilities 
can  only  be  made  by  one  who  knows  its  organization  and 
resources.  One  might  gain  this  knowledge  through  a  con- 
tinued use  of  the  library  and  the  gradual  discovery  of  its 
make-up,  but  meanwhile  one  would  miss  many  short  cuts 
and  overlook  valuable  material.  For  this  reason,  a  sys- 
tematic study  of  the  library,  its  arrangement,  important  rec- 
ords, and  resources  will  bring  abundant  returns.  Through- 
out the  course  it  should  be  remembered  that  the  purpose  of 
gaining  this  information  is  simply  a  means  to  an  end — to 
assist  in  the  field  of  one's  special  interest. 


2-3 


CHAPTER  II 
THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  LIBRARY 

2.  The  University  of  Illinois  Library  is  as  old  as  the 
university,  for  in  1867,  644  volumes  were    purchased    for 
$1000.00,  appropriated  by  the  trustees.    For  thirty  years  it 
occupied  space  in  the  two  successive  University  Halls.  When 
a  building  was  erected  for  it  in  1897,  it  had  been  supported 
for  twenty  years  by  special  appropriations  from  the  Legis- 
lature and  had  attained  the  size  of  nearly  thirty-five  thou- 
sand volumes.    In  the  next  ten  years  it  grew  to  be  ten  times 
as  large.    In  1920  it  contained  nearly  half  a  million  volumes 
and  it  was  growing  at  the  rate  of  about  thirty  thousand 
volumes  a  year. 

3.  Arrangement  of  the  Library  Building1. — The  public 
reading  rooms  of  the  Library  are  at  the  front  (north)   of 
the  building,  on  the  second  floor,  the  south  wing  of  the 
building  and  all  the  basement  and  third  floor  being  reserved 
for  stacks  (book  rooms)  and  the  administrative  offices  and 
work  rooms  of  the  library  staff. 

Referring  to  the  plan,  it  will  be  seen  that  a  person  who 
has  entered  at  the  north  door  or  main  entrance  of  the  build- 
ing must  ascend  a  short  flight  of  stairs  to  reach  the  second 
floor.  Passing  through  the  doorway  at  the  head  of  the  stairs, 
he  will  find  facing  him  a  curved  counter  which  is  called  the 
Loan  Desk.  Turning  to  the  left,  he  will  pass  between  pillars 
into  the  East  Reading  Room  and  turning  again  to  the  left 
he  approaches  a  small  room  known  as  the  Tower  Room. 
(These  two  rooms  are  sometimes  called  Periodical  Rooms, 
because  they  contain  chiefly  periodicals  or  magazines.)  On 
the  way  into  the  Tower  Room  he  passes  an  ' '  Open  Shelf  Col- 
lection" of  books  on  the  west  wall. 

As  he  returns  past  the  Loan  Desk,  he  faces  the  "West 
Reading  Room,  which  takes  its  name  Reference  Room  from 
the  kind  of  books  shelved  in  it.  Near  its  entrance,  he  will 
find  at  the  left  the  desk  for  the  Reference  Librarian  and 
at  the  right  low  cases  for  atlases  and  directories,  which 


THE  U.  OF  I.  LIBRARY  4 

enclose  an  alcove  for  the  cabinets  of  drawers  containing  the 
Shelf  List.  Going  to  the  right,  i.  e.  north,  he  will  pass  the 
' l  Gilt  Star  Collection ' '  on  his  way  to  the  Map  Room,  which 
opens  from  the  northeast  corner  of  the  Reference  Room. 


BOOOO D: 

ROOJ 

00 


P  i RST  FLOOR.  PLAN 

L  1 5KARY 

ILLINOIS 


Having  retraced  his  steps  to  the  Loan  Desk  and  faced 
toward  the  entrance  of  the  Library,  he  will  see  on  either  side 
of  the  doorway  the  cabinets  of  drawers  which  contain  the 
Card  Catalog  of  the  Library,  and,  between  himself  and  the 
catalog,  counters  on  which  the  catalog  drawers  may  be  laid 
for  consultation. 

4.  Department  Libraries. — Not  all  of  the  Library,  how- 
ever, is  housed  in  the  Library  Building.  Department  libra- 
ries and  reading  rooms  in  several  of  the  university  buildings 
contain  special  collections  of  the  books  belonging  to  the 
University  Library,  varying  in  size  from  a  few  hundred  to 


9 


5  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

twenty  thousand  volumes  and  leaving  in  the  Library  Build- 
ing about  two  hundred  thousand  volumes,  which  constitute 
the  General  Library. 

The  department  libraries  and  reading  rooms  are: 


Agriculture 

Architecture 

Ceramics 

Chemistry 

Classics 

Commerce 

Economics  and  Sociology 

Engineering 

English 

History  and  Political  Science 

Law 

Mathematics 

Modern  Languages 

Natural  History 

Philosophy,  Psychology  and 

Education 
Physics 


117  Agriculture  Building 
419  Engineering  Hall 

202  Ceramic  Engineering 
Building 

257  Chemistry  Laboratory 

106  Lincoln  Hall 

208  Commerce  Building 

302  Lincoln  Hall 

119  Engineering  Hall 
204  Lincoln  Hall 

303  Lincoln  Hall 
Law  Building 

436-A  Natural  History  Hall 

203  Lincoln  Hall 

225  Natural  History  Hall 

109  Lincoln  Hall 

201  Physics  Laboratory 


5.    General  Regulations   for  the  use   of  the  Library. 

Library  rules  are  made  with  the  intention  of  giving  to  a 
large  number  of  people  the  best  opportunity  possible  to  use 
a  library  for  the  purpose  for  which  it  is  intended.  As  a 
university  library  is  to  be  used  primarily  for  study  and  in- 
vestigation, it  must  have  regulations  in  order  to  provide 
quiet  surroundings  for  the  former  purpose  and  quick  access 
to  material  needed  for  the  second. 

Consider  a  library  in  which  no  rules  of  conduct  are  ob- 
served. You  come  to  study  in  it,  but  find  so  many  people 
talking  together  that  it  is  impossible  to  concentrate  your 
attention  on  your  work.  You  hurry  in  to  look  up  an  ad- 
dress, but  some  one  has  taken  the  directory  out  and  is  not 
expected  to  return  it  until  next  week.  You  have  to  read 


10 


THE  U.  OF  I.  LIBRARY  6 

a  chapter  in  a  book  for  a  class  assignment,  but 'some  fellow 
student  has  removed  the  book  and  will  probably  not  replace 
it  until  after  the  class  has  met.  If  you  want  to  make  use 
of  some  statistics,  you  cannot  decipher  the  figures  because 
the  tables  in  the  Census  report  are  so  covered  with  pen 
marks;  or,  having  found  with  considerable  difficulty  a  ref- 
erence to  a  magazine  article  on  some  subject  011  which  little 
has  been  published,  you  discover  when  you  open  to  the  place 
where  the  article  should  be,  that  some  inconsiderate  person 
has  torn  out  those  pages.  Naturally  you  would  grow  in- 
dignant over  your  experiences  in  a  library  like  that  and 
would  wonder  "why  they  allow  it." 

It  will  be  seen  then  that  the  Library  Regulations1  are 
for  the  purpose  of  having  the  material  owned  by  the  Li- 
brary on  hand  when  it  is  most  needed  and  that  requests  for 
silence  and  the  careful  use  of  books  are  for  the  benefit  of 
the  students  rather  than  the  librarians.  Fines  are  imposed 
for  infringement  of  the  rules  not  because  they  increase  the 
revenues  of  the  University  but  simply  because  no  other  plan 
has  yet  been  devised  for  the  protection  of  the  rights  of  the 
many  against  the  few  who  do  not  voluntarily  work  to- 
gether for  the  common  good. 

6.    How  to  obtain  Library  Books.— 

Loan  Department:  If  the  student  knows  what  books  he 
wants  and  how  to  use  the  card  catalog  of  the  Library,  he 
will  fill  out  for  each  book  a  call  slip,  which  he  finds  on  one  of 
the  counters  near  the  catalog,  and  present  it  at  the  Loan 
Desk.  Unless  the  book  is  shelved  in  a  department  library 
or  one  of  the  reading  rooms,  or  unless  it  is  charged  out  to 
someone,  the  assistant  at  the  Loan  Desk  will  bring  it  from 
the  stacks.  The  student  will  then  sign  the  call  slip,  which 
becomes  the  Library's  receipt  from  him  for  the  book,  or, 
for  a  reserve  book  he  will  sign  his  name  on  a  card  provided 
for  the  purpose.  Reserve  books  must  not  be  taken  from  the 


University    of    Illinois    Regulations    for   the   guidance   of    undergraduate    stu- 
dents,  Appendix   II. 


11 


7  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Library  without  permission.     Books  not  on  reserve  may  be 
kept  two  weeks. 

Reference  Department:  If  the  student  does  not  know 
how  to  find  the  book  he  wants  through  the  card  catalog,  or 
if  he  does  not  know  what  books  will  give  him  the  desired 
information,  he  should  ask  for  aid  at  the  Reference  Desk,  as 
it  is  the  work  of  the  Reference  Department  to  assist  people 
in  finding  what  they  want  in  the  Library. 

7.    Special  'Collections  in  the  Reading  Rooms. — 

Periodicals:  Most  of  the  bound  volumes  of  periodicals 
are  kept  in  the  stacks  and  department  libraries,  but  a  col- 
lection of  about  seventy  of  the  most  generally  used  maga- 
zines is  shelved  alphabetically  around  the  walls  of  the  Peri- 
odical Rooms.  In  pigeon  holes  on  the  west  wall  of  the  Tower 
Room  are  kept  in  alphabetical  order  the  current  issues  of 
these  periodicals  and  of  about  four  hundred  others.  A  few 
of  the  most  used  are  in  binders  on  the  tables.  A  list  of  the 
current  magazines  is  hung  on  the  door  near  the  pigeon  holes. 
(If  older  issues  are  wanted,  and  they  are  not  found  among 
the  bound  volumes  in  the  Reading  Rooms,  they  must  be  called 
for  at  the  Loan  Desk.) 

Reference  Books:  Books  which  are  to  be  consulted  for 
definite  information,  such  as  dictionaries,  encyclopedias,  in- 
dexes, and  atlases,  are  shelved  in  the  Reference  Room,  ar- 
ranged by  subject.  A  plan  showing  the  arrangement  of  these 
books  will  be  found  on  the  end  of  the  Loan  Desk  nearest  the 
Reference  Room. 

Books  for  Reading:  If  anyone  wants  a  good  book  for 
reading  at  home  and  cannot  think  of  one  which  he  wishes  to 
read,  he  may  find  what  he  wants  by  looking  over  the  collec- 
tions in  the  Reading  Rooms,  known  as  the  Gilt  Star  and  Open 
Shelf  Collections.  If  he  desires  a  novel,  he  should  look  in 
the  Gilt  Star  Collection  in  the  Reference  Room.  If  he  would 
like  to  read  a  good  biography,  or  book  of  travel,  or  poetry, 
or  a  popular  book  on  some  art  or  science,  he  should  examine 
the  books  in  the  Open  Shelf  Collection  in  the  East  Reading 


12 


THE  U.  OF  I.  LIBRARY  7 

Room.  On  the  east  end  of  the  Loan  Desk,  too,  he  will  often 
find  a  smaller  group  of  books,  which  is  changed  frequently. 
Call  slips  for  books  taken  home  from  these  collections  should 
be  signed  and  left  at  the  Loan  Desk. 

The  Open  Shelf  and  Gilt  Star  Collections,  like  the  refer- 
ence books,  are  arranged  by  their  call  numbers  which  are 
explained  in  the  following  chapters  of  this  manual.  Small 
printed  lists,  not  only  of  the  novels  included  in  the  Gilt  Star 
Collection,  but  also  of  plays  and  short  stories,  may  be  obtained 
at  the  Loan  Desk. 


13 


CHAPTER  III 
CLASSIFICATION 

8.  'Classification  Defined.— To  assemble  a  number  of 
volumes  in  one  place  and  arrange  them  side  by  side  on  the 
shelves  is  not  sufficient  in  a  present  day  well  organized  library. 
There  must  be  some  grouping  of  books  so  that  those  having 
characteristics  in  common  will  stand  together.  This  process 
is  called  Classification. 

The  similarity  between  the  books  may  be  based  on  arti- 
ficial characteristics  peculiar  to  the  particular  copies  of  the 
works  such  as  size,  date  of  publication  or  of  purchase,  color 
of  binding,  or  type  of  illustration ;  or  it  may  be  based  on  a 
more  intrinsic  and  natural  quality  such  as  the  subject  with 
which  the  book  deals.  In  the  arrangement  of  any  particular 
collection,  however,  the  grouping  is  usually  determined  by 
the  use  to  which  the  collection  is  to  be  put.  An  arrange- 
ment suited  to  one  purpose  might  not  be  suited  to  another. 
A  printer  might  arrange  his  volumes  as  to  style  of  type;  a 
binder  as  to  their  bindings ;  a  collector  of  old  books  as  to  their 
date  of  printing ;  a  book  dealer  alphabetically  as  to  their  pub- 
lishers or  authors.  In  a  library  for  general  use,  however, 
those  systems  of  classification  have  been  found  most  satisfac- 
tory which  arrange  books  according  to  the  subjects  with  which 
they  deal.  This  would — in  so  far  as  possible — group  all  of  the 
algebras;  all  of  the  botanies  in  one  place.  The  histories  of 
England  would  be  together,  likewise  those  of  France,  and 
those  dealing  with  general  European  history  would  be  not 
far  distant. 

For  many  books,  the  grouping  is  naturally  with  one  subject 
and  one  subject  only,  but  for  many  others  it  might  be  equally 
well  with  any  one  of  several  subjects.  In  such  cases  the  de- 
cision as  to  the  proper  number  is  usually  based  on  a  consid- 
eration of  which  arrangement  is  best  suited  to  the  individual 
library  and  will  make  the  book  most  available.  A  book  on 
the  diseases  of  wheat  might  be  grouped  with  material  on 
crops  in  an  agricultural  library  and  with  books  on  botany 

14 


CLASSIFICATION  9-11 

in  a  scientific  library.  Likewise  a  book  on  electricity  might 
be  grouped  with  engineering  in  one  library  and  with  physics 
in  another.  Or  it  sometimes  happens  that  in  separate  sections 
of  the  same  book  several  subjects,  such  as  heat,  light  and 
electricity,  are  treated.  Then,  since  the  book  can  stand  in 
only  one  place,  it  becomes  necessary  to  classify  it  with  only 
one  of  the  subjects  with  which  it  deals  or  with  a  more  general 
subject,  such  as  physics,  which  includes  them  all.  From 
these  examples  some  idea  may  be  gained  of  the  problems  of 
classification  and  the  lack  of  definite  or  rigid  rules  to  govern 
the  placing  of  any  particular  book.  A  perfect  classification 
has  not  yet  been  devised  and  probably  never  will  be,  but 
much  has  been  done  to  make  books  and  other  printed  material 
more  available,  and  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  classifica- 
tion suited  to  abstract  philosophical  ideas  is  not,  in  all  prob- 
ability, suited  to  subjects  as  they  are  treated  in  books. 

9.  Notation. — In   any   classification   to    be   applied   to 
books  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  system  of  symbols — a  short- 
hand method,  in  fact — by  which  the  various  subjects  may  be 
briefly  expressed   and   naturally  grouped  in  logical   order. 
These  should  be  familiar  symbols  having  some  definite  se- 
quence— such  as  the  letters  of  the   alphabet   or   the   Arabic 
numerals ;  they  should  be  easily  spoken  and  written ;  and  as 
few  as  possible  should  be  needed  to  express  a  subject.     The 
symbols  used  in  a  classification  to  designate  the  subjects  con- 
stitute the  notation. 

10.  Systems  of  classification. — Many  systems  of  classi- 
fication have  been  formulated,  but  there  are  three  in  most 
common  use  in  the  libraries  of  this  country  today:    the  Ex- 
pansive classification,  the  Library  of  Congress  classification, 
and  the  Decimal  classification.     These  differ  from  each  other 
in  the  grouping  of  the  various  subjects  and  in  the  notation 
which  they  employ. 

11.  The  Expansive,  or  Cutter  classification  as  it  is  some- 
times called  from  the  name  of  its  author,  Charles  A.  Cutter, 
uses  the  twenty-six  letters  of  the  alphabet  as  the  basis  of  its 
notation,  and  has,  consequently,  a  large  number  of  general 

IS 


12  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

divisions,  or  subjects.     The  main  divisions  of  this  classifica- 
tion are  as  follows : 

A     General  works 

B  Philosophy 

C  Judaism  and  Christianity 

D  Ecclesiastical  history 

J3  Biography 

F  History 

G  Geography  and  travels 

H  Social  sciences 

I  Demotics,  Sociology 

J  Civics,  Government,  Political  Science 

K  Legislation 

L  Sciences  and  arts 

M  Natural  History 

N  Botany 

O  Zoology 

P  Vertebrates 

Q  Medicine 

B  Technology 

S  Constructive  arts    (Engineering  and  building) 

T  Fabricative  arts   (Manufactures  and  handicrafts) 

U  Combative  and  preservative  arts 

V  Eecreative  arts 

W  Art 

X  Philology 

Y  Literature 

Z  Book  arts 

12.  The  Library  of  Congress  system,  devised  to  meet 
the  special  needs  of  our  national  library  at  Washington,  has 
been  adopted  by  other  libraries,  although  its  use  is  much  less 
general  than  that  of  the  other  classifications  mentioned.  It 
uses  for  its  notation  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  followed  by 
Arabic  figures  or  in  some  cases,  by  an  additional  capital  let- 
ter and  figures.  The  main  classes  of  this  scheme  are: 

A     General  works — Polygraphy 

B     Philosophy — Keligion 

C     History — Auxiliary  sciences 

D     History  and  topography   (except  America) 

E  and   F     American  history 

G     Geography — Anthropology 


16 


CLASSIFICATION  13 

H  Social  sciences 

J  Political  science 

K  Law 

L  Education 

M  Music 

N  Fine  arts 

P  Language  and  literature 

Q  Science 

B  Medicine 

S  Agriculture — Plant  and  animal  industry 

T  Technology 

U  Military  science 

V  Naval  science 

Z  Bibliography  and  Library  Science2 

13.  The  Decimal  Classification,  worked  out  by  Melvil 
Dewey,  is  the  system  most  often  used  in  the  public  and  col- 
lege libraries  of  this  country.  It  is  also  found  to  some  extent 
in  the  libraries  of  foreign  countries  since  its  notation,  the 
Arabic  numerals,  is  adaptable  to  many  languages.  It  was 
first  developed  in  1873  and  has  been  constantly  passing 
through  new  editions  and  revisions.  It  is  now  in  its  tenth 
edition  and  fills  a  volume  of  nine  hundred  and  thirty-six 
pages. 

According  to  this  scheme  of  classification  the  field  of 
knowledge  is  divided  into  nine  main  classes,  and  books  are 
arranged  under  these  nine  groups  numbered  1  to  9.  A  tenth 
class  marked  with  a  0  is  added  for  encyclopedias,  periodicals 
and  other  publications  so  general  in  character  as  to  belong 
to  no  one  group.  Each  class  is  divided  into  nine  divisions  as 
shown  in  the  accompanying  summary  of  the  classification. 


2U.     S.    Library    of    Congress.       Classification ;     outline    scheme    of    classes. 
Preliminary,    Dec.    1909. 


17 


13 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


DECIMAL  CLASSIFICATION 

SUMMARY  OF  CLASSES  AND  DIVISIONS 


000     GENERAL  WORKS 

500     NATURAL   SCIENCE 

010     Bibliography 

510     Mathematics 

020     Library    economy 

520     Astronomy 

030     General  cyclopedias 

530      Physics 

040     General  collections 

540     Chemistry 

050     General  periodicals 

550     Geology 

060     General  societies.    Museums 

560     Paleontology 

070     Newspapers 

570     Biology 

080     Special  libraries.  Polygraphy 

580     Botany 

090     Book   rarities 

590     Zoology 

100     PHILOSOPHY 

600      USEFUL  ARTS 

110     Metaphysics 
120     Special   metaphysical   topics 
130     Mind  and  body 

610     Medicine 
620     Engineering 
630     Agriculture 

140     Philosophic   systems 
150     Mental   faculties.    Psychology 
160     Logic.      Dialectics 
170     Ethics 

640      Domestic    economy 
650     Communication.      Commerce 
660     Chemical  technology 
670     Manufactures 

180     Ancient   philosophers 
190     Modern   philosophers 

680     Mechanic  trades 
690     Building 

200     RELIGION 

700     FINE   ARTS 

210     Natural   theology 

oorj       Tiihlo 

710     Landscape   gardening 
720     Architecture 

i-  _  U         131D1Q 

230     Doctrinal.   Dogmatics.  Theology 
240     Devotional.      Practical. 
250      Homiletic.   Pastoral.    Parochial 
260      Church.     Institutions.    Work 
270     Religious    history 
280     Christian  churches  and  sects 
290     Ethnic.      Non-Christian 

730     Sculpture 
740     Drawing.  Decoration.  Design 
750      Painting 
760      Engraving 
770     Photography 
780     Music 
790     Amusements 

800      LITERATURE 

300      SOCIOLOGY 

810     American 

310     Statistics 

820     English 

320     Political    science 

830     German 

330     Political   economy 

840     French 

340     Law 

850     Italian 

350      Administration 

860      Spanish 

360     Associations  and  institutions 

870     Latin 

370     Education 

880     Greek 

380     Commerce.      Communication 
390     Customs.   Costumes.   Folklore 

890     Minor  languages 

400     PHILOLOGY 

410  Comparative 

420  English 

430  German 

440  French 

450  Italian 

460  Spanish 

470  Latin 

480  Greek 

490  Minor    languages 


900      HISTORY 

910     Geography  and  travels 
920     Biography 
930     Ancient  history 
940        TEurope 
950    a     Asia 
960  |  I  Africa 
970    o  |  North   America 
980  S     South   America 
990        ^Oceanica    and   polar 
regions 


18 


CLASSIFICATION  13 

These  divisions  are  again  divided  into  nine  sections;  as 
in  940  History  of  (modern)  Europe,  and  780  Music. 

940     History   of  Europe  780     Music 

941  Scotland     Ireland  781  Theory 

942  England     Wales  782  Dramatic 

943  Germany     Austria  783  Sacred 

944  France  784  Vocal 

945  Italy  785  Orchestral 

946  Spain     Portugal  786  Piano   and   organ 

947  Kussia  787  Stringed   instruments 

948  Norway    Sweden    Denmark    788  Wind  instruments 

949  Minor  countries  789  Percussion  and  mechanical 

If  further  division  of  a  subject  is  desired,  a  decimal  point 
is  used  and  beyond  this  the  subdivision  is  carried  out  as  far 
as  desirable.  788,  Wind  instruments,  has  the  following 
subdivisions. 

788  Wind  instruments 

788.1  Trumpet 

788.2  Trombone 

788.3  Cornet 

788.4  Horns  and   other  brass  wind  instruments 
.41  French  horn 

.42  Saxhorn 
.43  Saxophone 
etc. 

788.5  Flute     Waldflute     Piccolo     Fife     Flageolet 

788.6  Clarinet     Bass   clarinet     Bassethorn 

788.7  Oboe     D'amore     Da   caccia    Cor   anglais 

788.8  Bassoon     Double  bassoon     Bombardon 

788.9  Other  reed  wind  instruments:    bagpipe 

In  the  number  788.3,  7  indicates  the  class  Fine  arts;  8, 
the  division  Music ;  the  second  8,  the  section  Wind  instru- 
ments; and  3,  the  subsection  Cornet.  All  the  books  on  the 
cornet  would  have  this  number  and  all  the  books  bearing 
this  number  would  stand  together.  In  this  way  all  of  the 
material  on  the  cornet  would  be  found  in  one  spot  immedi- 
ately preceded  by  material  on  the  trumpet  (788.1)  and  trom- 
bone (788.2)  and  followed  by  material  on  horns  (788.4). 


19 


14-15  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

On  the  shelf  preceding  all  of  these  would  stand  books  on 
wind  instruments  in  general  bearing  the  number  788. 

14.  Form  divisions. — The   classification   is   primarily   a 
classification  by  the  subject  matter  of  the  book  rather  than 
by  the  form  in  which  it  is  written,  but  it  has  seemed  wise  to 
provide  in  the  various  divisions  of  the  classification  separate 
numbers  for  periodicals,  dictionaries,  etc.  which  deal  with 
a  definite  subject;  for  example,  engineering.    These  "form" 
divisions  as  they  are  called  have  practically  the  same  mean- 
ing in  all  classes  and  are  as  follows: 

1  Philosophies,  theories,  etc.  6  Societies,   associations,  transac- 

2  Compends,  outlines  tions,  reports,  etc. 

3  Dictionaries,   cyclopedias  7  Education,  study,  teaching,  etc. 

4  Essays,  lectures,  letters,  etc.  8  Polygraphy,    collections,   etc. 

5  Periodicals,  magazines,  etc.  9  History 

Thus,  620.3  is  a  dictionary  of  engineering  terms;  620.5 
is  a  periodical  devoted  to  engineering;  620.6  is  a  publica- 
tion of  an  engineering  society.  If  the  number  for  a  subject 
does  not  end  in  a  0,  0  is  added  before  the  form  division  is 
given ;  that  is  to  say,  in  the  case  of  a  dictionary  of  mining 
engineering,  to  622  (Mining  engineering)  0  is  added  before 
the  form  division  3  giving  the  number  622.03. 

15.  Geographic  divisions. — The  form  divisions  by  their 
extensive  use  and  practically  uniform  designation  through- 
out the  classification  afford  a  very  convenient  key  to  the 
meaning  of  a  great  many  numbers,  but  perhaps  an  even 
more  helpful  key  is  the  repeated  use  of  certain  numbers  to 
indicate  certain  geographic  divisions.     These  numbers  are 
taken  from  the  900s  History.     Thus,  in  the  number  942,  9 
indicates  History,  4  Europe  and  2  England.     The  history 
of  England  is  designated  by  the  addition  of  42  to  the  history 
number  9,  and  it  will  be  found  that  wherever  subjects  are 
divided  geographically  (The  note  in  the  classification  usually 
reads  "divided  like  930-999"  or  "like  940-999".)  the  num- 
ber 42  always  indicates  England;   for  example, 


20 


CLASSIFICATION  16-17 

942  History  of  England 

914.2  Travel  in  England 

912.42  Map  of  England 

920.042  Biography  of  Englishmen 

554.2  Geology  of  England 

379.42  Public  schools  in  England 

581.942  Botany  of  England 

352.042  Local  government  in  England 

614.0942  Public  health  in  England 

If  the  42  with  which  each  of  the  above  numbers  ends 
were  changed  to  73  the  United  States  would  be  designated ;  43 
would  indicate  Germany;  44  France;  81  Brazil,  and  so  on. 
A  list  of  the  numbers  to  which  these  geographical  divisions 
may  be  added  is  given  in  Table  I  at  the  back  of  the  Decimal 
Classification. 

16.  The  Use  of  B,  C,  or  F  instead  of  a  Class  Number.— 
In  certain  divisions  of  the  classification  some  libraries  sub- 
stitute capital  letters  for  the  class  numbers.    Thus,  in  biog- 
raphy a  capital  B  indicates  the  lives  of  individuals  and  these 
biographies  are  arranged  alphabetically  by  the  surnames  of 
the  persons  written  about.    Books  having  the  designation  B 
are  shelved  as  if  they  had  the  number  920.    C  is  a  letter  used 
for  college  publications  and  is  a  substitute  for  the  number 
378.    The  use  of  F  for  Fiction  is  very  common  in  the  libraries 
of  this  country  but  is  not  used  in  the  University  of  Illinois 
Library  where  the  regular  class  numbers  813,  823,  etc.,  are 
used. 

17.  The  "Relativ"  Index. — A  very  important  feature 
of  the  Decimal  Classification  is  the  "Relativ"  index  found 
immediately  following  the  tables.     This  index  assists  both 
in  assigning  numbers  to  books  and  in  finding    books    to 
which  numbers  have  already  been  assigned.     Entries  are 
made  under  all  the  terms  used  in  the  tables  and  under  those 
of  similar  or  synonymous  meaning.     If  the  number  for  a 
book  on  the  Stage  is  desired,  by  looking  for  Stage  under 
S  in  the  index,  the  number  792  is  found.    The  same  number 
would  have  been  found  by  looking  under  Theater,  Opera, 


21 


17  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Dramatic  art  or  amusements,  and  so  on.  If  it  seems  desir- 
able to  analyze  this  number,  it  will  be  seen  by  turning  to 
the  classification  tables  that  7  indicates  the  class  Fine  Arts, 
9  the  division  Amusements,  and  2  the  section  Theater. 

The  index  is  also  useful  in  indicating  the  numbers  for 
the  various  viewpoints  from  which  a  subject  may  be  treated. 
For  example  a  book  on  tobacco,  if  it  deals  with  the  cultiva- 
tion of  tobacco,  would  be  given  the  number  633.71  under 
Agriculture;  if  it  deals  with  the  manufacture  of  tobacco 
products,  it  would  probably  be  given  the  number  679  un- 
der Manufactures ;  if  it  deals  with  the  physiological  or  moral 
effects  of  tobacco  it  would  have  the  number  613.84  under 
Personal  hygiene,  615.99  under  Materia  medica — Poisons, 
or  178.7  under  Ethics-Temperance — Stimulants  and  narcot- 
ics; if  it  deals  with  government  tax  on  tobacco,  it  would 
probably  have  the  number  336.27  under  Taxation.  A  book 
on  birds  has  ordinarily  the  number  598.2.  This  is  a  number 
under  the  division  Zoology  and  would  include  books  on  the 
different  kinds  of  birds,  a  description  of  their  eggs,  nests, 
migration  habits,  and  so  on.  But  if  the  treatment  is  of  birds 
in  their  relation  to  the  farm,  either  as  aids  or  pests,  or  as 
domesticated  fowls,  it  would  have  a  number  under  agricul- 
ture, while  a  book  on  game  birds  and  the  hunting  of  them 
would  probably  be  given  the  number  799  under  Amuse- 
ments— Sports.  A  book  on  the  diseases  of  birds  would  have 
the  number  619.6  under  Comparative  medicine — Veterinary; 
one  on  their  protection,  179.3 — Societies  for  the  prevention 
of  cruelty  to  animals.  These  examples,  which  could  be  du- 
plicated many  times,  suffice  to  illustrate  the  use  of  various 
numbers  to  indicate  different  phases  o¥  the  same  subject  and 
will  serve  to  show  the  advantage  of  consulting  the  index 
before  either  assigning  a  number  to  a  book  or  going  to  the 
shelves  (or  shelf  list)  to  look  for  material  on  a  definite 
subject. 


18 


CHAPTER  IV 


CALL  NUMBERS  AND  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF 
BOOKS  ON  THE  SHELVES 

18.  Author  Numbers. — As  we  have  seen  in  the  preced- 
ing chapter,  books  are  arranged  on  the  shelves  according  to 
their  numbers,  with  the  result  that  material  on  the  same  sub- 
ject is  grouped  together.  In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  locate 
at  a  moment's  notice  books  dealing  with  any  particular  sub- 
ject, e.g.  the  history  of  the  United  States.  In  a  large  library, 
however,  there  may  be  a  great  many  histories  of  the  United 
States,  and  sometimes  the  request  is  for  a  book  by  some  spe- 
cial author,  e.g.  McLaughlin's  History  of  the  American  Na- 
tion. Of  course  this  could  be  found  by  looking  over  all  of 
the  books  marked  973,  but  the  task  in  a  library  where  there 
is  a  large  number  of  United  States  histories  would  be  a  long 
one.  In  order  to  obviate  this,  it  has  seemed  practical  to 
arrange  alphabetically  by  their  authors'  surnames  all  books 
bearing  the  same  classification  number.  In  this  way,  Mc- 
Laughlin's  History  of  the  American  Nation  precedes  McMas- 
ter's  History  of  the  People  of  the  United  States  and  follows 
Channing's  History  of  the  United  States. 

It  would  be  possible  to  shelve  the  books  alphabetically 
from  the  author's  name  as  it  appears  on  the  binder's  title, 
but  this  method  is  slow  and  inconvenient.  It  is  much  easier 
to  find  and  to  replace  books  if  the  author's  surname  appears 
directly  below  the  classification  number.  Here  again  a  short- 
hand method  is  brought  to  bear  and  the  author's  name  in- 
stead of  being  written  out  in  full  is  expressed  by  his  initial 
letter  (or  sometimes  letters,  in  the  case  of  vowels  or  s)  fol- 
lowed by  two  or  three  Arabic  numerals.  These  numbers  are 
assigned  from  the  Cutter  or  Cutter-Sanborn  tables  which  are 
so  "constructed  that  the  names  whose  initials  are  followed 
by  some  of  the  first  letters  of  the  alphabet,  have  the  first 
numbers,  and  those  in  which  the  initials  are  followed  by  later 
letters  have  later  numbers. 


23 


19-21  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

E.g.,       Garden,  167  Gould,  729 

Gerry,  321  Grand,  762 

Gibbon,  352  Grote,  915 

Glover,  518  Guizot,  949 

If  the  books  are  arranged  in  the  order  of  these  numbers, 
of  course  they  will  be  in  alphabetic  order. '  '3  Thus,  for  Chan- 
ning,  C362  is  used ;  for  McLaughlin,  M222 ;  for  McMaster, 
M227.  This  combination  of  letters  and  figures  to  express  an 
author's  name  is  called  the  author  number. 

19.  Work  Mark. — Sometimes  an  author  has  written  sev- 
eral books  on  the  same  subject;    e.g.  Channing  has  written 
one  book  entitled  A  History  of  the  United  States  and  another 
entitled  First  Lessons  in  United  States  History.     In  order 
to  distinguish  between  these  and  give  each  a  definite  location, 
a  letter,  called  the  work  mark,  is  added  to  the  author  num- 
ber.    This  letter  is  usually  the  first  letter  of  the  first  word 
not  an  article  in  the  title;   in  this  case,  "h"  or  "f." 

20.  Book  Number. — The  work  mark,  as  a  rule,  follows 
the  author  number — for  example,  C362h — and  the    two    to- 
gether form  the  book  number. 

21.  Call  Number. — The  classification  number  designat- 
ing the  subject  with  which  the  book  deals  and  the  book  num- 
ber representing  the  author  and  title  of  the  book  are  usually 
written  the  one  above  the  other,  and  together  form  the  call 

973 

number ;   thus,  «0,,0,       In  cases  where  there  are  several  cop- 
Lobzn. 

ies  or  various  volumes  of  the  same  work,  distinction  between 
the  separate  books  is  made  by  the  addition  of  the  volume  or 

973 
copy  number;   i.e.,  C362h  No  two  books  in  the  library 

v.  2  cop.  5. 

should  have  the  same  designation.    A  call  number  should  re- 
fer to  one  book  and  one  book  only. 

The  uses  of  the  call  number  are  many.  By  distinguishing 
a  book  from  every  other  book  in  the  collection,  it  affords  a 


3Cutter,    C.    A.      Explanation    of    the    alphabetic-order   marks.       (Three-figure 
tables)    1913.     p.    3-4. 

24 


CALL  NUMBERS  22 

convenient  device  by  which  the  book  is  called  for  at  the  Loan 
Desk  and  referred  to  in  all  the  records  of  the  library.  It 
assigns  to  the  work  a  definite  location  on  the  shelves,  group- 
ing it  with  other  material  on  the  same  or  related  subjects; 
and  by  the  natural  sequence  of  its  symbols,  it  facilitates  both 
the  finding  and  the  replacing  of  books  on  the  shelves. 

There  are  numerous  variations  and  exceptions  to  the  gen- 
eral rule  for  the  forming  of  call  numbers.  In  most  cases  these 
variations  can  be  accounted  for  by  the  desire  to  have  certain 
books  stand  together  on  the  shelves  in  the  most  usable  and 
convenient  order.  A  thorough  study  of  them  is  not  necessary 
for  the  person  who  is  simply  to  use  the  numbers  and  not 
assign  them.  In  the  following  list  of  numbers  (arranged  in 
the  order  in  which  the  books  would  stand  on  the  shelves) 
there  have  been  included  some  numbers  representing  those 
formed  in  the  usual  way  and  others  representing  some  of  the 
more  commonly  found  exceptions  to  the  general  rule  with  an 
analysis  and  explanation  of  each  figure  and  letter.  It  will 
be  seen  from  a  study  of  these  numbers  that  each  symbol  has 
a  definite  reason  for  being  there  and  this  knowledge  may 
tend  to  emphasize  the  importance  of  avoiding  mistakes  in 
copying  call  numbers  and  may  add  something  of  interest  to 
the  mere  routine  of  using  them. 

22.  Call  number,  Author  and  Title    Analysis  of  Call  numbers 

370  Henderson,  Charles  Han-      i-  3  Sociology;   7  Educa- 

H38w       ford  tion;    °   Seneral  treat' 

TTTI     j.  •    -j.  ^    i         i         L    T  ment.     H38    Cutter    no. 

What  is  it  to  be  educated        f m  Henderson .   w  first 

letter  of  first  word  of 
title  beginning  with 
What. 

C  Harvard  graduates  maga-     2-  c  used  for  publications 

H26uTm  zine  of  colle^es  as  a  substi- 

tute  for  the  number  378. 
H26  Cutter  no.  for  Har- 
vard; u  University;  T 
alumni  publication  (see 
Decimal  classification 
under  378) ;  m  maga- 
zine. 
25 


22 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


823  Defoe,  Daniel 

D36r  Robinson  Crusoe 


823  Dickens,  Charles 

D55  Complete  works. 

Ed  1912 


1912 


823  Dickens,  Charles 
D55b  Barnaby  Budge 

823  Dickens,  Charles 
D55bl          Bleak  House 

823  Dickens,  Charles 
D55d  David  Copperfield 

823  Dickens,  Charles 
D55e  Edwin  Drood 

823  Jackson,  Henry 
D55eYj        About  Edwin  Drood 

823  Dickens,  Charles 
D55n  Nicholas  Nickleby 


3.  8  Literature;  2  English; 
3   Fiction;     D36   Cutter 
no.  for  Defoe;  r  Kobin- 
son. 

4.  8  Literature ;   2  English ; 
3  Fiction;     D55  Cutter 
no.     for    Dickens;     Ed. 
1912      Complete     works 
edited  in  19 12.4 

5.  823  and  D55   explained 
in  4;    b  Barnaby. 

5,a.  823  and  D55  explained 
in  4;  bl  Bleak.5 

6.  823  and  D55  explained 
in  4.     d  David. 

7.  823  and  D55  explained 
in  4.     e  Edwin. 

8.  823    and  D55    explained 
in  4.     e  Edwin;  Y  crit- 
icism;"   j    Jackson. 

9.  823   and  D55   explained 
in  4.     n  Nicholas. 


823  Chesterton,  Gilbert  Keith    u>.  823  and  D55  explained 

D55Yc         Charles  Dickens,  a  crit-         in   4-    Y  criticism;     c 
ical  study. 


Chesterton. 


823  Whipple,  Edwin  Percy 

D55Yw       Charles  Dickens,  the  man 
and  his  work. 


-  823  and  D55Y  explained 
in  4  and  w>  w 


4Editions  of  the  complete  works  of  an  author  are  grouped  according  to  date 
of  publication  and  stand  on  the  shelves  preceding  the  individual  works. 

6If  there  is  more  than  one  of  an  author's  works  having  the  same  class  no. 
and  titles  beginning  with  the  same  letter,  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  one  from 
the  other  by  the  use  of  two  or  more  letters  in  the  work  mark. 

"A  capital  V  following  the  author  no.  indicates  a  bibliography;  a  capital 
W,  a  biography ;  a  capital  Y,  a  criticism ;  and  a  capital  Z,  a  handbook  or 
dictionary.  They  are  used  with  a  view  to  bringing  all  of  the  material  on  a 
subject  together  on  the  shelves. 


26 


CALL.  NUMBERS 


22 


845H87    Hugo,  Victor  Marie,  comte. 
I  1880         Oeuvres  completes 

(1880-89) 


910.5 

NG 


f912 
914rA 


National  geographic  maga-   13- 
zine 


8  Literature;  4  French; 
5  authors  from  1789  to 
the   present   day;7    H87 
Cutter  no.  for  Hugo.    I 
complete    works     (From 
special   scheme  of  num- 
bers);      1880     date     of 
publication. 

9  History;  1  Geography 
and    travel;     0    general 
treatment;       .5    period- 
ical.    NG  National  geo- 
graphic. 


Rand,  McNally  &  Co.,  pub.    **•  *  folio  size;8  9  History; 
The  library  atlas  of  the  Geography  and  travel; 

world.    (1914) 


2  Maps,  atlases,  etc. 
914  from  1914  (the  date 
of  publication  )  ;  r  Rand ; 
A  atlas. 


913.38      Seyffert,  August  Oskar 
-Se91En        Dictionary    of    classical 
antiquities  . . .  (Translated 
by)  Henry  Nettleship  and 
J.  E.  Sandys. 


15.  9  History;  1  Geography 
and  travel;  3  antiqui- 
ties; 3  Ancient  world; 
8  Greece ;  Se9  Cutter  no. 
for  Seyffert ;  1  from  first 
word  of  original  title 
' '  Lexicon  der  klassis- 
chen  altertumskunde"  ; 
E  English  translation ; 
n  Nettleship. 

B  Curtis,  George  Ticknor         16.  B  biography  as  a  sub- 

W378c         Life  of  Daniel  Webster          stitute  for  the  no-  920' 

W378  Cutter-Sanborn 
no.  for  Webster;  c 
Curtis. 


B  McMaster,  John  Bach 

W378m       Daniel  Webster 


17.  B   and  W378   explained 
in  16;    m  McMaster. 


7Special  adaptation  of  Decimal  classification  used  in  University  of  Illinois 
Library. 

8"q"  or  "f,"  preceding  a  call  number,  indicates  that  the  book  is  of  quarto 
or  folio  size.  As  there  are  special  shelves  for  these  tall  books,  this  indication 
of  size  is  useful  in  determining  the  proper  location  for  a  book. 


27 


22 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


q920 
G79 


016.942 
C16r 


A942 
G914s 


942 

G82s 

942 

G82s2 

942.05 

C86a 


942.05 
E14Wb 


942.1 
W56 


Great  men  and  famous   18-  <l  quarto  size;    9  His- 
women ;  a  series  of  pen  and         tory>   2  Bi°graPhy;    ° 

general;    G79  Cutter  no. 


pencil  sketches  of  the  lives 
of  more  than  200  of  the 
most  prominent  persons  in 
history. 

Cannon,  Henry  Lewin 

Reading   references   for 
English  history 


for  Great." 


19.  0  General  works;  1 
Bibliography;  6  of  spe- 
cial subjects;  9  His- 
tory; 4  Europe;  2  Eng- 
land; C16  Cutter  no.  for 
Cannon;  r  Eeading. 


Gross,   Charles  ®°-  A  Bibliography  (a  spe- 

Sources    and    literature         cial  adaPtation>  e<luiva- 
of    English    history    from 
the  earliest  times  to  about 
1485. 


lent  to  016)  ;  9  History; 
4  Europe;  2  England; 
G914  Cutter  no.  for 
Gross  ;  s  Sources. 


Green,  John  Richard 
Short    history     of 
English  people. 


the 


Green,  John  Richard 

Short    history    of    the 
English  people.    New  ed. 


21.  9    History;     4   Europe; 
2  England;  G82  Cutter 
no.  for  Green;    s  Short, 

22.  942  and  G82s  explained 
in    21;     2    "new"    (or 
2d)  edition. 


Creighton,  Mandell,  bp.  of    ^.  942  explained  in  21;  05 
London  Tudor  Period;  C 

The  age  of  Elizabeth 


ter  no.  for  Creighton;  a 
Age. 


Beesly,  Edward  Spencer 
Queen  Elizabeth 


24.  942.05  explained  in  21 
and  23;  E14  Cutter  no. 
for  Elizabeth;  W  Biog- 
raphy; b  Beesly. 

Wheatley,    Henry    Benja-   **•  942  explained  in  21;  1 

London;  W56  Cutter  no. 

for  Wheatley. 
The  story  of  London. 


mm 


"When    a   work    has    no    definite    author,    or   is   published    anonymously,    the 
Cutter  no.   is  taken  from  the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an   article. 


28 


CALL  NUMBERS 


23 


943  Henderson,  Ernest  Flagg 

H38s  A  short  history  of  Ger- 

many. 

1912         Stowell,  Charles  Jacob 
St7  Studies  in  trade  union- 

ism in  the  custom  tailoring 
trade. 


9  History;  4  Europe;  3 
Germany;  H38  Cutter 
no.  for  Henderson;  s 
short. 

1912  University  of  Illi- 
nois thesis,  presented  in 
1912;  St7  Cutter  no.  for 
Stowell. 


23.  Arrangement  of  books  on  the  shelves. — In  replacing 
a  book  on  the  shelves  or  in  finding  one  already  on  the  shelves, 
the  classification  number  is  the  first  guide.  All  of  the  900s 
are  together ;  the  930s  before  the  940s ;  the  942.03s  before 
the  942.1s.  Books  having  the  same  classification  number  are 
arranged  alphabetically  by  the  letters  on  the  second  line, 
and  then  decimally  by  the  numbers  following  the  letters; 
thus,  B38  follows  B216  and  precedes  B42.  Those  having  the 
same  class  number  and  the  same  author  number  are  ar- 
ranged alphabetically  according  to  their  work  marks.  The 
following  numbers  illustrate  the  arrangement  of  books  on 
the  shelves  according  to  their  call  numbers. 


510 

H83m 

512 

B68a 

512 
W462c 

512 

W48c 

512 

W48s 

512.814 
K63g 

Howe 

Bowser 

Wells 

Wentworth 

Wentworth 

Kircber 

Mathematics 
for  the 
Practical 
Man 

Academic 
Algebra 

Complete 
Coarse  in 
Algebra 

College 
Algebra 

Shorter 
Course  in 
Algebra 

Group 
Properties 

512.83 
Sco82 


Scott 


Determinants 


520 

M8612 

Moulton 


Introduction 
to  Astronomy 


New  Edition 


Books  are  arranged  on  the  shelves  from  left  to  right  and 
from  the  top  shelf  to  the  bottom  shelf.  Often  the  lowest 
shelf  is  given  over  to  quartos  bearing  the  class  number  of 
the  books  above.  Folios  are  usually  shelved — as  an  economy 
of  space — on  special  shelves  in  a  separate  part  of  the  library. 


24 


CHAPTER  V 
SHELF  LIST 

24.  The  Shelf  List,  as  its  name  implies,  is  a  list  of  the 
books  in  the  library  arranged  in  the  order  in  which  they 
stand  on  the  shelves.  Each  work  is  represented  by  a  separate 
card,  and  these  cards  are  filed  according  to  their  call  num- 
bers.10 The  following  information  appears  on  the  cards: 
call  number,  author's  name,  title  and  accession  number. 
(Accession  numbers  are  the  numbers  assigned  to  books  to 
indicate  the  order  in  which  they  are  added  to  the  library.) 
Figure  1  illustrates  a  shelf  card  for  a  one  volume  work  of 
which  two  copies  are  in  the  library,  copy  one  being  in  the 
General  Library  (this  may  always  be  inferred  if  no  location 
is  designated)  and  copy  two  being  in  a  department  library. 


370   Henderson,  Charles  Hungerford. 
H38w   What  is  it  to  be  educated? 

COP.  2 
EDUCATION 
DEPARTMENT 

23990 

234147  cop. 2 

Figure  1.     Shelf  List  card  for  a  one  volume  work. 

Figure  2  and  Figure  3  illustrate  shelf  list  cards  for  works 
in  sets  and  for  periodicals  or  serial  publications. 


942   Green,  John  Richard. 

G82    History  of  the  English  people. 


COP.  2 

HISTORY 
DEPARTMENT 

COP.  3 

ECONOMICS 

SEMINAR 


27313-16  v.1-4 
283479-82  v.1-4  cop.    2 
312561-63   v.1-3   cop.    3 
312589   v.4  cop.    3 
Figure  2.     Shelf  List  card  for  a  work  in  several  volumes,  copies  of 
which  are  in  different  departments  of  the  library. 


order. 


The  list  of  call  numbers  in  the  preceding  chapter  is  arranged  in  shelf  list 


30 


SHELF  LIST 


24 


634.05  Fruit  growers'  journal. 
F 

i 

11 

21 

31 

41 

51 

61 

71 

81 

91 

2 

12 

22 

32 

42 

52 

62 

72 

82 

92 

3 

13 

23 

33 

43 

53 

63 

73 

83 

93 

k'  4 

14 

24 

34 

44 

54 

64 

74 

84 

94 

5 

15 

25 

35 

45 

55 

65 

75 

85 

95 

k'  6 

16 

26 

36 

46 

56 

66 

76 

86 

96 

k'  7 

17 

27 

37 

47 

57 

67 

77 

87 

97 

k'  8 

18 

28 

38 

48 

58 

68 

78 

88 

98 

k'  9 

19 

29 

39 

49 

59 

69 

79 

89 

99 

kxlo 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

The  library  has  those  that  are  checked 

Figure  3.     Shelf  list  card  for  a  periodical. 

The  Shelf  List  is  of  secondary  importance  to  the  ordi- 
nary user  of  the  library.  Its  main  purpose,  so  far  as  he  is 
concerned,  is  to  indicate  the  number  of  copies  of  a  book  in 
the  library  and  their  location  on  the  Campus;  or 'he  may 
in  rare  cases  use  it  in  making  an  estimate  of  material  in  the 
library  on  a  certain  subject. 


31 


25-27 

CHAPTER  VI 
CARD  CATALOG:    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 

25.  When  a  student  goes  to  the  library  for  the  first  time 
in  quest  of  a  certain  book,  for  example,  Henderson's  What 
is  it  to  be  educated?    he  may  wander  a  few  minutes  about 
the  reading  rooms  seeking  the  book  among  the  many  others 
on  the  shelves,  but  soon  concluding  this  is  a  poor  method  of 
procedure  he  undoubtedly  asks  assistance  from  a  librarian, 
who  directs  him  to  the  card  catalog.     The  catalog  has  a  re- 
lation to  the  library  which  is  analogous  t§  that  which  an  in- 
dex has  to  a  book.    As  he  uses  the  index  in  a  book  to  find 
reference  to  the  page  containing  information  on  some  minute 
topic  he  will  consult  the  index  to  the  library,  that  is  the 
card  catalog,  to  find  the  call  number  of  a  certain  library  book. 

26.  The  card  catalog. — At  one  time  library  catalogs 
were  printed  in  book  form,  well  known  examples  of  which 
are  the   catalogs   of  the   British  Museum   and   the   Boston 
Athenaeum.     A  catalog  made  in  this  way,  however,  is  out 
of  date  as  soon  as  published,  for  entries  of  new  books  may 
not  be  inserted  in  their  alphabetical  places  after  the  printing 
is  finished ;   but  a  card  catalog,  with  the  entry  for  each  work 
on  a  separate  card,  is  the  form  now  in  general  use,  since  it 
may  be  kept  up-to-date  by  filing  in  the  proper  alphabetical 
positions  cards  for  new  works  as  they  are  added  to  the 
collection. 

The  card  catalog  is  in  cases  of  small  drawers  or  trays 
which  are  numbered  consecutively  and  labeled  somewhat  like 
"A-Abel";  " Abem-Acab " ;  "Acac-Ada",  etc.  A  drawer 
can  be  returned  to  its  proper  place  by  noting  the  tray  number 
that  corresponds  to  the  compartment  number  on  a  case.  In 
each  drawer  the  cards  are  arranged  alphabetically  by  the  first 
words  on  the  cards  as  words  are  arranged  on  the  pages  of 
a  dictionary.  This  type  of  catalog  is  known  as  a  dictionary 
card  catalog. 

27.  Heavy  manila  guide  cards,  with  letters  printed  on 
a  projecting  portion  to  indicate  what  card  is  filed  directly 

32 


CARD  CATALOG  28-31 

behind,  are  inserted  at  short  distances  among  the  other  cards. 
They  correspond  to  the  thumb  index  in  a  dictionary. 

28.  One  or  more  cards  for  each  book. — Every   book, 
whether  it  is  kept  in  the  General  Library  or  in  a  department 
library,  has  one  or  more  entries  in  the  catalog,  for  one  card 
may  be  filed  under  the  name  of  the  author,  another  under 
the  first  word  of  the  title  not  an  article,  and  a  third  under 
the  subject.    These  are  called  the  author  card,  the  title  card, 
and  the  subject  card,  on  account  of  their  headings.    The  word, 
name,  or  phrase  at  the  top  of  a  card  by  which  is  determined 
its  alphabetical  position  in  the  catalog  is  the  heading. 

29.  Card  for  author. — The  author  card  has  for  a  head- 
ing the  name  of  the  author.     This  is  called  the  main  entry 
card  because  it  is  the  first  or  principal  card  made  for  books 
by  authors  whose  names  are  known,  whether  the  author  is 
an  individual  or  an  organization.     Books  by  authors  whose 
names   are  undiscovered   and   periodicals   with   no   definite 
author  have  main  entry  cards  under  title. 


370   Henderson,  Charles  Hanford. 
H38w   What  is  it  to  be  educated?  Boston, 
1914. 
462p. 

30.  Card  for  title. — The  title  card  has  for  a  heading  the 
title  or  name  of  the  book  as  given  by  the  author.  Works  with 
unusual  or  striking  titles,  works  published  anonymously,  and 
periodicals  have  title  cards. 


370    What  is  it  to  be  educated?  1914. 
H38w  Henderson,  C.H. 

31.     Card  for  subject. — The  subject  card  has  for  a  head- 
ing (generally  typed  in  red11)  the  word  or  phrase  which  in- 


"Words   which  would  be   in   red   in   the    card    catalog   have   the   letters    in 
bold   faced   type    in   this    and   the   following   examples    of    cards. 

33 


32-33  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

dicates  most  specifically  what  the  book  is  about.  This  heading 
is  selected  by  the  cateiloger.  As  a  rule,  all  works,  with  the 
exception  of  fiction, vplays  and  poems,  have  subject  cards. 


370          Education. 

H38w  Henderson,  Charles  Hanford. 

What  is  it  to  be  educated?  Boston, 
1914. 
462p. 

A  book  about  more  than  one  subject  has  more  than  one 
subject  card.  For  example,  Lippmann's  Engraving  and  etch- 
ing has  a  subject  card  under  Engraving,  and  a  second  one 
under  Etching. 

32.  The  call  slip. — By  consulting  author,  title,  or  sub- 
ject cards,  a  student  can  usually  decide  whether  the  library 
contains  books  by  a  certain  author,  a  book  with  a  given  title, 
or  books  on  a  special  subject.    When  looking  for  a  book  by 
an  author  with  a  common  surname;  e.g.  Principles  of  Com- 
merce by  Brown,  if  the  forenames  are  forgotten,  it  is  quicker 
to  look  under  the  subject  of  the  book  rather  than  under  the 
author's  name,  because  there  are  probably  more  than  a  hun- 
dred cards  with  Brown  as  a  heading.    To  obtain  a  book  from 
the  library,  the  call  number,  which  is  given  in  the  upper  left 
hand  corner  of  the  card,  the  author's  name,  the  title  of  the 
book,  and  the  volume  number  if  the  work  is  in  several  vol- 
umes, should  be  copied  on  a  call  slip  and  presented  at  the 
Loan  Desk. 

33.  Library  of  Congress  cards. — Many  librarians  buy 
the  printed  cards  of  the  Library  of  Congress  for  use  in  their 
catalogs.    These  give  fuller  data  than  the  cards  typed  in  the 
local  library,  such  as  the  dates  of  the  author 's  birth  and  death, 
the  full  name  of  the  publisher,  the  size  of  the  book,  its  price, 
and  sometimes  an  outline  of  its  contents.     The  Library  of 
Congress  call  number  and  additional  headings  are  indicated 
at  the  bottom  of  the  cards. 


34 


CARD  CATALOG  34 


Bailey,  Liberty  Hyde,  1858- 

The  principles  of  fruit-growing,  with  applications 
to  practice,  by  L.  H.  Bailey.  20th  ed.,  completely 
rev.  New  York,  The  Macmillan  company ;  London, 
Macmillan  &  co.,  ltd.,  1915. 

xiv,  432  p.  incl.  front.,  illus.  19^cm.  (Half-title:  The 
rural  science  series,  ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey)  $1.75 

First  published  in  1897. 
1.  Fruit-culture. 

•jr 5^22 

Library  of  Congress  SB355.B15    1915 
Copy  2. 


Copyright  A  397007 


Explanation  of  the  card. — 1858=date  of  author's  birth;  2.0th  ed., 
completely  rev.=20th  edition  completely  revised;  New  York,  The  Mac- 
millan company;  London,  Macmillan  &  co.,  ltd.,  1915=rplace  of  pub- 
lication, name  of  publisher,  and  date  of  publication;  xiv=rpages  num- 
bered with  Eoman  numerals ;  432p.=main  paging ;  incl.  f  ront.= 
including  frontispiece;  illus.— illustrations ;  19^  cm.=zsize  of  the  book 
in  centimeters;  Half-title:  The  rural  science  series=name  of  the  series 
to  which  the  book  belongs;  ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey=:name  of  the  editor 
of  the  series;  $1.75=zprice;  Fruit-culture=isubject  heading  used  in  the 
Library  of  Congress;  15^322inserial  number  of  this  catalog  card; 

SB355.B15   1915=Library  of  Congress   call  number; Copy  2= 

Library  of  Congress  has  a  second  copy;    Copyright  A397007— copyright 
number. 


34.  Additional  information  has  to  be  typed  on  these  cards 
before  they  are  ready  to  be  filed.  The  subject  headings  used 
in  the  local  library  are  not  always  the  same  as  those  suggested 
on  the  Library  of  Congress  cards.  The  following  are  examples 
of  Library  of  Congress  cards  with  the  call  numbers  and  sub- 
ject and  title  headings  of  the  local  library  added. 


35 


35  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


634 

B15pr20        Fruit-culture 

Bailey,  Liberty  Hyde,  1858- 

The  principles  of  fruit-growing,  with  applications 
to  practice,  by  L.  H.  Bailey.  20th  ed.,  completely 
rev.  New  York,  The  Macmillan  company ;  London, 
Macmillan  &  co.,  ltd.,  1915. 

xiv,  432  p.  inch  front.,  illus.  193/£cm.  (Half-title:  The 
rural  science  series,  ed.  by  L.  H.  Bailey)  $1.75 

First  published  in  1897. 

1.  Fruit-culture. 

jg 5322 

Library  of  Congress  SB355.B15     1915 
Copy  2. 


Copyright  A  397007 


813        Caleb  West,   master  diver.        1900. 
Sm6c 

Smith,  Francis  Hopkinson,  1838-1915. 

Caleb  West,  master  diver,  by  F.  Hopkinson 
Smith;  with  illustrations  by  Malcolm  Fraser  and 
Arthur  I.  Keller.  Boston  and  New  York,  Hough- 
ton,  Mifflin  and  company,  1900. 

3  p.  L,  378  p.,  1  1.  front.,  9  pi. 


I.  Title. 

4—15154/2 
Library  of  Congress  PZ3.S674C  5 

813  YF 

35.  Cross  reference  cards. — An  author's  works  are  listed 
under  his  real  name  in  full,  and  a  cross  reference  ' '  see "  card 
is  made  from  the  pseudonym,  or  sometimes  from  the  common 
form  of  his  name. 

36 


CARD  CATALOG  36-37 


Twain,  Mark,  pseud.,   see 
Clemens,  Samuel  Langhorne. 


Matthews,  Brander,   see 
Matthews,  James  Brander. 

36.  When  a  subject  might  be  looked  for  under  either  of 
two  headings;  e.g.  Aviation  or  Aeronautics;  Gothic  archi- 
tecture or  Architecture,  Gothic,  only  one  is  selected  as  a  head- 
ing for  the  publications  pertaining  to  the  subject  and  a  cross 
reference  ''see"  card  is  made  from  the  form  of  heading  not 
chosen  to  the  one  that  is  used,  as  follows: 


Aviation,  see 

Aeronautics 


Gothic  architecture,  see 

Architecture,  Gothic 

37.  Reference  is  made  from  a  subject  heading  in  use  to 
related  subject  headings,  also  in  use,  by  means  of  a  cross  ref- 
erence "see  also"  card.  If  the  reader  does  not  find  the  sort 
of  books  he  is  looking  for  among  the  cards  under  a  particular 
subject;  e.g.  Aeronautics,  he  may  find  just  what  he  has  in 
mind  by  consulting  the  cards  for  the  related  subjects  referred 
to  on  the  following  "see  also"  card. 


Aeronautics,  see  also 

Aeronautics,  Military 
Airships 
Balloons 
Kites 
For  the  filing  of  the  ' '  see  also ' '  card  see  section  72. 


37 


38-41 

CHAPTER  VII 
CARD  CATALOG  (Continued):   DETAILS 

38.  Phrase  and  compound  subject  headings. — If  a  per- 
son examines  the  catalog  carefully  he  will  notice  that  sub- 
ject headings  are  occasionallymade  up  of  a  phrase  or  com- 
pound heading. 

Church  and  state 
Cost  of  living 
Government  ownership 

39.  Inverted     subject     headings. — Sometimes     subject 
phrases  are  inverted  in  order  to  bring  the  more  important 
word  first:  e.g.,  Insurance,  Life. 

40.  Subdivided  subject  headings. — Large  subjects  are 
usually  divided  into  smaller  groups  or  subheadings. 

Music  France 

Music — Dictionaries  France — Army 

Music — History  France — Description  and  travel 

Music — Periodicals  France — History 

Mines  and  mining  France — History — Early  period — 987 

Mines  and  mining — Alaska  France — History — Capet  and  Valois, 

Mines  and  mining — Canada  987-1589 

Only  literature  and  language  subjects  about  a  country 
have  the  adjective  form  of  the  country  for  subject  headings. 

French  language  French  poetry 

French  language — Dictiona-  French  poetry — Collections 

ries  French  poetry — History  and  crit- 
French  language — Grammar  icism 

41.  Subject  cards  for  biography. — The  name  of  the  per- 
son written  about  is  used  ^or  the  subject    heading.      Some 
biography  cards  are  green. 


For  biography  of 

Milton,  John,  see 

B   Garnett,  Richard. 

M662g  Life  of  John  Milton.  London,  1890. 
205p. 

38 


CARD  CATALOG  DETAILS  42-44 

42.  A  book  which  is  about  a  few  persons  has  a  subject 
card  for  each.  For  example,  Glover's  Poets  and  Puritans 
would  have  nine  subject  cards;  one  for  each  of  the  writers 
mentioned  in  the  contents  of  the  following: 


For  biography  of 

Milton,  John,  see 

928.2  Glover,  Terrot  Reaveley. 

G51p    Poets  and  Puritans.  London,  1915. 

323p. 

Contents. -Spenser.  Milton.  Eve- 
lyn.  Bunyan.   Cowper.   Boswell. 
Crabbe.   Wordsworth.   Carlyle. 

43.  Subject  cards  for  criticism. — A  book  criticizing  a 
person  or  his  work  as  a  whole  has  for  a  subject  heading  the 
name  of  the  person  criticised. 


For  Criticism  of 

Milton,  John,  see 

821    Thompson,  Elbert  Nevius  Sebring. 
M64Yth  Essays  on  Milton.   New  Haven, 
1914. 
217p. 

44.  A  criticism  or  review  of  a  specific  work  has  for  a 
subject  heading  the  name  of  the  author  and  the  title  of  the 
work  criticised.  Some  criticism  cards  are  yellow.  For  the 
filing  of  criticism  cards  see  sections  68-69. 


For  Criticism  of 

Milton,  John, 

Paradise  lost,     see 

821    Woodhull,  Marianna. 
M64pYw  The  epic  of  Paradise  lost  ;  twelve 
essays.   New  York,  1907. 
375p. 


39 


45-48  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

45.  Subject  card  for  bibliography. — This  card  may  have 
at  the  top  the  phrase  For  bibliography  of,  or  it  may  include 
the  abbreviation  Biblwg.  as  a  subdivision  of  the  heading. 
Some  bibliography  cards  are  blue. 


Drama — Bibliog. 

792     Chambers,   Edmund  Kerchever. 

C35       Mediaeval  stage.    Oxford,  1903.    v.l, 

v.l     pref.   p. 13-42. 

46.  Subject  card  for  a  periodical. — A  magazine  on  a 
definite  topic  has  for  a  subject  heading  the  name  of  the  sub- 
ject about  which  the  magazine  deals,  followed  by  the  word 
Periodicals. 


770.5        Photography— Periodicals 

PH  Photo   era;   the  American  journal 

of  photography.  IS9S-Feb.  1903, 
July  1903-date.  Boston,  1398-date. 
v.1-70,  no.  2,  11 -date. 

" — date"  on  the  above  example  means  that  the  library 
has  the  current  or  recent  numbers.  Any  gaps  in  the  library 
file  are  noted;  in  this  instance,  numbers  for  March  through 
June,  1903,  are  lacking. 

47.  Title  card  for  a  periodical. — A  periodical  has  a  card 
with  its  name  as  a  heading.  Since  periodicals  have  no  definite 
author,  this  is  the  main  card  and  in  the  case  of  many  period- 
icals the  only  card. 


051  Atlantic  monthly,  Nov.  1857-cfo/e.  Boston, 
A  1857-</a*e. 

v.l—  date. 

48.     Joint  author  cards. — When  a  book  is  by  more  than 
one  author  an  entry  is  made  under  each  author's  name. 

40 


CARD  CATALOG  DETAILS  49-50 


720.9     Kimball,    Sidney  Fiske  and  Edgell, 
K56h          G.H. 

History  of  architecture.     New 
York,    c!918. 

621p. 


720.9   Edgell,  George  Harold. 

K56h   Kimball,  Sidney  Fiske  and  Edgell, 

G.H. 

History  of  architecture.  New 
York,  cl918. 

621p. 

49.    Editor,  translator,  compiler,  and  illustrator  cards. — 

If  the  person  is  sufficiently  prominent,  or  a  book  might  be 
wanted  because  of  its  editorship  or  illustrations,  a  card  is 
included  with  the  name  of  the  editor,  translator,  compiler, 
or  illustrator  as  heading,  followed  by  the  abbreviation  ed., 
tr.,  comp.,  or  illus. 


822.33   Hudson,  Henry  Norman,    ed. 
S7h     Shakspere,  William. 

Tragedy  of  Hamlet;  ed.  by  H.N. 
Hudson.   Boston,  c!879. 

253p. 

50.  Cards  for  parts  of  a  book. — A  book  which  includes 
works  by  different  authors  may  have  a  so-called  author  ana- 
lytical card  under  the  name  of  each  author,  with  page  ref- 
ence  to  his  work. 


808.3  Maupassant,  Henri  Rene  Albert  Guy 

C64s    de. 

The  necklace,  and  The  string, 
tr.  from  the  French  by  the  editor, 
Sherwin  Cody,  (see  Cody,  Sherwin, 
ed.   Selections  from  the  world's 
greatest  short  stories.   Chicago, 
1902.   p. 319-42.) 

41 


51-54  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

51.     A  story,  play,  or  poem  which  is  published  in  a  col- 
lection may  have  a  title  analytical  card. 


Middle  years . 
813     James,  Henry. 

J23      Novels  and  tales.  New  York,  1907. 
Ed. 1907  v.16,  p. 75-105. 
v.16 

52.  If  specific  parts  of  a  book  treat  of  different  subjects 
a  subject  analytical  card  is  sometimes  made  for  each  subject. 
See  section  42. 

53.  Series  card. — The  series  to  which  a  book  belongs  is 
usually  noted  on  the  author  and  subject  cards.    See  sections 
33-34.      For  an  important  series  a  card  is  inserted  in  the 
catalog,  listing  all  the  books  in  the  series  which  the  library 
possesses. 


Rural  science  series  ;  ed. 
H.  Bailey, 

by  L. 

634 
B15pr20 
635 
J767 

Bailey 
fruit 
Jordan 
mals  . 

,  L.H. 
growing 
,  W.H. 
7th  ed. 

Principles 
.  20th  ed. 
Feeding  of 
1909. 

of 
1915. 
ani- 

54.  Edition. — Such  phrases  as  3d  ed.,  new  ed.,  ed.  2  rev. 
and  enl.  after  the  title  of  a  book  refer  to  the  edition.  Sep- 
arate cards  are  now  used  for  each  edition  in  the  library,  but 
formerly  the  items  of  a  later  edition  were  added  to  the  cards 
for  an  earlier  edition  already  in  the  library,  as  follows: 


342.42  Lowell,  Abbott  Laurence. 
L95g     Government  of  England.  New 
York,  1908. 
2v. 

342.42  New  ed.  with  additional 

L95g2    chapter.   New  York,  1912. 
2v. 

42 


CARD  CATALOG  DETAILS  55 

55.  Pamphlets. — Those  pamphlets  not  considered  of 
sufficient  value  for  complete  cataloging  have  a  manila  card 
under  the  author 's  name,  including  brief  title  of  the  pamphlet 
and  a  classification  number  preceded  by  "P"  (pamphlet). 


P385  Dunn,  Samuel  0. 

The  present  railway  situation. 


12Mrl9   Union  league  club   Gift 


56-59 

CHAPTER  VIII 

CARD  CATALOG  (Continued):    PUBLICATIONS  OF 
GOVERNMENTS,  SOCIETIES,  AND  INSTITUTIONS 

56.  The  catalog  contains  author  cards  not  only  for  per- 
sons but  also  for  bodies  or  organizations  which  are  regarded 
as  the  authors  of  works  published  in  their  names  or  by  their 
authority. 

57.  Card  for  a  government  as  author. — Works  published 
officially  by  the  officers  of  a  country,  state,  or  city  are  entered 
under  the  name  of  the  country,  state,  or  city,  and  the  name 
of  the  office  from  which  the  publications  issue  is  generally 
used  as  a  subheading.     If  the  name  of  the  office  commences 
with  such  a  word  as  department,  bureau,  division,  board,  etc. 
it  is  usually  inverted  or  filed  as  if  inverted  in  order  to  facili- 
tate finding  the  card  in  the  catalog. 


630   U.S.  Agriculture,  Department  of. 
Un3f   Farmers1  bulletin.  Washington, 
1889-date. 
No.  1  -date. 

58.  Card  for  an  institution  as  author. — Publications  of 
colleges  and  universities  which  are  of  sufficient  importance 
to  be  cataloged,  and  publications  of  libraries,  museums,  and 
other  institutions,  as  a  general  rule  are  entered  under  the 
name  of  the  college,  university,  library,  museum,  etc.  if  the 
name  is  distinctive. 


C     Johns  Hopkins  university. 

J62k   Celebration  of  the  twenty-fifth 

anniversary  of  the  founding  of  the 
university  and  inauguration  of  Ira 
Remsen,  LL.D.,  as  president  of 
the  university.  Baltimore,  1902. 
182p. 

59.     Publications    of    libraries,    municipal    universities, 
chambers  of  commerce,  and  other  institutions  without  dis- 

44 


CARD  CATALOG:   GOVERNMENTS,  ETC.          60-61 

tinctive  names  are  usually  entered  under  the  name  of  the 
place  in  which  the  institution  is  situated. 


670    Rochester,  N.Y.  Chamber  of  com- 
R586r   merce. 

Rochester,  N.Y. ,  the  city  of 
varied  industries.  Rochester, 
1912. 
51p. 

60.     Exception:   Publications  of  American  state  univer- 
sities are  entered  under  the  name  of  the  state. 


505   Wisconsin  university. 
WU     Bulletin:  science  series.  Madi- 
son, 1894-date. 
v.I-date. 

61.     Card  for  a  society  as  author: — The  publications  of 
a  society  or  company  are  entered  under  its  name. 


620.6  American  society  of  mechanical 
MEJ     engineers. 

Journal.  Oct.  1 906 -date.  Baltimore, 
1906-date. 

v.28-date. 


q385.4  Illinois  central  railroad  com- 
116      pany. 
Annual  report  for  the  year  end- 
ing June  30. 

1900 
1901 
1902 
1903 
1904 
^19050.55 
>/l  906  0.56 
^19070.57 
>/  19080.55 
19U9 

k/19100.60 
^19110.67 
^19120.62 
1913 
1914 
1915 
^19160.66 
^19170-67 
1918 
1919 

1920 
1921 
1922 
1923 
1924 
1925 
1926 
1927 
1928 
1929 

1930 
1931 
1932 
1933 
1934 
1935 
1936 
1937 
1938 
1939 

1940 
1941 
1942 
1943 
1944 
1945 
1946 
1947 
1948 
1949 

1950 
1951 
1952 
1953 
1954 
1955 
1956 
1957 
1958 
1959 

The  Library  has  those  that  are  checked 
University  of  Illinois  Library 


45 


62-64 

CHAPTER  IX 
ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  IN  THE  CATALOG 

62.  In  the  dictionary  card  catalog  all  varieties  of  cards, 
whether  author,  subject,  title,  or  cross  reference,  as  a  rule  are 
arranged  alphabetically  by  their  headings,  disregarding  the 
initial  articles.     The  alphabetizing  is  by  words  and  not  by 
letters. 

(a)  In  the  South   Seas  not,   (b)  Inchbald,  Mrs.  Elizabeth 

Inchbald,  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Indiana 

Indian  blankets  and  their  Indian   blankets    and    their 

makers  makers 

Indiana  Innes,  Arthur  Donald 

The  inn  of  disenchantment  In  the  South  Seas 

Innes,  Arthur  Donald  The  inn  of  disenchantment 

New,  Arthur  William  New,  Arthur  William 

New  Castle,  Col.  Newberry  library,  Chicago 

New  Zealand  New  Castle,  Col. 

Newberry  library,  Chicago  Newcastle,    Me. 

Newcastle,  Me.  Newspapers 

News  review  News  review 

Newspapers  New  Zealand 

63.  An  exception  to  this  arrangement  is  the  filing  of 
some  prefix  names. 

Van  Buren  La  Farge 

Vancouver  Lamartine 

Vanderlip  La  Motte-Fouque 

Van  Dyke  Lancaster 

64.  Abbreviations. — Proper  names  beginning  with  Me, 
M',  and  St.  are  filed  as  if  spelled  Mac,  Saint. 

Me  Atee  St.  Louis 

Macaulay  Saint  Maur 

M'Cord  St.  Paul 
Me  Cormick 

Such  abbreviations  as  Dr.,  Mr.,  Mrs.  are  arranged  as  if 
spelled  in  full.  The  same  is  true  of  titles  beginning  with 
numerals. 

46 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  65-68 

65.  Forenames,  surnames,  titles  of  books  with  the  same 
entry  word. — When  forenames,  surnames,  and  titles  of  books 
have  the  same  entry  word  the  arrangement  is  as  follows:— 
Saints,  rulers  alphabetically  by  countries  and  under  countries 
numerically,  princes  and  nobles,  surnames  alphabetically  by 
forenames,  titles  of  books  alphabetically. 

George,  Saint 

George  2,  King  of  Great  Britain 
George  3,  King  of  Great  Britain 
George  1,  King  of  Greece 
George,  Prince  of  Denmark 
George,  Edward  Augustus 
George,  Walter  Lionel 
George  Dandin    (title) 

66.  Heading's  with  the  same  surname. — Headings  begin- 
ning with  the  same  surname  are  arranged  alphabetically  by 
forenames  or  initials. 

George,  Edward  Augustus 

George,  Henry 

George,  Hereford  Brooke 

67.  Books  by  the  same  author. — An  author's  publica- 
tions are  filed  in  the  order  of  complete  collections  arranged 
chronologically,  selections  from  the  complete  collections,  sin- 
gle works  arranged  alphabetically  by  titles,  single  works  as 
joint  authors. 

Van  Dyke,  Henry.    Days  off 

Van  Dyke,  Henry.     Fisherman's  luck 

Van  Dyke,  Henry.     Little  rivers 

Browning,  Eobert.  Works.     c!889 

Browning,  Eobert.  Works.     c!915 

Browning,  Eobert.  Dramas 

Browning,  Eobert.  Blot  in  the   'scutcheon 

Browning,  Eobert.  The  ring  and  the  book 

Browning,  Eobert.  Sordello 

Browning,  Eobert  and  Browning,  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Barrett.  Letters 

68.  Author  as  subject. — Subject  cards  about  an  author, 
including  bibliography,  biography,  and  general  criticism,  are 
filed  after  all  the  author  cards  for  his  works. 

47 


69-73  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Browning,  Eobert.  Bordello 

Browning,  Eobert.  Bibliog. 

Browning,  Kobert.  Biography 

Browning,  Eobert.  Criticism 

69.  Criticism  of  a  work. — Subject  cards  about  a  specific 
work  are  filed  after  the  author  card  for  the  text  of  the  work. 

Browning,  Eobert.     The  ring  and  the  book    (text  of  the  poem) 
Browning,  Eobert.     The  ring  and  the  book    (criticism) 

70.  Books  by  various  authors  with  the  same  subject 
heading. — Cards  with  the  same  subject  heading  are  filed 
alphabetically  by  authors'  names.     For  example,  under  the 
subject  heading  Birds,  a  publication  by  Beal  entitled  Some 
Common  Birds  would  file  before  a  book  by  Hudson  entitled 
Adventures  among  Birds. 

71.  Person,  subject,  title,  with  the  same  entry  word.— 
When  the  same  entry  word  is  used  for  persons,  subjects,  and 
titles,  the  arrangement  is  in  the  order  of  person,  subject,  title. 

Law,  William    (person) 

Law  (subject) 

Law  as  a  means  to  an  end   (title) 

72.  Cross  reference  "see  also"  card  and  subdivisions  of 
a  subject. — Under  a  subject  which  is  subdivided  the  order 
of  arrangement  is  single  word  subject,  "see  also"  card,  sub- 
divided subject,  inverted  subject,  phrase  subject. 

Law  (single  word  subject) 

Law,  see  also 

Law — Societies  (subdivided  subject) 

Law,  Primitive   (inverted  subject) 

Law  libraries   (phrase  subject) 

73.  Person,  subject,  title,  place,  with  the  same  entry 
word. — When  persons,  places,  subjects,  and  titles  have  the 
same  entry  word  the  arrangement  is  in  the  order  of  person, 
place,  subject,  title. 

Orange,  Beatrice  (person) 
Orange,  France  (place) 
Orange,  N.  J.    (place) 
Orange  (subject) 
Orange  Judd  farmer  (title) 

48 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  CARDS  74-75 

74.  Arrangement  under  place. — Under  a  country,  state, 
or  city,  the  cards  are  in  this  order :  first,  works  by  the  coun- 
try, state,  or  city  as  author  and  works  about  the  country,  state, 
or  city,  arranged  in  one  alphabet;    second,  societies,  institu- 
tions, and  titles  beginning  with  the  name  of  the  country,  state, 
or  city,  filed  in  another  alphabet. 

Illinois  (author) 

Illinois   (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture  (subject) 

Illinois — Agriculture,  Dept.  of    (author) 

Illinois — Education   (subject) 

Illinois — Educational  commission   (author) 

Illinois — Zoology    (subject) 

Illinois  association  of  teachers  of  English   (author) 

Illinois  central  railroad  company   (author) 

Illinois  central  railroad  company  (subject) 

Illinois  magazine   (title) 

Illinois  university — Agricultural  experiment  station   (author) 

75.  History  subdivided  by  periods. — The  history  of  a 
number  of  the  largest  countries   is   subdivided  by   periods, 
which  are  arranged  chronologically. 

France — History 

France — History — Bibliog. 

France — History — Sources 

France — History — Early  period — 987 

France — History — Capet  and  Valois,  987-1589 


49 


76-77 

CHAPTER  X 
THE  PARTS  OF  A  BOOK 

76.  If  one  is  to  make  a  careful  and  intelligent  use  of 
the  contents  of  books,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  knowledge 
of  the  significance  and  importance  of  the  various  parts  which 
go  into  the  make-up  of  present  day  printed  books.     These 
parts  vary  in  number  and  in  arrangement,    but    the    order 
commonly  found  is  as  follows:    (1)  title-page,  (2)  copyright 
date,  (3)  preface,  (4)  table  of  contents,  (5)  list  of  illustra- 
tions, maps,  etc.,  (6)  introduction,  (7)  body  of  the  book,  (8) 
appendix,  notes  or  other  supplementary  material,  and   (9) 
index. 

77.  Title-page. — The  title-page  usually  gives  the  full 
title,  the  name  of  the  author  or  editor,  the  edition  if  other 
than  the  first,  the  place  of  publication,  the  name  of  the  pub- 
lisher, and  the  date  of  publication.    From  the  title  one  can 
often  get  some  indication  of  the  field  covered  by  the  work  and 
sometimes  may  judge  of  the  class  of  readers  for  whom  it  was 
intended  or  the  viewpoint  of  the  author. 

The  author's  name,  if  he  is  an  authority  in  his  field,  car- 
ries with  it  some  guarantee  of  the  value  of  the  work.  Often 
a  note  added  after  his  name  on  the  title-page  lists  the  univer- 
sity degrees  which  he  holds,  societies  of  which  he  is  a  mem- 
ber, or  work  he  has  done  which  fits  him  for  the  special  under- 
taking in  hand. 

"Revised  and  Enlarged  Edition,"  "Third  Edition,"  etc. 
indicate  a  revision  of  the  original  work  with  additions,  cor- 
rections or  rearrangement  of  material.12 

The  place  of  publication  often  throws  light  on  the  nation- 
ality of  the  author  and  this  is  important  as  being  a  probable 
indication  of  the  viewpoint  from  which  the  book  was  written. 
In  some  cases  this  influences  materially  the  treatment  of  a 
subject. 


term    edition   should    not  be    confused    with    "impression"    which   indi- 
cates merely  a   reprinting  without  alteration  from   the   original  type  or  plates. 


50 


PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  78-81 

The  name  of  a  well-known  and  reliable  publisher  on  the 
title-page  of  a  book  usually,  though  not  always,  insures  a 
well  printed,  well  edited,  and  dependable  work.  Some  pub- 
lishers specialize  in  a  certain  field,  for  example  in  engineering, 
and  books  in  that  field  published  by  them  may  usually  be 
regarded  as  authoritative. 

The  date  on  the  title-page  shows  the  year  in  which  that 
copy  of  the  book  was  printed. 

78.  Copyright  date. — The  copyright  date13 — usually  to 
be  found  on  the  back  of  the  title-page — indicates    in   what 
year  the  book;  was  first  published.  *  This  is  especially  import- 
ant in  subjects  such  as  science  where  new  discoveries  are  con- 
stantly changing  old  theories  and  the  value  of  the  book  de- 
pends in  great  measure  on  whether  or  not  the  results  of  recent 
investigations  are  included.    New  editions  of  a  work  have  as 
a  rule  a  new  copyright  date. 

79.  Preface. — In  the  preface  the  author  addresses  the 
reader  directly.    He  often  states  his  purpose  in  writing  the 
book,  the  class  of  readers  for  whom  he  intended  it,  the  field 
he  has  aimed  to  cover,  and  any  indebtedness  which  he  may 
feel  to  those  who  have  assisted  him  in  the  work. 

80.  Table  of  contents.— The  table  of  contents  may  in- 
clude simply  the  chapter  headings  given  in  the  order  in 
which  they  appear  in  the  book  with  page  references  to  where 
they  will  be  found,  or  it  may  contain  in  addition  to  this  a 
rather  minute  analysis  of  the  sections  or  parts  of  the  chap- 
ters.   Often  by  a  perusal  of  the  table  of  contents  it  is  possible 
to  obtain  a  very  good  idea  of  the  scope  of  a  book  without 
reading  it  through. 

81.  List  of  Illustrations,  Maps,  etc. — Illustrations,  maps, 
plates,  diagrams,  etc.  are  listed  in  most  books  in  the  order 


13Copyright  is  the  "exclusive  right  secured  by  law  to  authors  and  artists  to 
publish  and  dispose  of  their  several  works  for  a  limited  time.  The  copyright 
law  of  the  United  States  requires  the  author  or  artist,  in  order  to  secure  copy- 
right for  works  reproduced  in  copies  for  sale,  to  send  to  the  Copyright  Office, 
Library  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.  C.,  almost  immediately  after  publication, 
two  copies  of  the  work,  with  an  application  for  registration.  .  .and  a  money  order 
for  the  statutory  fee  of  $1."  The  term  of  copyright  is  "28  years  with  the  right 
of  renewal  for  28  years  on  application  within  one  year  prior  to  the  expiration 
of  the  existing  term."  New  Standard  Dictionary. 

61 


82-85  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

in  which  they  appear.  This  list  usually  affords  the  best  and 
quickest  means  of  locating  any  desired-  map  or  illustration 
as  these  frequently  are  not  entered  in  the  index. 

82.  Introduction. — The    introduction,    or    introductory 
chapter. forms  as  a  rule  an  essential  part  of  the  book  and  is 
usually  a  general  survey  of  the  subject  preparing  the  reader 
for  the  treatment  to  follow.     It  differs  from  the  preface  in 
that  it  has  as  its  subject  the  subject  of  the  book  while  the 
preface  has  as  its  subject  the  book  itself, — its  history,  scope 
and  purpose.    The  former  is  usually  written  first,  the  latter 
last,  although  both  may  be  written  by  someone  other  than 
the  author. 

83.  Body  of  the  Book.— The  body  of  the  book  is  the 
text  or  main  part  with  any  illustrations  or  foot-notes  that 
may  accompany  it. 

84.  Appendix,  Notes  or  other  supplementary  material.— 
Material  which  is  not  essential  to  the  completeness  of  the  book 
and  cannot  be  conveniently  included  in  the  text  but  which 
gives  clearness  and  authority  to  the  treatment  by  explanatory, 
statistical  or  documentary  notes,  is  often  added  after  the  text 
in  the  form  of  an  appendix. 

85.  Index. — The  index  of  a  book  is  the  alphabetical  list 
of  topics,  names,  etc.  occurring  in  the  book  with  an  indica- 
tion of  where  each  is  to  be  found.    It  is  the  key  to  the  book, 
and  affords  the  quickest  means  of  finding  a  definite  fact  or 
bit  of  information.     It  differs  from  the  table  of  contents; 
first,  in  order  of  arrangement,  the  one  being  alphabetical,  the 
other  in  the  order  in  which  the  material  appears  in  the  work ; 
second,  in  location  in  the  book,  the  one  being  usually  last  and 
the  other  usually  first;    and  third,  in  the  treatment  of  the 
subject,  the  index  giving  detailed  topics,  the  table  of  con- 
tents general. 

In  the  case  of  a  work  in  a  number  of  volumes,  the  index 
to  the  set  is  usually  in  the  last  volume.  However,  there  may 
be  either  a  separate  index  in  each  volume,  as  in  Bailey's 
Cyclopedia  of  American  Agriculture,  and  no  general  index, 


52 


PARTS  OF  A  BOOK  86 

or  a  general  index  to  the  set  and  also  an  index  for  each 
volume  as  in  the  Cambridge  Modern  History.  For  this  rea- 
son, it  is  important  to  make  sure  what  section  of  a  work  the 
index  proposes  to  cover.  Also,  it  is  well  to  note  the  limita- 
tions, if  any,  as  to  the  content  of  the  index.  There  may  be 
one  index  for  authors  and  one  for  subjects,  or  in  books  of 
poetry  a  separate  index  for  authors,  titles  and  first  lines  of 
poems.  If  any  difficulty  is  experienced  in  understanding  an 
index  reference,  it  is  well  to  turn  to  the  beginning  of  the 
index  where  a  note  will  often  be  found  explaining  any  spe- 
cial symbols  or  abbreviations. 

In  some  indexes  where  there  are  a  number  of  references 
under  a  topic  the  most  important  reference  is  placed  first,  in 
other  cases  it  is  printed  in  a  different  style  of  type,  but  if  no 
indication  is  given,  the  one  covering  the  largest  number  of 
pages  is  probably  the  most  important. 

86.  Abbreviations. — In  the  use  of  books  and  library  rec- 
ords, abbreviations  are  frequently  encountered  and  familiar- 
ity with  their  meaning  will  greatly  facilitate  the  process  of 
finding  a  reference.  The  following  are  some  of  the  abbrevia- 
tions most  often  met  with : 

abr.  abridged,  abridgment 

ad  fin.  ad  finem  (at  the  end) 

agric.  agriculture 

alph.  alphabetical 

A.L.A.  American  library  association 

Amer.  America  or  American 

anon.  anonymous 

app.,  apx.  appendix 

arch.  architecture 

arr.  arranged  or  arrangement 

assn.,  assoc.  association 

bibl.,  bibliog.  bibliography 

biog.  biography 

bk.  book 

bul.  bulletin 

c.  copyright,  chapter,  circa  (about) 

can.  canto 

cat.,  catal.  catalog 


53 


86 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


cf. 

ch.,  chap. 

chem. 

cir.,  circ. 

cm. 

col. 

comp. 

Cong. 

cont. 

cop. 

eye.,  cyclo. 

dept. 

diag.,  diagr. 

diet. 

do. 

doc. 

econ. 

ed. 

educ. 

e.g.,  ex.  gr. 

ency. 

eng. 

Eng. 

enl. 

et  seq.,  et  sq. 

etc. 

facsim. 

ff. 

fig. 

front. 

Ger. 

H.  of  E. 

hist, 

ib.,  ibid.,  ibidem. 

id.,  idem. 

i.e. 

il.,  illus.,  illust. 

in  loc.  cit. 

incl. 

ind. 

inf. 

introd. 

Ital. 

j.,  jour. 


confer  (compare) 

chapter 

chemistry 

circa  (about) 

centimeters 

column  or  colored 

compare,  compiled  or  compiler 

Congress  or  Congressional 

contents  or  continued 

copy  or  copyright 

cyclopedia 

department 

diagram 

dictionary 

ditto  (the  same) 

document 

economics 

edition,  edited  or  editor 

education 

exempli  gratia  (for  example) 

encyclopedia 

engraving,  engineering 

England  or  English 

enlarged    (of  an  edition) 

et  sequens  (and  the  following) 

et  cetera  (and  so  forth) 

facsimile 

following 

figure 

frontispiece 

German  or  Germany 

House  of  Representatives 

history  or  historical 

in  the  same  place 

the  same 

id  est  (that  is) 

illustrated,  illustration 

in  loco  citato  (in  the  place  cited) 

including  or  inclusive 

index 

infra  (below) 

introduction 

Italian  or  Italy 

journal 


54 


PARTS  OF  A  BOOK 

jt.  joint  (of  authors,  editors,  etc.) 

1.  leaf,  line  or  liber  (book) 

lang.  language 

I.e.,  loc.  cit.  loco  citato  (in  the  place  cited) 

lib.  library,  or  liber  (book) 

lit.  literature 

mag.  magazine 

mod.  modern 

MS.   (MSS.  plural)       manuscript 

mun.  municipal 

n.  note 

N.B.  not  a  bene  (note  well) 

n.d.  no  date  of  publication 

n.p.  no  place  of  publication 

n.s.  new  series 

nat.  hist.  natural  history 

no.  numero  (number) 

o.p.  out  of  print 

op.,  opp.  opposite 

p.  page,  pages,  or  part 

pam.  pamphlet 

par.  paragraph 

per.  periodical 

phil.  philosophy 

phot.  photography 

pi.  plate 

pol.  sci.  political  science 

por.,  port.  portrait 

pp.  pages 

pref.  preface 

pro.,  proc.  proceedings 

pseud.  pseudonym 

pt.  part 

pub.  published  or  publisher 

q.v.  quod  vide   (which  see) 

ref.  reference 

rep.,  rept.,  rpt.  report 

rev.  revise,  revised,  reviser  or  review 

sc.  scene  .(of  a  play) 

sc.,  scil.  scilicet    (namely) 

sec.,  sect.  section 

Sen.  Senate 

seq.,  seqq.  sequens  (following) 

ser.  series 


55 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

soc.  sociology  or  society 

Span.  Spanish 

sq.  sequens   (following) 

st.  stanza 

subj.  subject 

sup.  supra  (above) 

sup.,  supp.,  suppl.        supplement 

sq.,  sqq.  •        sequens   (following) 

tab.  table 

t.-p.  title-page 

tr.,  trans.  translated,  translator,  transactions 

v.  volume,  verse,  or  vide  (see) 

viz.  vidilicet  (to  wit,  namely,  that  is  to  say) 

vol.  volume 

v.y.  various  years 

$  section 

H  paragraph 

2-5  two  to  five  inclusive 


56 


87-89 

CHAPTER  XI 
REFERENCE  BOOKS 

87.  Reference  Book  Defined. — "Beference  books  are  the 
clearing-houses  of  knowledge.     They  are  libraries  in  minia- 
ture, focusing  into  a  single  book  information  scattered  thr.ough 
a  thousand  volumes.     They  are  short-cuts  to  learning,  pass- 
keys to  the  accumulated  wisdom  of  the  ages.     The  ordinary 
reader  knows  little  of  them,  and  realizes  but  slightly  the  great 
help  they  would  be  to  him  in  his  daily  reading  and  daily  liv- 
ing."    Kroeger.     Guide  to  tJie  study  and  use  of  reference 
books:   W.  G.  Jordan  in  Literary  era,  8:52. 

A  reference  book,  in  the  strict  sense  of  the  term,  is  a  book 
to  be  consulted  for  information  on  a  definite  point  rather 
than  to  be  read  through.  Typical  wrorks  of  this  kind  are  en- 
cyclopedias, dictionaries,  periodical  indexes,  statistical  publi- 
cations, and  the  like.  There  are,  however,  many  other  works 
not  intended  primarily  for  reference  use  such  as  histories  of 
a  country  or  standard  treatises  in  the  various  fields  of  science, 
industry,  or  art,  which  afford  the  best  material  on  their  sub- 
ject, and  which,  for  answering  questions  in  their  field,  should 
not  be  overlooked. 

88.  "Reference  Collection. — The  term  "reference  collec- 
tion" is  applied  to  the  books  in  the  library  used  primarily 
for  reference  work.     It  may  be  limited  to  reference  books 
proper  or  may  also  include  other  books  that  have  been  found 
helpful  in  answering  questions.    It  is  usually  shelved  apart 
from  the  rest  of  the  books  in  the  library  in  an  accessible  place 
convenient  to  readers.     The  books  as  a  rule  cannot  be  taken 
from  the  library  as  they  are  wanted  immediately  when  needed, 
are  used  often,  and  require  but  a  short  time  for  consultation. 

89.  Points  to  be  Considered  in  Judging  the  Value  of  a 
Book  for  Reference  Use. — Books  suitable  for  reference  use 
should  have  certain  special  characteristics.  Some  of  the  points 
to  be  considered  are  as  follows: 

a.  Authoritativeness.  Can  the  statements  in  the  book  be 
depended  upon  to  be  accurate  ?  In  judging  of  this  the  repu- 

57 


89  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

tation  and  work  of  the  author  may  be  considered.  The  pub- 
lisher should  be  noted.  A  greater  degree  of  confidence  may 
be  put  in  a  book  if  the  separate  articles  are  signed  by  the 
person  writing  them  as  responsibility  for  the  accuracy  of 
the  statements  is  thereby  definitely  fixed.  In  the  case  of  sta- 
tistics, it  is  well  to  note  whether  or  not  they  are  based  on 
official  reports  with  an  exact  reference  to  the  source  from 
which  they  were  taken. 

b.  Scope.     What  is  the  field  which  the  book  aims  to  cover 
and  does  it  really  cover  it?    What,  if  any,  are  the  limitations 
as  to  subject,  country,  or  period  of  time  included?     These 
questions  may  usually  be  answered  by  noting  the  title  of  the 
book  and  by  reading  the  preface,  the  table  of  contents,  the 
introductory   chapter   and   occasional   sections   through   the 
book. 

c.  Arrangement.    Material  in  a  book  for  reference  use 
should  be  arranged  so  as  to  be  easily  and  quickly  found.    If 
there  is  a  classified  arrangement  in  the  body  of  the  work, 
there  should  be  a  good  alphabetical  grouping  of  topics  in  the 
index  or  vice  versa.     It  should  also  be  noticed  whether  or 
not  the  cross-references  are  adequate. 

d.  Character  of  the  articles.    Are  the  articles  long  or 
short,  suited  to  the  specialist  or  the  general  reader?     Are 
topics  of  equal  importance  given  equal  treatment? 

e.  Viewpoint  of  the  author.    Does  the  nationality  of  the 
author,  his  religious,  political  or  personal  convictions  affect 
the  contents  of  the  book?    If  so,  the  book  may  still  be  useful 
for  reference,  but  its  bias  should  always  be  borne  in  mind 
in  any  use  of  the  information  it  gives. 

f.  Bibliography.     Bibliographies    are   usually    desirable 
in  a  book  for  reference  use  as  they  point  the  way  to  a  more 
exhaustive  treatment  of  the  subject  and  indicate  a  more  care- 
ful editorship. 

g.  Date.    In  some  fields,  the  date  of  a  book  affects  very 
directly  the  value  of  the  material  it  contains.    In  such  cases 
the  date  of  publication  should  always  be  compared  with  the 
copyright  date  and  the  preface  date  if  there  is  one.  Whether 

58 


REFERENCE  BOOKS  90 

or  not  the  work  is  kept  up-to-date  by  supplements  may  also 
be  noted. 

h.  Illustrations.  Are  the  illustrations  adequate?  In 
some  subjects  such  as  art,  costume,  etc.,  illustrations  are  an 
essential  feature ;  in  other  cases  as  in  statistics  or  literature, 
their  use  is  entirely  optional. 

i.  Comparison  with  oilier  books.  How  does  the  book  com- 
pare with  other  works  in  the  field  it  covers? 

j.  Physical  make-up  of  the  book.  Is  the  book  well 
printed,  well  bound  and  of  a  size  convenient  to  handle? 

90.  How  to  Use  a  Reference  Book. — If  one  is  not  fa- 
miliar with  the  arrangement  of  a  reference  book,  it  will  be 
found  a  great  saving  of  time  and  energy  to  devote  a  few 
minutes  to  a  study  of  the  book  before  trying  to  get  any  in- 
formation from  it.  This  may  be  done  by  glancing  over  the 
title-page,  the  preface,  the  table  of  contents,  and  any  index 
features  which  the  book  may  have.  The  arrangement  of  the 
main  body  of  the  work,  and  the  appendices  or  supplements 
should  also  be  noted. 


59 


91-92 

CHAPTER  XII 
MAGAZINES  AND  MAGAZINE  INDEXES 

91.  Magazines  are  generally  published  weekly,  monthly, 
or  quarterly  as  numbers  or  parts  of  a  volume  with  consecutive 
paging;  e.g.  the  North  American  review  for  July    1919    is 
number  1  of  volume  210.     When  all  the  parts  of  a  volume 
have  appeared,  usually  including  a  title  page  and  an  index, 
they  are  bound  together,  and  thus  are  retained  for  reference 
use  in  a  convenient  and  durable  form. 

Magazines  are  the  principal  source  of  information  on  ques- 
tions of  recent  interest.  For  book  reviews,  biography,  trav- 
els, popular  treatment  of  art,  science,  and  technology,  and  for 
material  on  all  sorts  of  small  topics  often  unobtainable  in 
books  the  magazines  are  of  great  value.  In  research  work 
along  historical,  political,  or  literary  lines  they  are  useful  for 
contemporary  views  of  persons,  events,  books,  etc.  Students 
will  find  the  periodicals  especially  helpful  in  the  preparation 
of  themes  and  in  debate  work. 

92.  Standard  magazines. — Following  are  the  titles  of  a 
few  standard  magazines  which  are  of  importance  for  gen- 
eral reading,  current  history,  and  book  reviews.     (M  indi- 
cates a  monthly  publication :  W  a  weekly  publication) . 

GENERAL 
American 

Atlantic  monthly,   (M).  National  geographic  magazine,    (M). 

Century,    (M).  Scientific  American,    (W). 

Country  life,   (M).  Scientific  American  monthly,    (MX 

Harper's  monthlyj    (M).  Scribner's  magazine,    (M). 

Living  age,   (W).  Survey,  (W). 

English 

Contemporary  review,  (M). 
Fortnightly  review,    (M). 
Nineteenth  century,   (M). 


60 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  93-94 

CURRENT  EVENTS 
American 

Current  history  magazine,  (M).New  republic,   (W). 

Current  opinion,   (M).  North  American  review,   (M). 

Independent,   (W).  Outlook,   (W). 

Literary  digest,  (W).  Review,  (W). 

Nation,  (W).  Review  of  reviews,  (M). 

World's  work,   (M). 
English 

Graphic,   (W).  Saturday  review,   (W). 

Nation,   (W).  Spectator,    (W). 

BOOK  REVIEWS:  LITERARY  PERIODICALS 
American 

Bookman,    (M).  Nation,  (W). 

Dial,  (M).  Review,    (W). 

English 

Athenaeum,   (W).  Spectator,  (W). 

Saturday  review,   (W). 

FOREIGN   LANGUAGE  ILLUSTRATED  PERIODICALS 

French  Italian 

L 'illustration,   (W).  L 'illustrazione  italiana,  (W). 

German  Spanish 

Illustrirte  zeitung,  (W).  La  illustracion  espanola 

y   americana,    (W). 

93.  Besides  magazines  of  general  interest  the  University 
of  Illinois  Library  has  many  highly  specialized  or  technical 
ones  pertaining  to  the  subjects  taught  in  the  various  courses. 
Of  the  7100  magazines  or  periodicals  currently  received,  not 
including  government  publications  and  experiment  station 
bulletins,  about  3000  are  sent  to  department  libraries,  and 
the  remainder  are  kept  in  the  General  Library.    The  files  of 
many  periodicals  are  complete  from  their  beginnings.  For  the 
cataloging  of  magazines  see  sections  46-47;    for  the  location 
and  arrangement  of  magazines  in  the  General  Library  see 
section  7. 

94.  Magazine   indexes. — On   account   of   the    constant 
stream  of  periodical  articles  appearing  weekly,  monthly,  quar- 

61 


95  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

terly,  from  year  to  year,  many  of  them  would  be  inaccessible 
if  there  were  no  general  periodical  indexes.  These  are  the 
means  of  locating  magazine  articles  by  author,  title,  or  sub- 
ject, just  as  the  index  to  a  book  is  the  means  of  finding  certain 
information  in  that  book. 

95.  Poole's  index  to  periodical  literature,  1802-1881. 
Eev.  ed.  Boston,  Houghton,  1893.  Iv.  in  2. 

— First-fifth  supplements,  Jan.  1, 1882-Jan.  1, 1907. 
Boston,  Houghton,  c!888-1908. 

Contents:  v.  1,  1802-1881  (2  parts)  ;  1st  supplement,  1882- 
1886 ;  2d  supplement,  1887-1891 ;  3d  supplement,  1892-1896 ; 
4th  supplement,  1897-1901 ;  5th  supplement,  1902-1906. 

The  account  of  the  origin  of  this  first  general  periodical 
index  by  W.  F.  Poole,  when  he  was  a  student  at  Yale  college 
and  librarian  of  his  college  society,  is  related  in  the  preface 
to  the  1882  edition  of  Poole's  index,  v.  1,  and  should  be  of 
interest  to  every  college  student. 

Indexes  470  American  and  English  periodicals  of  the  19th 
century,  chiefly  general.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  sub- 
ject or  title.  Subject  entries  are  often  made  by  inverting  the 
title  in  order  to  bring  the  important  word  first.  Necessary 
to  look  under  various  headings  to  be  sure  of  finding  all  the 
articles  on  a  subject.  A  story  or  poem  is  listed  under  its 
title,  and  the  author's  name  if  known  is  given  in  parentheses. 
Thus  Thackeray 's  novel,  The  Newcomes,  which  was  first  pub- 
lished in  a  magazine,  is  entered  under  Newcomes  (W.  M. 
Thackeray).  Reviews  of  books  are  indexed  under  the  name 
of  the  author  whose  work  is  criticised,  if  the  book  has  no 
definite  subject;  e.g.  poetry  or  fiction;  otherwise  under  the 
subject  of  the  book.  A  review  of  Thackeray's  The  Newcomes 
is  listed  under  Thackeray,  but  a  review  of  Macaulay  's  History 
of  England  is  entered  under  England  only,  for  England  is 
the  subject  of  the  work. 

Information  given  in  the  references:  title  of  the  article, 
author's  name  within  parentheses  if  known,  abbreviated  title 
of  the  periodical,  volume  and  page.  In.  the  front  of  each 

62 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  96-98 

volume  is  an  alphabetical  list  of  abbreviations  used  for  the 
periodicals  indexed,  with  the  titles  of  the  magazines  in  full 
and  the  numbers  assigned  to  them  in  the  Chronological  con- 
spectus ;  a  table  by  which  the  years  of  the  different  volumes 
can  be  found. 

96.  Poole's  index  to  periodical  literature,  [1815-1899.] 
Abridged  ed.  Boston,  Houghton,  1901. 

First  supplement,  1900-1904.  Boston,  Houghton, 

1905. 

The  abridged  edition  indexes  in  two  volumes  37  of  the 
most  frequently  used  periodicals. 

97.  Readers'  guide  to  periodical  literature,  1900-date. 
N.  Y.  Wilson,  1905-date. 

V.I,  1900-1904;  v.2,  1905-1909;  v.3,  1910-1914,  v.4,  1915- 
1918.  Continued  by  monthly  numbers  cumulating14  quar- 
terly, annually,  and  triemiially.  An  index  to  general  maga- 
zines, some  U.  S.  government  publications,  and  reports  of 
associations.  V.2-3,  1905-1914,  also  index  many  books  of 
essays,  travel,  lectures,  etc.,  published  since  1900. 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  and  subject,  some- 
times title.  Uniform  subject  headings  and  numerous  cross- 
references.  Information  given  in  the  magazine  references: 
title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known,  abbreviated 
title  of  the  periodical,  volume,  inclusive  page  reference,  and 
exact  date.  Illustrations  and  portraits  are  indicated  by  il 
and  por.  An  alphabetical  list  of  periodicals  indexed,  with 
the  abbreviations  used  for  them,  is  in  the  front  of  each  vol- 
ume or  number;  and  a  list  of  books  indexed,  arranged 
alphabetically  by  authors'  names,  is  in  the  front  of  v.2-3. 

98.  Readers'  guide  to  periodical  literature :  Supplement, 
1907-date.     N.  Y.  Wilson,  1916-date. 

Volumes  for  1907-1915  and  1916-1919  are  supplemented 
by  cumulative  numbers.  Indexes  the  less  common  general 
periodicals  (including  some  in  foreign  languages)  which  are 


"That  is,  the  entries  in  several  numbers  are  collected  .together  and  reissued 
in  one   alphabet. 

63 


A  SPECIMEN  PAGE  FROM  POOLE'S  INDEX  TO  PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 

(By  permission  of  the  publishers,  Houghton,  Mifflin  and  company.) 

539  SPANISH 


SOUTHERN 

Southern  Empire,  Morton  on.     (W.  D.  Foulke)  Dial 

(Ch.)  14=  2'4- 
Southern   Pacific   Railroad.     (F.  Stratton)  Cosmopol. 

15:  280. 

—  Overland  by.     (F.  C.  W.  Barbour)  Chaut.  15:  391. 
Southern  Magazine,  Making  a.     Southern  M.  5:  50. 
Southard,  Milton  I.,  with  portrait.     Nat'l  M.  (N.  Y. 

'91)  17:  279. 

Soutlu>y,  Robert.  (Geo.  Saintsbury)  Macmil.  71:  346. 
Same  art.  Eel.  M.  124:  779.  Same  art.  Liv.  Age, 
205:  67.  — (Mary  C.  Agnew)  Temp.  Bar,  107: 
114. 

—  Letter  by.    National,  19:  7°4- 

—  Letters.     Sat.  R.  79:  486. 

—  Life  and  Correspondence.     Eng.  R.  15:  77- 

-  Ten  Letters  to.    (S.  T.  Coleridge)  Atlan.  73=  57. 
"Southward  Ho  !  "  a  story.    Temp.  Bar,  102:  229. 
Southwark.    Walford's  Antiq.  1 :  132. 
Southwell,    Father,    the    Euphuist.      (H.    Thuraton) 

Month,  83:  231,  383. 

Southwell  Minster.    Walford's  Antiq.  6:  49. 
Southwest,  Flora  of;  a  Characteristic  Plant  Group. 

(H.  L.  Clarke)  Pop.  Sci.  Mo.  43 :  786. 
Southwold,    Eng.      (E.   B.   Brown)    Eng.    Illust.   10: 

405. 
Southworth,   Mrs.  E.   D.  E.  NM  with  portrait.    Bk. 

News;  9:  66. 
Sovereign,  State,  Government:   o.  Triad  of  Political 

Conceptions.     (C.  M.  Platt)  Pol.  Sci.  Q.  10:  292. 
Sovereignty,  Austin's  Theory  of.    (J.  Dewey)  Pol.  Sci. 

Q-  9:  3". 

—  Jean  Bodin  and  Hobbes  on.    (W.  A.  Dunning)  Pol. 

Sci.  Q.  ii :  82. 


(C.  E.  Morland)  Belgra.  78 


Sowers,  The;  a  story.     (H.  S.  Merriman)  Cornh.  71: 

1-561.    72:  53-641. 
Sown  on  Sand ;  a  story 

94,  holiday  no. 
Space, -and  Time  as  Mere  Ideas.    (P.  Carus)  Open 

Court,  3:  1600. 

—  Curvature  of.    (J.  Dolman,  jr.)  New  Sci.  R.  2:  31. 

—  Fo -.ir-fold,  Realization  of.    (T.  P.  Hall)  Science,  19: 

2/2. 

—  Geometric  and  Actual.    (J.  Delboeuf)  Monist,  4 

248. 

—  Homogeneous  Division  of.    Nature,  49:  44  5 »  4^9- 

—  Infinity  of.    Chamb.  J.  71:  647- 

—  Interstitial.      (T.  D.  Paret)  J.  Frankl.  Inst.  140 

117. 

—  Perceptions  of,  Experiments  in.      (J.   H.   Hyslop) 

Psycholog.  R.  i:  257,  581. 

—  Problem  of  the  Three  Dimensions  of.     (P.  Carus 

Open  Court,  7:  3720. 

—  Tactual  Estimation  of.     (G.  S.  Parrish)  Am.  J.  Psy- 

chol.  6:  514. 

—  Visual  Perception  of.     (E.  C.  Sanford)  Am.  J.  Psy 

chol.  6:  593. 
Space-Sense.     (A.  E.  Segsworth)  Am.  J.  Psychol.  6: 

369. 
Space-threshold,  Perception'of  Two  Points  not  the.  (G. 

Tawney)  Psychol.  R.  2:   585. 
Spain.    Along  the  Spanish  Highways.  (H.  Lynch)  Good 

Words,  35:  66 1. 

—  and  the  Jacobites.    (Benjamin  Taylor)  Scot.  R.  27 : 

2f3. 

—  and  the  Spaniards.    Eng.  R.  7:  i. 

—  The  Artist  in.     (A.  Griffiths)  M.  of  Art,  4=  26. 

—  Artistic,  as  Shown  by   Kerr  Lawson.     (G.  White) 

Idler,  8:  39. 

—  Church  in,"  Meyrick  on.    (W.  Webster)  Ac*d.  4* : 

534. 

—  Church  of.    Eng.  R.  18:  55. 

—  Colonies  of.    Spec.  74:  453- 


Spain,  Diercks's  Geschichte    Spaniens.     (B.  Moses) 

Am.  Hist.  R.  i:  523. 

Economic  Condition  of,  in  the  16th  Century.    (B. 
Moses)  J.  Pol.  Econ.  i:  513. 

—  History  of,  Burk«'s.    Ed.  R.  182:  271.  —  (R.  Lodge) 

Eng.  Hist.  R.  Ii :  537. 
-  Holy  Week  in.    Cath.  World,  58:  S4o. 

—  Iberian  Peninsula.     Chamb.  J.  70:  609. 

—  In  Distressful.     Chamb.  J.  73:  513. 

—  in  the  loth  Century.     (B.  O.  Flower)  Arena,  13:  192.^ 

—  Jews  in,  MS.  Sources  of  History  of.  (J.  Jacobs)  Jew. 

Q.  6:  597. 

—  Memorial  of  Lord  Burghley  on  Peace  with  Spain. 

1588.     (W.  F.  Tilton)  Am.  Hist.  R.  * :  49°. 

—  Memories  of.     (G.  E.  Vincent)  Chaut.  15:  529. 

—  Midsummer  in  Southern.     (E.  II.  Pennell)  Cent.  30:^ 

643- 

—  A  Night  and  a  Day  in.     (M.  C.  Harris)  Atlan.  78: 

647. 

—  Northern,  Fueros  of.    (W.  T.  Strong)  Pol.  Sci.  Q.  8: 

3'7. 

—  On  the  Trail  of  Don  Quixote.     (A.  F.  Jaccaci)  Scrib. 

M.  20:  135,481. 

—  People  of.     Leis.  Hour,  43:  457,  600. 

—  Protestants  in,  Proposed  Episcopate  for.    Church  Q. 

38:  283. 

—  Relation  of,  to  her  Government.    (L.  Williams)  No. 

Am.  163:  634. 

—  Romance   of.     (C.  W.  Wood)  Argosy,  59:  78-698. 

60:  65-706. 

—  Secrets  from  the  Court  of.    New  R.  10:  529,  662. 

«'•  35-594. 

—  Statesmen  of.    Liv.  Age,  194:  294. 

—  Summer  Resorts  in,  Lesser.   (W.  H.  Bishop)  Nation, 

61:  254. 

—  Theatres  and  Actors  in.    (D.  del  Toboso)  No.  Am. 

158:  628. 

—  Tour  in.    (L.  M.  R.  Walker)  Belgra.  77:  28. 

—  Twenty  Years  of  Modern  Monarchy  in.   (C.  Benoistfc 

Chaut.  20:  330. 


—  Up  Gibraltar  ;  to  Tangier  ;  into  Spain.     (L.  R.  Gra- 

cey)  Chaut.  17:  515. 

—  Vignettes  in.     (H.  R.  Haweis)  Contemp.  61:  "2- 

Same  art.  Eel.  M.  118:  852. 

—  Village  Communities  in.     Quar.  182:  483. 

—  West  Coast  of,   and  Wrecks.      (R.  Beynon)  Leis. 

Hour.  42:  335. 

—  Wild,  Chapman's.     Nature,  47:  583. 

Spalato,  Diocletian's  Palace  at.    (P.  Fitzgerald)  Gent. 

M.  n.  s.  53*  266. 

Spangohte.     (A.  H.  Miers)  Nature.  48:  426. 
Spaniard,  Evolution  of  the.     (H.  C.  Chatfield-Taylor) 

Cosmopol.  21 :  238. 
Spanish  America,  Descriptive  Topographical  Terms  of. 

(R.  T.  Hill)  Nat.  Geog.  M.  7:  291. 
Spanish-American   Families,   Our.      (H.   E.   Bandini) 

Overland,  n.  s.  26:   9. 
Spanish- American    Literature:    Antologia   de  Poetas 

Hispano-Americanos.    (A.  R.  Marsh)  Nation,  60: 

i 6,  33. 

Spanish- Arabian  Dames.     (\.  Grant)  Time,  19:  295. 
Spanish  Armada.     Qnar.  182:  i.  —  Ed.  R.  181 :  59. 

—  and  Turkey.     (E.  Pears)  En-.  Hist.  R.  8:  439- 

—  Defeat  of.     (W.  F.  Tilton)  Atlan.  76:  773. 

—  Froude  on.    Ath.  '92,  i:  625.  — (M.  A.  S.  Hume) 

Eng.  Hist.  R.  7'  567. 

—  Spanish  Story  of,  Froude's.    Sat.  R.  73:  573- 

—  State  Papers  relating  to,  ed.  by  Laughton.     Sat.  R. 

78:  434.     79:   3^7. 
Spanish  Art  at  the  New  Gallery.    Am.  Arch.  51:  88, 

,,-,  131.  —  (E.  R.  Pennell)  Nation,  62:  51. 
Spanish  Ballad-poetry.    Spec.  72:  169,  233. 


Copyright,  1897,  by  William  I.  Fletcher  and  Franklin  O.  Poole. . 
64 


A  SPECIMEN  PAGE  FROM  THE  READERS'  GUIDE  TO 
PERIODICAL  LITERATURE 

(By  permission  of  the  publishers,  H.  W.  Wilson  company). 


1838 


READERS'  GUIDE  TO 


Spain—Description  and  travel  —Continued 
Plunderings   from   Spain.    C.    Bill,   il   House   B 
42:137-40  Ag  '17 

Economic  conditions 

Nation  that  hoards  and  starves.  Survey  40: 
319  Je  15  '18 

Education 
See  Education — Spain 

Finance 
See  Finance — Spain 

Foreign    relations 

^Spanish-Portuguese  union,  map  R  of  Rs  54: 
559-60  N  '16 

Great  Britain 

Spain  and  Gibraltar.  J.  de  Armas.  Quar  230: 
182-9  Jl  '18;  Same.  Liv  Age  298:577-82  S  7 
'18 

United  States 

United  States  and  Spain  in  1322.  W:  S.  Robert- 
son. Am  Hist  R  20:781-800  Jl  '15 

History 

Characteristics  of  the  Spaniard.  H.  W.  Dres- 
ser. Home  Prog  5:149-51  D  '15 

Expulsion  of  the  Moors.  H.  W.  Dresser.  Home 
Prog  5:157-60  D  '15 

In  memory  of  a  palace.  M.  L.  Woods.  Fortn 
109:723-30  My  '18 

Spain  at  the  height  of  power.  H.  W.  Dresser. 
Home  Prog  5:151-7  D  '15 

With  the  Moors  in  Andalusia.  C:  U.  Clark, 
il  Art  and  Archaeol  1:228-40  My  '15 

European  war,  1914- 
See  European  war — Spain 

National  characteristics 
See  National  characteristics,  Spanish 

Navy 
First  Spanish  submarine.  Sci  Am  S  80:229  O 

9  '15 

Rebuilding  the  Spanish  navy.  R  of  Rs  58:199- 
200  Ag  '18 

Politics  and  government 
Elements  of  future   Spain.   S.   de  Madariaga,' 

Contemp  113:527-32  My  '18 
German   myth   in   Spain.    S.    Griffith.    Outlook 

116:364-5  Jl  4  '17 
New   Spanish   cabinet.   Outlook  116:55-6  My  9 

Plight  of  Spain.  E.  J.  Dillon.  19th  Cent  83: 
386-402  F  '18 

Spain  and  the  great  war.  T.  H.  Pardo  de- 
Tavera.  Cent  35:360-5  Ja  '18 

Spain  in  the  world's  debate.  A.  F.  Bell.  Con- 
temp  112:264-9  S  '17;  Same.  Liv  Age  295: 
335-40  N  10  '17 

Spain's  home  war.  S.  de  Madariaga.  Con- 
temp  114:380-6  O  '18 

Religious  history 

Cardinal  of  Spain.  A.  T.  Sadlier.  Cath  World 
106:633-45  F  '18 
See  also  Inquisition 

Social  conditions 

Dolores,  vendor  of  snails.  C.  M.  Goethe,  il 
Survey  37:15-19  O  7  '16 

Social   life  and  customs 
•See  Bullfights 

Strikes 

See    Strikes— Spain 
Spain  and  the  United  States 
Spain    turns    to    America.    S.    Griffith.    Nation  I 

104:392-3  Ap  5  '17 
Spalatro,  Italy 

Architecture 
Palace  of  Diocletian.  F:  Lees,   il  plans  Arch 

Rec  40:549-57  D  '16 
Spalding,   Albert 
Tuneful  America.  Woman's  H  C   44:13  F  '17' 

Same  cond.  Musician  22:332  My  '17 
Albert  Spalding  and  his  violins.  Musician  22- 

704   S   '17 
Fighting  violinist.  Outlook  117:279  O  24  '17 


Portrait.    Outlook    117:293    O   24    '17;    Lit   Di- 
gest  55:36   D   29   '17 
Violinist  and  a  congressman,  por  Lit  Digest 

58:27-8  Jl    13   '18 
Spalding,  Albert  Goodwill 

Hold  Spalding  up.  Lit  Digest  51:682  S  25  '15 
Spalding,  H.  G. 
International   pavedway.    Am.   City    (T   and   C 

ed)    13:287-8   O  '15 
Spalding,  H.  S. 
Endowment  of  men  and  endowment  of  money. 

Educ  R  52:392-402  N  '16 
Ethics  and  the  neo-Malthusianism.  Am  J  Soc 

22:609-15   Mr  '17 

Spaldfng,    John    Lancaster,    archbishop 
Archbishop  Spalding.  Outlook  114:12  S  6  '16 
Sketch.    Educ  R  52:317   O  '16 
Spalding,  Volney  Morgan 

Dedication  of  a  tablet  in  honor  of  Professor 
Volney  M.  Spalding.  Science  n  s  44:914-15 
D  29  '16 

Spalding,  Walter  Raymond 

Music  a  necessary  part  of  the  soldier's  equip- 
ment. Outlook  119:223-5  Je  5  '18 
War  in  its  relation  to  American  music.  Mus 

Q   4:1-11   Ja  '18 

Work  of  the  music  school  settlement  in 
Americanizing  its  patrons.  Musician  23:533 
Ag  '18 

Spangler,  Colin   Irving 
Frame-up  or  square  deal?  Sunset  38:28-9  My 

Spaniels 
Color  in  cockers.  J.  Watson.  Gauntry  Life  27: 

57  F  '15 

Spanish   America.   See   Latin   America 
Spanish-American    literature 

Classic  literature  of  Colombia.  R  of  Rs  55:95 
Ja  '17;  Same,  il  Bui  Pan  Am  Union  44:341-5 
Mr  '17 

Modernista  movement  in  Spanish  American 
literature.  A.  Coester.  Bui  Tan  Am  Union 
44:173-7  F  '17 

See  also  Almafuerte,  pseud.;  Rodo,  J.  E. 
Spanish-American   poetry 
Of  Latin  American  poetry.  S.  deja  Selva.  Pan 

Am  M  26:145-7  Ja  'i« 
Pan-American  literary  meeting  in  New  York. 

Pan  Am   M   24:209-11   F  '17 
Some  poets  of  Chile.  L.  E.  Elliott.  Pan  Am  M 

26:64-7  D  '17 

Spanish-American    war.     See     United     States — • 
History— Spanish-American   war,    1898-1899 
Spanish  architecture.  See  Architecture,  Spanish 
Spanish  armada.  See  Armada,  1588 
Spanish   art.     See   Art,   Spanish 
Spanish  cedar.  See  Cedar  trees 
Spanish  doubloons;  novel.  See  Kenyon,  Camilla 

E.  L. 
Spanish  elopement;  story.  K.  L.  Bates.  Harper 

130:522-6  Mr  '15 
Spanish  fiction 

Spain's    war-time    fiction.    Lit    Digest    50:1153 

My  15  '15 
Spanish  fiction  in  the  United  States.  R.  Jaen., 

Nation  106:261  Mr  7  '18 
Spanish  influenza.    See  Influenza 
Spanish   Inquisition.  See  Inquisition 
Spanish  language 

Study  and  teaching 

Readjustment    of    language    teaching1.    J.    T. 
Arntz,  Jr.  School  and  Soc  7:769-72  Je  29  '18 
Scientific  teaching  of  Spanish  and  other  lan- 
guages.    H.   E.   Bard.     Bui  Pan  Am   Union 
45:497-503  O   '17 
Spanish  in  American  universities.  School  ari& 

Soc  4:627-8  O  21  '16 
Teachers  of  Spanish  needed  in  New  York  high 

schools.  Bui  Pan  Am  Union  45:385-9  S  '17 
Spanish  literature 

Importance  of  Spanish  to  the  American  citi- 
zen. J:  D.  Fitzgerald.  Bui  Pan  Am  Union 
47:363-74  S  '18 

Mediaeval  Spanish  allegory,  by  C.  R,  Post.  Re- 
view. Nation  101:779-81  D  30  '15 


05 


99-102  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

not  indexed  in  Readers'  guide.  The  volume  for  1907-1915 
also  indexes  55  books.  Arrangement  and  information  given 
similar  to  Readers'  guide. 

99.  Magazine  subject-index,  a  subject  index  to  seventy- 
nine  American  and  English  periodicals.    Boston,  Boston  book 
co.   1908,  v.l. 

Annual  magazine-subject  index  for  1908-date.  Boston, 
Boston  book  co.  1909-date. 

V.I,  which  was  published  in  1908  and  indexes  some  peri- 
odicals from  their  first  numbers  and  others  only  for  the  year 
1907,  has  for  an  annual  continuation  or  supplement  the  An- 
nual magazine-subject  index.  Specializes  in  history,  travel, 
and  fine  arts.  Indexes  the  less  familiar  American  and  Eng- 
lish magazines  and  publications  of  societies,  most  of  which 
are  not  indexed  in  the  other  periodical  indexes.  Entries  are 
under  subject,  exclusive  of  fiction  by  prominent  writers  and 
continued  stories,  which  are  entered  under  the  name  of  the 
author.  Other  fiction  is  not  indexed.  Information  given  in 
the  references:  title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known, 
title  of  the  magazine  abbreviated,  volume,  inclusive  page  ref- 
erence, and  exact  date.  Illustrations  and  portraits  are  indi- 
cated. In  the  front  of  each  volume  is  an  alphabetical  list  of 
periodicals  indexed  with  the  abbreviations  used  for  them. 
Commencing  with  1909  the  Dramatic  index  is  included  as  part 
2  of  the  Annual  magazine-subject  index.  For  description  of 
the  Dramatic  index  see  section  102. 

100.  Special  indexes. — There  are  several  indexes  devoted 
to  specific  subjects  which  are  a  valuable  aid  to  the  specialist. 
These  are  useful  to  others  when  the  material  wanted  is  not 
found  in  the  general  periodical  indexes. 

101.  Book  review  digest,  1905-date.    N.  Y.  Wilson,  1905- 
date.    For  description  see  section  262. 

102.  Dramatic  index,  1909-date.    Boston,  Boston  book 
co.  1910-date. 


66 


MAGAZINES  AND  INDEXES  103-105 

Annual  volumes.  Published  as  part  2  of  the  Annual  maga- 
zine-subject index  and  also  issued  separately.  An  index  to 
illustrations  and  articles  about  dramas,  dramatists,  players, 
and  the  theater  appearing  in  American  and  English  period- 
icals, as  well  as  to  texts  of  plays.  Arranged  alphabetically  by 
subject.  Information  given  in  the  references :  title  of  the  arti- 
cle, author 's  name  if  known,  title  of  the  magazine  abbreviated, 
volume,  inclusive  page  reference,  and  exact  date.  If  an  article 
is  less  than  one  page  in  length  a  fraction  is  used  after  the 
page  number  to  indicate  the  article's  approximate  length. 
Alphabetical  list  of  periodicals  indexed  and  abbreviations 
used  for  them  is  in  the  front  of  each  volume.  A  quarterly 
continuation  of  the  Dramatic  index  is  in  the  Bulletin  of 
'bibliography. 

103.  Industrial  arts  index,   1913-date.     N.  Y.  Wilson, 
1914-date. 

Annual  volumes,  1913-1917,  two  year  volume,  1918-1919, 
supplemented  by  numbers  cumulating  quarterly,  annually, 
and  biennially.  Indexes  engineering,  business,  and  trade 
periodicals,  some  publications  of  the  federal  government, 
and  occasionally  pamphlets  dealing  with  industrial  topics. 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  subject.  Information  given  in 
the  periodical  references :  title  of  the  article,  author 's  name 
if  known,  title  of  the  magazine  abbreviated,  volume,  inclu- 
sive page  reference,  and  exact  date.  Illustrations  and  dia- 
grams are  indicated  by  iL  and  diag  or  diags.  Alphabetical 
list  of  publications  indexed,  with  abbreviations  used  for 
them,  is  in  the  front  of  each  volume  or  number.  Valuable 
for  engineering,  electrical  appliances,  chemistry,  business, 
printing  and  textiles. 

104.  Engineering  index  annual,  1906-date.     N.  Y.  En- 
gineering magazine,  1907-18 ;   American  society  of  mechan- 
ical engineers,  1919-date. 

For  description  see  section  326. 

105.  Agricultural  index,  1916-date.    N.  Y.  Wilson,  1919- 
date. 

67 


106  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

For  description  see  section  293. 

106.    Suggestions  about  the  use  of  magazine  indexes. — 

Inability  to  find  material  through  the  periodical  indexes  is 
often  due  to  haphazard  methods  of  working,  the  omission  of 
volumes  which  should  have  been  examined,  and  the  failure  to 
follow  up  cross-references.  Consideration  of  a  subject's  lim- 
itations with  respect  to  period  of  time,  then  a  systematic  or- 
der of  consulting  the  indexes,  and  accurate  copying  of  the 
needed  references  when  found  saves  confusion,  and  gives  the 
reader  the  feeling  that  he  has  exhausted  the  resources  of  the 
magazine  indexes. 

The  use  of  Ptiole's  index,  1802-1900,  and  Readers'  guide, 
1900-date,  will  probably  be  sufficient  for  ordinary  purposes, 
but  as  regards  topics  covered  by  a  special  index,  turn  to  that 
for  a  more  thorough  treatment.  If  the  subject  to  be  investi- 
gated extends  over  a  long  period  of  years,  begin  with  the  most 
recent  number  or  volume  and  work  back;  or  else,  starting 
from  the  earliest  date  that  articles  on  the  subject  may  have 
been  published,  work  forward  in  chronological  order.  Thus 
for  magazine  references  on  the  Origin  and  influence  of  the 
Monroe  doctrine,  a  topic  which  covers  the  period  from  1823- 
date,  use  Poole's  index,  1802-1900,  and  Readers'  guide,  1900- 
date,  working  forward  or  backward  in  order  of  time  to  avoid 
the  possibility  of  omitting  any  volumes  or  numbers  of  these 
periodical  indexes.  In  looking  for  material  on  a  subject  which 
pertains  to  a  brief  term  of  years  or  a  single  year,  such  as  the 
Coal  strike  of  1919,  consult  the  periodical  index  which  covers 
that  period  or  year,  in  this  case,  Readers'  guide,  1919. 

For  each  reference  copy  the  name  of  the  magazine,  its 
volume,  page,  and  date  if  given,  also  the  title  of  the  article, 
and  the  author's  name  if  included.  The  magazines  in  the 
University  of  Illinois  Library  are  listed  in  the  card  catalog. 


68 


107-108 


CHAPTER  XIII 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS,  ANNUAL  CYCLOPEDIAS, 
AND  ALMANACS 

107.  Anyone  who  wishes  quick  access  to  condensed,  au- 
thoritative information  on  any  subject  except  one  of  slight 
importance,  recent  development,  or  extreme  technicality,  will 
find  his  wants  satisfied  by  one  of  the  standard  general  en- 
cyclopedias.    In  the  best  works,  not  only  are  the  most  im- 
portant articles  written  by  specialists,  but  all  of  the  material 
in  the  book  is  carefully  edited  so  as  to  include  only  reliable 
and  up-to-date  information.    Most  encyclopedias  of  the  pres- 
ent time  have  also  good  illustrations,  maps,  and  bibliographies. 
They  are  alphabetically  arranged  either  by  words,  as  in  the 
card  catalog  (see  section  62a)  or  by  letters  (see  section  62b.) 
The  portion  of  the  alphabet  contained  in  each  volume  is  in- 
dicated on  the  back  of  the  binding. 

There  are  two  types  of  encyclopedias:  one  of  them  ar- 
ranges material  under  broad  topics;  e.g.  treating  merchant- 
men, torpedo  boats,  battleships,  submarines,  all  in  one  article 
on  Ships;  while  the  other  devotes  a  separate  article  to  each 
smaller  topic  so  that  the  information  is  scattered  through  the 
encyclopedia  under  different  headings:  Merchantmen,  Tor- 
pedo boats,  Battleships,  Submarines,  etc.  The  first  type  re- 
quires a  minute  index  which  will  indicate  what  article  con- 
tains the  topic  wanted ;  the  second  needs  ' '  see  also  references ' ' 
so  that  all  the  data  on  the  broader  subject  may  be  collected 
by  the  reader.  The  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  is  an  example 
of  the  first  type,  and  the  Neiv  international  encyclopaedia, 
of  the  second. 

108.  Encyclopaedia  Britannica.     llth  ed.     Cambridge, 
Eng.  University  press,  1910-11.     29v. 

A  comprehensive  summary  of  arts,  sciences,  literature,  and 
general  information,  international  in  scope,  though  British 
in  point  of  view.  The  longer  articles  aim  to  present  a  thor- 
ough elucidation  of  the  subjects  treated;  consequently  they 


69 


109  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

are  quite  as  valuable  to  the  scholar  and  specialist  as  to  the 
general  reader.  They  are  signed  by  the  initials  of  their 
authors,  the  full  names  being  listed  in  the  front  of  each  vol- 
ume, and  they  include  well  selected  bibliographies,  sometimes 
listed  at  the  ends  of  sections  as  well  as  at  the  ends  of  the 
complete  articles.  Illustrations  and  maps  are  closely  related 
to  the  text  and  are  of  excellent  quality.  Pronunciation  is 
not  indicated.  Arrangement  is  alphabetical  by  letters.  The 
broad  scope  of  the  individual  articles  and  the  lack  of  cross- 
references  make  it  often  necessary  to  use  the  Index  in  v.29. 
This  includes  cross-references,  analyzes  the  contents  of  the 
encyclopedia  minutely,  and  refers  definitely  by  means  of  num- 
bers and  the  letters,  a,  b,  c,  d,  to  the  volume,  page,  and  part 
of  page  on  which  information  is  given;  e.g.  25-187a  means 
v.25,  p.  187,  upper  half  of  first  column,  while  25-187d  means 
the  lower  half  of  the  second  column  on  the  same  page. 

The  first  edition  was  published  1768-71  in  Scotland.  The 
ninth  edition,  published  1875-89,  contains  monographs  which 
continue  to  be  of  considerable  value.  The  tenth  edition  was 
only  a  supplement  to  the  ninth.  The  eleventh  edition  contains 
entirely  new  material,  arranged  to  fit  the  requirements  of  the 
modern  public,  with  such  use  of  the  ninth  edition  as  any 
treatises  on  the  subjects  included  would  make. 

109.  New  international  encyclopaedia.  2d  ed.  N.  Y. 
Dodd,  1914-16.  23v.  and  an  additional  v.  containing  Courses 
of  study  and  reading. 

Most  of  the  articles  are  shorter  and  the  technical  ones  are 
more  easily  understood  by  non-specialists  than  those  in  the 
Encyclopaedia  Britannica.  They  are,  however,  written  by 
authorities  and  are  usually  followed  by  very  good  bibliogra- 
phies. None  of  the  articles  are  signed,  but  in  the  front  of 
each  volume  is  a  list  of  the  most  important  articles  with  the 
names  of  their  authors.  Pronunciation  of  proper  names  is 
given.  Arrangement  alphabetical  by  letters  rather  than 
words.  Many  excellent  illustrations,  including  maps  and  re- 
productions of  famous  paintings.  Supplementary  volume  is 
in  the  nature  of  a  classified  index  to  the  encyclopedia,  group- 

70 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS  110-112 

ing  the  titles  of  the  articles  under  broad  subjects,  such  as 
Religion,  Industrial  chemistry,  Games  and  sports. 

110.  Encyclopedia    Americana.      N.  Y.    Encyclopedia 
Americana  corp.     1918-   To  be  in  30v. 

A  new  edition  of  a  work  of  the  same  type  as  the  New 
international  encyclopedia.  Editors  lay  stress  upon  the  im- 
partiality and  up-to-date  character  of  the  articles.  Important 
articles  are  signed  in  full  and  some  are  followed  by  bibliogra- 
phies. Arrangement  alphabetical  by  words  as 'in  the  card 
catalog.  Shows  a  tendency  to  group  all  material  on  different 
phases  of  a  country  under  the  name  of  the  country ;  e.g.  un- 
der Great  Britain  are  found  articles  with  such  varying  titles 
as  Irish  history,  Parliament,  the  Church  of  England,  English 
newspapers.  Cross-references  are  sometimes  misleading.  Very 
good  text  illustrations  and  plates.  Some  physical  and  eco- 
nomic as  well  as  political  maps.  Indexes  of  the  counties  and 
incorporated  cities,  towns,  and  villages  accompany  the  maps 
of  the  states  of  the  United  States. 

111.  The  following  are  the  most  important  of  the  foreign 
encyclopedias : 

La  grande  encyclopedie.  Paris,  Lamirault,  1885-1903. 
31v. 

Larousse,  Pierre  Athanase.  Grand  dictionnaire  universel. 
Paris,  Larousse,  1866-90.  17v. 

Brockhaus' konversations-lexikon.  14.aufl.  Leipzig,  Brock- 
haus,  1901-04.  17v. 

Meyers  grosses  konversations-lexikon.  6.  neubearb.  und 
verm.  aufl.  Leipzig,  Bibliographisches  institut,  1902-13.  24v. 

Nuova  enciclopedia  italiana.     6.ed.     Torino,  Unione  tipo- 
grafico-editrice  Torinese,  1875-88.    25v.  in  26. 
— Supplemento.     1889-99.     5v.  in  6. 

Diccionario  enciclopedico  hispano-americano  de  literatura, 
ciencias  y  artes.  Barcelona,  Montaner,  1887-1910.  28v.  in  29. 

ANNUAL   CYCLOPEDIAS   AND   ALMANACS 

112.  Annual  cyclopedias  and  almanacs  may  be  considered 
supplementary  to  encyclopedias  in  that  they  furnish  more 

71 


113-114  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

recent  material  in  almost  as  wide  a  field.  Almanacs,  originally 
planned  to  provide  calendars  and  other  astronomical  data, 
have  been  in  some  cases  much  expanded  so  that  they  have 
become  a  very  useful  source  of  up-to-date  information  in  the 
way  of  statistics,  important  laws,  events  of  the  year,  lists  of 
government  and  society  officials,  etc.  They  are  not,  however, 
usually  considered  so  authoritative  as  annual  cyclopedias,  be- 
cause, since  they  are  published  the  first  of  January,  their 
hasty  compilation  gives  occasion  for  inaccuracies.  Annual 
cyclopedias  are  carefully  edited  and  issued  by  reliable  pub- 
lishers in  the  second  quarter  of  the  year. 

Only  the  latest  volume  of  an  almanac  is  needed  ordinarily 
for  reference,  as  much  of  the  material  of  more  than  ephemeral 
usefulness  is  reprinted  from  year  to  year.  The  annual  cyclo- 
pedias, on  the  other  hand,  constitute  a  very  good  summary 
of  current  history  and  also  contain  articles  by  specialists, 
which  are  of  more  than  transitory  interest.  Almanacs  bear 
the  date  of  the  year  in  which  they  are  published,  while  an- 
nual cyclopedias  generally  bear  the  date  of  the  year  preceding 
their  publication  date.  Hence,  for  an  event  or  law  of  1919 
use  a  1920  almanac,  but  a  1919  annual  cyclopedia. 

113.  American  year  book,  a  record  of  events  and  prog- 
ress, 1910-date.    N.  Y.  Appleton,  1911-date. 

An  annual  review  of  American  events  and  progress  in 
politics,  economics,  sociology,  science,  art,  and  the  humanities, 
prepared  with  the  cooperation  of  a  supervisory  board  repre- 
senting national  learned  societies.  The  chapters  on  foreign 
affairs,  sciences,  and  humanities  cover  other  countries.  Au- 
thors' names  are  given  for  most  of  the  articles.  The  earlier 
volumes  contain  bibliographies.  Recent  statistics  are  in- 
cluded. "Arranged  in  thirty-one  departments,  in  which  are 
grouped  articles  on  related  subjects."  Preface.  Full  table 
of  contents  and  minute  index  in  each  volume. 

114.  New  international  year  book,   1907-date.     N.  Y. 
Dodd,  1908-date. 


72 


ENCYCLOPEDIAS  115-119 

Forms  an  annual  supplement  to  the  New  international  en- 
cyclopaedia, which  it  closely  resembles.  The  only  general  year 
book  in  the  Reference  Room  that  is  illustrated. 

115.  Annual  register,  a  review  of  public  events  at  home 
and  abroad,  1758-date.    London,  Longmans,  1764-date. 

A  summary  of  history  for  the  year,  with  a  review  of  lit- 
erature, science,  art,  drama,  music,  finance,  and  commerce, 
mostly  of  England,  followed  by  reprints  of  a  few  of  the  most 
important  British  public  documents  and  an  obituary  of  emi- 
nent persons  deceased  in  that  year.  Material  is  arranged  in 
chapters,  since  1863  separating  English  from  foreign  and 
colonial  history.  Each  volume  is  in  two  parts,  with  different 
pagings.  Subject  index  in  the  back  of  each  volume,  as  well 
as  a  general  index  covering  1758  to  1819  in  a  separate  volume. 

116.  The  new  Hazell  annual  and  almanack,  1917-date. 
London,  Frowde,  1917-date. 

Preceded  by  Hazell's  annual,  1886-1916.  Tables  and  lists 
of  many  kinds,  chiefly  applicable  to  Great  Britain,  statistics 
and  information  about  the  governments  of  all  countries.  Prog- 
ress in  science,  art  and  literature  in  the  preceding  year.  Table 
of  contents  followed  by  minute  index. 

117.  Whitaker,    Joseph.     Almanack,    1869-date.     Lon- 
don, Whitaker,  1869-date. 

Similar  in  scope  to  Hazell.  Table  of  contents  followed  by 
minute  index. 

118.  World  almanac  and  encyclopedia,  1868-date.  N.  Y. 
Press  publishing  co.     1868-date. 

Current  statistics  of  various  kinds,  lists,  including  Ameri- 
can colleges  and  societies  with  their  headquarters  and  chief 
officers,  recent  federal  laws,  and  much  miscellaneous  informa- 
tion. Index^  is  at  the  front  of  each  volume. 

119.  The  Chicago  daily  news  almanac  and  year-book, 

1885-date.     Chicago,  Daily  news  co.     1885-date. 

Statistics  and  lists,  including  especially  information  about 
Illinois ;  also  laws  and  miscellaneous  material.  Index  in  the 
front  of  each  volume  is  for  that  volume.  The  index  ("  Table 
of  contents")  in  the  back  is  of  preceding  volumes  only. 

73 


120-121 

CHAPTER  XIV 
DICTIONARIES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 

120.  Encyclopedias   and   dictionaries    differ    from    each 
other  in  that  one  is  concerned  with  the  thing  which  the  word 
represents,  while  the  other  is  concerned  with  the  word  itself. 
In  an  encyclopedia  the  article  on  irrigation  would  probably 
treat  of  the  history  of  irrigation,  various  methods  of  irriga- 
tion, and  certain  definite  irrigation  projects,  whereas  in  a 
dictionary  the  information  given  would  include  the  spelling 
and  derivation  of  the  word,  how  it  should  be  pronounced  or 
divided  into  syllables,  and  the  various  meanings  it  may  have 
or  have  had  in  the  past.    That  is  to  say,  while  the  one  aims 
to  cover  the  whole  field  of  human  knowledge,  the  other  simply 
treats  of  words — their  meaning,  derivation,  spelling,  pronun- 
ciation, syllabication,  grammatical  usage,  and  so  on. 

The  present  day  unabridged  English  language  dictionaries 
often  contain  much  material  that  is  encyclopedic  in  nature. 
In  addition  to  the  ordinary  words  of  the  language  they  include 
proper  names,  foreign  words  and  phrases,  slang,  colloquial- 
isms, obsolete  words,  abbreviations  and  arbitrary  signs.  They 
also  have  rather  detailed  explanations  and  elaborate  illustra- 
tions. The  appendixes  found  in  such  quantities  in  older  dic- 
tionaries are  almost  entirely  lacking  in  the  more  recently 
published  works,  the  tendency  being  to  enter  the  words  in 
their  alphabetical  place  in  the  body  of  the  work. 

Following  are  listed  the  more  important  English  language 
dictionaries : 

121.  Webster,  Noah.    Webster's  new  international  dic- 
tionary of 'the  English  language,  based  on  the  International 
dictionary  of  1890  and  1900.     Springfield,  Mass.  Merriam,. 
c!913. 

Main  part  consists  of  the  usual  dictionary  material,  in- 
cluding also  foreign  phrases,  abbreviations  and  noted  names 
of  fiction.  Pages  are  divided:  upper  part  containing  main 
words  of  the  language ;  lower  part,  in  smaller  type,  contain- 


74 


DICTIONARIES  122-123 

ing  uncommon  and  obsolete  words,  foreign  phrases,  abbrevia- 
tions, Christian  names,  noted  names  in  literature,  and  in  gen- 
eral those  words  which  would  be  looked  for  less  frequently. 
Appendix  contains  Pronouncing  gazetteer,  Pronouncing  bio- 
graphical dictionary,  Arbitrary  signs  used  in  writing  and 
printing,  and  a  Classified  selection  of  pictorial  illustrations. 
In  the  Addenda  (c!918) — just  preceding  the  main  vocabu- 
lary— are  listed  new  words  including  recent  war  terms.  For 
general  literary  purposes,  perhaps  the  most  useful  of  the 
dictionaries. 

122.  Funk  and  Wagnalls  new  standard  dictionary  of 
the  English  language.    N.  Y.  Funk,  c!913. 

All  the  information,  including  proper  names,  is  given  in 
one  alphabet,  with  the  exception  of  foreign  words  and  phrases, 
population  statistics,  simplified  spelling  rules,  and  disputed 
pronunciation,  which  are  in  an  appendix.  Etymology  or 
derivation  is  given  after  the  definition.  Good  for  recent  sci- 
entific and  technical  words.  The  only  one  of  the  general 
dictionaries  listed  which  includes  antonyms  as  well  as  syno- 
nyms. A  rival  to  Webster's  new  international  dictionary  in 
popularity,  but  not  as  conservative  and  not  as  good  for  ob- 
solete words,  though  perhaps  more  quickly  consulted  for 
present  day  meanings.  Differs  from  Webster's  and  the  Cen- 
tury in  the  arrangement  of  definitions  in  that  the  common 
meaning  of  the  word  is  given  first  and  then  the  literal  or 
original  meaning,  while  in  the  other  two  the  order  is  reversed. 

123.  'Century  dictionary  and  cyclopedia.    Rev.  and  enl. 
ed.  N.  Y.     Century  co.     c!911.     12v. 

V.  1-10,  Dictionary ;  v.  11,  Cyclopedia  of  proper  names ; 
v.  12,  Atlas.  Supplement  in  the  back  of  each  volume  giving 
new  words  and  phrases,  new  meanings  of  old  words  and  ex- 
tensions of  old  definitions.  An  asterisk  (*)  above  a  word  in 
the  main  part  refers  to  information  in  the  supplement.  V.  11 
includes  proper  names  in  geography,  biography,  history,  lit- 
erature, mythology  and  art  with  brief  characterization.  Use- 


75 


124-127  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

ful  in  identifying  a  person,  place  or  literary  work.  Contains 
much  encyclopedic  material  and  is  the  most  comprehensive 
of  the  American  dictionaries. 

124.  Murray,  Sir  James  Augustus  Henry.     New  Eng- 
lish dictionary  on  historical  principles.     Oxford,  Clarendon 
press,  1888-1916.    v.1-10. 

Not  yet  completed.  Aims  to  give  a  history  of  every  word 
in  the  English  language  for  the  last  800  years.  Scholarly, 
not  for  general  use.  Such  common  words  as  ' '  get ' '  and  ' '  on  " 
have  several  pages  devoted  to  them.  Consult  for  the  full 
treatment  of  derivation,  changes  in  meanings  and  spellings 
of  words  and  for  obsolete  words.  Many  quotations  illustrat- 
ing meanings  of  words  in  different  years.  No  illustrations. 
No  indication  as  to  division  of  words  into  syllables.  Often 
referred  to  as  the  Oxford  dictionary,  Murray's  dictionary  or 
the  N.E.D.  (New  English  Dictionary). 

125.  Smaller  dictionaries  for  desk  use  are: 

Webster,  Noah.  Webster's  collegiate  dictionary.  3d  ed. 
of  the  Merriam  series.  Springfield,  Mass.  Merriam,  1919. 

Desk  standard  dictionary  of  the  English  language.  New 
ed.  N.  Y.  Funk,  1919. 

Fowler,  Henry  Watson  and  Fowler,  F.  G.  Concise  Ox- 
ford dictionary  of  current  English.  Oxford,  Clarendon  press, 
1914. 

SYNONYM  DICTIONAEIES 

126.  Although  synonyms  for  a  word  are  often  given  in 
the  language  dictionaries,  it  is  sometimes  convenient  to  know 
where  a  special  treatment  of  them  may  be  found. 

127.  Crabb,  George.    English  synonymes.  Rev.  and  enl. 
N.  Y.    Harper,  c!917. 

Contains  groups  of  words  similar  in  meaning,  followed 
by  a  discussion  which  gives  distinctions  in  meaning.  Alpha- 
betical arrangement.  Cross  references  in  the  body  of  the 
work  make  an  index  unnecessary.  An  old  work;  the  first 
edition  published  over  a  hundred  years  ago. 

76 


DICTIONARIES  128-134 

128.  Fernald,  James  Champlin.    English  synonyms  and 
antonyms.    New  and  enl.   ed.   N.  Y.    Funk,  1914. 

Similar  to  Crabb's  English  synonymes  but  contains  an- 
tonyms, and  more  synonyms.  Index. 

129.  Soule,  Richard.    Dictionary  of  English  synonymes. 
New  ed.,  rev.  and  enl.  by  G.  H.  Howison.    Boston,  Little,  c!891. 

A  full  list  of  synonyms  but  no  discriminations  nor  defini- 
tions. 

130.  March,   Francis   Andrew   and  March,   F.   A.   jr. 

Thesaurus  dictionary  of  the  English  language.    Philadelphia, 
Historical  publishing  co.,  c!902. 

Very  long  lists  of  nouns,  verbs,  adverbs,  adjectives  and 
phrases  for  general  ideas.  Synonyms  and  antonyms  in  par- 
allel columns.  No  index,  but  many  cross-references.  The 
entry  ''modern.  Not  ancient,  NOVELTY- ANTIQUITY" 
means  that  synonyms  for  modern  will  be  found  under  novelty. 

131.  Roget,  Peter  Mark.     Thesaurus  of  English  words 
and  phrases.     New  ed.,  rev.  by  S.  R.  Roget.    N.  Y.    Long- 
mans, 1916. 

Ideas  for  which  synonyms  are  given  arranged  by  classes, 
not  alphabetically.  Very  extensive  index. 

132.  Mawson,  Christopher  Orlando  Sylvester.     Stand- 
ard thesaurus  of  English  words    and   phrases.     N.  Y.     The 
Kelmscott  society,  c!911. 

Based  on  and  arranged  similarly  to  Roget 's  Thesaurus. 

RHYMING  DICTIONARIES 

133.  Lathrop,  Lorin  Andrews,  ed.     The  rhymers'  lexi- 
con, comp.  and  ed.  by  Andrew  Loring    [pseud.]      London, 
Routledge,   [1905]. 

134.  Walker,  John.    Rhyming  dictionary  of  the  English 
language;    rev.   and  enl.  by  J.   Longmuir.     London,  Rout- 
ledge,  1904. 


77 


135-137 

CHAPTER  XV 
BIOGRAPHY 

135.  The  reference  books  limited  to  biography  are  col- 
lective biographical  dictionaries  which  contain  biographies  of 
many  people  in  one  book  or  set  of  books.     The  general  en- 
cyclopedias are  useful,  for  biography,  and  the  cyclopedias  or 
dictionaries  pertaining  to  special  subjects;    e.g.  Grove's  Dic- 
tionary of  music,  frequently  include  lives  of  people  promi- 
nent in  their  particular  fields.    Some  collections  of  biography 
dealing  with  specific  subjects  are  kept  in  the  book  stacks,  but 
they  are  listed  in  the  card  catalog  under  the  subject;    e.g. 
Scientists.    Magazines  sometimes  contain  excellent  biograph- 
ical accounts  which  are  written  in  a  more  interesting  style 
than  the  articles  in  reference  books,  and  are   valuable    for 
supplementing  them.    The  most  extensive  treatment  of  a  very 
famous  person's  life,  however,  is  in  the  individual  biographies 
kept  in  the  book  stacks  and  found  through  the  card  catalog. 
For  the  sort  of  subject  heading  used  for  individual  biography 

see  section  41. 

i 

136.  Thomas,  Joseph.     Universal  pronouncing  diction- 
ary of  biography  and  mythology.     New  4th  ed.  thoroughly 
rev.     Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  1915. 

A  general  biographical  dictionary  containing  brief  arti- 
cles on  eminent  persons,  also  mythological  characters.  Pro- 
nunciation of  names  is  indicated.  Arranged  alphabetically. 
Usually  referred  to  as  Lippincott 's  Biographical  dictionary. 

137.  Dictionary  of  national  biography;    ed.  by  Leslie 
Stephen  and  Sidney  Lee.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1885-1900.  63v. 

—Supplement ;  ed.  by  Sidney  Lee.    N.  Y.  Macmil- 
lan, 1901.    3v. 

Index  and  epitome;  ed.  by  Sidney  Lee.     N.  Y. 

Macmillan,  1903. 

—Errata.     N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1904. 

Second  supplement ;  ed.  by  Sir  Sidney  Lee.  N.Y. 

Macmillan,  1912.  3v. 

78 


BIOGRAPHY  138-139 

-Second  supplement;  index  and  epitome;  ed.  by 


Sir  Sidney  Lee.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  1913. 

Biographies  of  famous  people  of  the  British  Empire  who 
are  not  living.  Long  articles  signed  by  initials  which  are 
explained  in  the  front  of  each  volume.  The  bibliographical 
references,  at  the  ends  of  the  articles  are  an  important  fea- 
ture. Alphabetical  arrangement.  The  first  supplement  con- 
tains biographies  accidentally  omitted  from  the  main  part, 
and  biographies  of  persons  who  died  too  late  to  be  included 
in  the  main  work.  The  second  supplement  includes  biogra- 
phies of  persons  who  died  between  Jan.  22,  1901  and  Dec. 
31,  1911.  One  index  and  epitome  to  the  main  part  and  the 
first  supplement,  and  another  to  the  second  supplement  con- 
tain concise  summaries  of  the  biographies  and  references  to 
the  volumes  and  pages  where  the  articles  in  full  are  given. 

138.  Appleton's  cyclopaedia  of  American  biography; 
ed.  by  J.  G.  Wilson  and  John  Fiske.    Rev.  ed.    N.  Y.  Apple- 
ton,  1900.    7v.  in  6. 

v.8;  ed.  by  J.  E.  Homans.  N.  Y.  Press  associa- 
tion compilers,  1918. 

Biographies  of  prominent  Americans,  also  foreigners 
closely  connected  with  American  history.  Alphabetical  ar- 
rangement, except  when  several  members  of  one  family  are 
included  the  arrangement  is  by  priority  of  birth.  A  list 
of  the  authors  of  some  of  the  more  important  articles  is  in 
the  front  of  each  of  the  first  six  volumes.  In  the  back  of 
v.6  is  a  subject  and  personal  index  to  v.1-6.  Names  which 
are  the  titles  or  sub-titles  of  articles  are  referred  to  in  this 
index  only  when  they  appear  in  other  articles.  V.7,  bound 
with  v.6,  is- a  supplement  containing  biographies  of  addi- 
tional persons,  a  list  of  pen-names,  nicknames,  and  sobri- 
quets, and  an  analytical  index  to  v.7.  V.8,  a  supplementary 
volume  including  recent  names,  is  not  arranged  alphabet- 
ically but  has  an  index.  Many  portraits. 

139.  National  cyclopaedia  of  American  biography.  N.  Y. 
White,  1893-1918.     16v. 

79 


140-142  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

National  cyclopaedia — continued 

A  conspectus  of  American  biography,  being  an 

analytical  summary  of  American  history  and  biography, 
containing  also  the  complete  indexes  of  the  National  cyclo- 
paedia of  American  biography  (v.  1-13).  N.  Y.  White,  1906. 

Biographies  of  distinguished  people  of  the  U.  S.  The 
arrangement  is  not  alphabetical.  A  personal  index  and  a 
topical  index  to  v.1-13  are  in  the  volume  called  A  conspectus 
of  American  biography,  which  also  contains  lists  of  govern- 
ment officials,  editors  of  magazines  and  newspapers,  pseu- 
donyms, public  statues  in  the  U.  S.,  prominent  Americans 
grouped  professionally,  etc.  The  supplements,  v.  14-16,  in- 
clude additional  names  and  indexes.  V.14  is  also  called 
supplement  v.l.  Numerous  portraits. 

140.  Who's  who;    an  annual  biographical  dictionary, 
1849-date.     London,  Black,  1849-date. 

Very  concise  biographical  information  about  prominent 
living  Englishmen  and  a  few  well  known  people  of  other 
nations.  Post-office  address  is  usually  given  for  each  person. 
Arranged  alphabetically. 

141.  Who's  who  in  America,  a  biographical  dictionary 
of  notable  living  men  and  women  of  the  United  States,  1899/ 
1900-date.     Chicago,  Marquis,  1899-date. 

Published  every  two  years.  Very  brief  biographical  facts 
concerning  noteworthy  living  people  of  the  U.  S.  Resembles 
Who's  who  in  the  kind  of  information  given  for  each  person. 
Alphabetical  arrangement.  Beginning  with  the  volume  for 
1916/1917  the  pronunciation  of  the  most  difficult  surnames 
is  indicated  in  the  front.  In  a  geographical  index  the  names 
of  all  persons  included  in  the  book  are  arranged  by  states 
and  under  states  by  towns. 

142.  A  few  of  the  other  books  on  the  " Who's  who" 
principle  are  as  follows: 

For  localities; 

Book  of  Chicagoans. 

Canadian  men  and  women  of  the  time. 


80 


BIOGRAPHY 

Chi  e?     (For  Italians). 

Qui  etes-vous?     (For  Frenchmen). 

Wer  ist's?     (For  Germans). 

Who's  who  in  New  York. 
For  special  classes  of  persons  or  professions; 

International  who's  who  in  music. 

Kus. 

Who's  who  in  science   (international). 

Who's  who  in  the  theater. 

Woman's  who's  who  of  America. 

Occasionally  a  Who's  who  is  included  in  yearbooks  and 
annuals  pertaining  to  special  subjects  or  countries,  such  as 
Who's  who  in  China,  in  the  China  yearbook;  and  Who's  who 
in  art,  in  the  American  art  annual. 


143-145 


CHAPTER  XVI 
GEOGRAPHY 

143.  Two  important  reference  books  in  geography  are 
the  gazetteer  and  the  atlas.  The  former  is  a  geographical 
dictionary  containing  in  alphabetical  order  descriptions  of 
the  countries,  places,  mountains,  rivers,  etc.  of  the  world. 
The  atlas  is  a  volume  of  maps.  The  general  atlas,  contain- 
ing modern  political  maps  showing  the  present  boundaries 
of  countries,  is  most  frequently  used  for  finding  the  location 
of  places.  If  the  index  is  very  satisfactory  it  not  only  gives 
the  number  of  the  map  but  also  the  approximate  location 
of  the  place  on  that  map  by  means  of  letters  and  figures'; 
e.g.  85B2.  Capital  leWers^are  placed  about  two  inches  apart 
at  the  top  and  bottom,  and  figures  at  the  left  and*right  of 
each  map,  or  vice  versa ;  thus  fixing  the  location  of  a  certain 
place  within  a  small  square,  as  follows: 

No.  85  ' 


X 


ABC 

85=:map  number     B2=rlocation  of  place  in  central  square. 

144.  Books  of  travel   and   guide   books   which   include 
descriptions  of  places,  and  sometimes  maps,  are  entered  in 
the  card  catalog  under  the  name  of  the  place;  e.g.  Alaska- 
Description  and  travel.     A  collection  of  separate  maps  of 
countries,  states,  cities,  etc.  is  in  the  Map  Room.    If  the  Li- 
brary has  a  separate  map  of  a  place  it  is  entered  under  sub- 
ject in  the  card  catalog;    e.g.  Chicago-Maps. 

145.  Lippincott's  new  gazetteer.    A  complete  pronounc- 
ing gazetteer  or  geographical  dictionary  of  the  world  ...  ed. 


GEOGRAPHY  146-149 

by  Angelo  Heilprin  and  Louis  Heilprin.    Philadelphia,  Lip- 
pincott,  c!911.    2v. 

First  edition  was  published  in  1855.  Brief  descriptions 
of  countries,  cities,  towns,  rivers,  mountains,  etc.  of  the  world, 
and  pronunciation  of  the  names.  Alphabetical  arrangement. 
Statistics  of  population  for  the  states,  counties,  cities,  etc.  of 
the  U.  S.  according  to  the  13th  census,  1910,  are  in  the  back 
of  v.2. 

146.  Mill,  Hugh  Robert,  ed.  International  geography. 
N.  Y.  Appleton,  c!899. 

Chapters  on  general  geographic  subjects  as  well  as  on  each 
continent  and  country  by  prominent  geographic  authorities. 
Many  small  maps  and  diagrams.  Minute  index. 

147.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Price   lists. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  35,  Geography  and  geology. 

ATLASES 

GENERAL 

148.  'Century  atlas  of  the  world.  Eev.  and  enl.  ed.  N.  Y. 
Century,  c!911. 

Modern  political  and  a  few  historical  maps.  Of  a  more 
convenient  size  to  handle  than  many  atlases,  but  with  smaller 
maps.  An  index  to  modern  maps  in  the  back,  which  includes 
population  figures ;  an  index  to  historical  ones  near  the  front. 
Published  as  v.12  of  the  Century  dictionary. 

149.  Rand,  McNally  &  Co.   Library  atlas  of  the  world. 
Chicago,  Hand,  c!912.     2v. 

Contents:  v.l,  United  States;  v.2,  Foreign  countries. 

Modern  political  maps.  V.  1  also  includes  large  scale 
maps  of  the  chief  cities  of  the  U.  S.  No  general  index  to  v.l, 
but  a  separate  index  with  the  maps  of  each  state  gives  popu- 
lation statistics  and  other  information  concerning  each  place, 
such  as  names  of  railroads  referred  to  by  numbers  explained 
on  the  map  itself,  electric  lines  by  letters  explained  at  the  end 

83    , 


150-152  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

of  the  index,  express  companies,  etc.  by  symbols  explained  at 
the  bottom  of  each  index  page.  Use  the  alphabetical  table  of 
contents  in  v.l  to  find  the  page  references  for  maps  of  states 
and  cities.  A  general  index  to  v.2. 

150.  Rand  McNally  &  Co.     Commercial  atlas  of  America. 
Chicago,  Rand,  1920. 

An  annual  publication.  Large  maps  of  the  states,  import- 
ant cities  and  outlying  possessions  of  the  U.  S.,  the  Canadian 
provinces,  Newfoundland,  Mexico,  Central  America,  Panama, 
Bermuda,  the  West  Indies,  Cuba,  and  all  the  continents.  Lists 
of  steamship  lines  and  railroads.  On  the  maps  of  cities  trans- 
portation lines,  public  buildings  and  depots  are  designated, 
but  in  many  cases  the  streets  are  unnamed.  Consult  the  alpha- 
betical table  of  contents  to  find  the  page  references  for  the 
maps.  Separate  indexes  with  many  of  the  maps  give  popu- 
lation figures  and  other  data  concerning  each  place,  includ- 
ing names  of  railroads,  electric  lines,  express  companies,  etc. 
indicated  by  numbers,  letters  or  signs  explained  on  the  map 
itself,  at  the  end  of  the  index,  or  at  the  bottom  of  each  index 
page. 

151.  Stieler,  Adolf.     Stieler 's  atlas  of  modern  geogra- 
phy . . .  Adapted  for  the  use  of  the  English  speaking  public 
by  B.  V.  Darbishire.     9th  ed.  Gotha,  Perthes,  1909. 

The  first  edition  of  this  standard  German  work  was  pub- 
lished nearly  a  century  ago.  Excellent,  detailed  modern 
maps.  The  explanations  of  signs,  abbreviations,  etc.  are  given 
on  the  face  of  each  map  in  the  German  language,  and  on  the 
back  of  each  in  four  languages,  English,  Spanish,  French,  and 
Italian.  The  spelling  of  the  place  names  on  each  large  scale 
map  is  that  of  the  country ;  i.  e.  names  in  France  are  in  the 
French  form.  A  very  minute  index  in  which  the  German 
forms  of  names  are  used ;  e.  g.  Italy  is  under  Italien. 

152.  Mawson,  Christopher  Orlando  Sylvester.    Double- 
day,  Page  &  co's  geographical  manual  and  new  atlas.    Garden 
city,  Doubleday,  1917. 

84 


GEOGRAPHY  153-155 

Both  a  geography  and  an  atlas.  Contains,  besides  modern 
political  maps,  excellent  maps  showing  vegetation,  economic 
conditions,  physical  features,  climate,  population,  communi- 
cations, commercial  languages,  the  war  zones;  and  for  the 
U.  S.,  automobile  routes,  parcel  post  zones,  standard  time. 
Alphabetical  list  of  maps  near  the  beginning.  Index  to  the 
war  maps,  p.  4-5,  8-9 ;  index  to  the  cities  and  towns  of  the 
U.  S.,  with  their  population  statistics,  p.  343-80,  index  to  the 
principal  cities  and  towns  (exclusive  of  the  U.  S.),  p.  381-85; 
general  index  to  the  text,  p.  386-92. 

153.  Bartholomew,  John  George.     Advanced  atlas  of 
physical  and  political  geography.     London,  Oxford  univer- 
sity press,  1917. 

Maps  of  volcanoes,  earthquakes,  altitudes,  rainfall  and 
winds,  temperature,  political  divisions,  vegetation,  commerce, 
industries,  geology,  races  and  density  of  population.  In  the 
front  is  a  list  of  the  maps  in  the  order  of  their  appearance 
in  the  book,  and  an  alphabetical  list  of  countries  with  the 
numbers  of  the  maps  on  which  they  are  shown.  In  the  back 
is  a  general  index  of  places  which  refers  to  countries  and  not 
to  map  numbers,  necessitating  the  use  of  this  index  in  con- 
nection with  the  alphabetical  list  of  countries  in  the  front. 
The  places  are  located  on  the  maps  by  degrees  of  latitude  and 
longitude,  given  in  the  general  index. 

154.     Atlas  of  economic  geography.     London, 

Oxford  university  press,  1914. 

Small  general  and  regional  maps,  including  maps  of  tem- 
perature, rainfall,  altitude,  vegetation,  industries,  density  of 
population,  languages,  trade  routes,  and  commercial  products. 
Explanatory  text  in  the  front.  List  of  maps,  p.  Ixv-lxvi.  No 
index. 

HISTORICAL 

155.  For  descriptions  of  the  following  atlases  see  sec- 
tions 173-176. 


85 


156-157  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Shepherd,  William  Robert.  Historical  atlas.  N.  Y.  Holt, 
1911. 

Cambridge  modern  history,  v.14,  Atlas.  Cambridge, 
Eng.  University  press,  1912. 

Poole,  Reginald  Lane.  Historical  atlas  of  modern  Europe. 
Oxford,  Clarendon  press,  1902. 

Droysen,  Gustav.  Allgemeiner  historischer  handatlas. 
Bielefeld,  Velhagen,  1886. 

MAPS 

156.  U.  S.  Geological  survey.  Topographic  sheets.  Wash- 
ington, U.  S.  Geological  survey. 

"The  Geological  survey  is  making  a  topographic  map  of 
the  United  States.  The  sheets  of  which  it  is  composed  are 
projected  without  reference  to  political  divisions,  and  are 
designated  by  some  prominent  town  or  natural  feature  found 
on  them  ...  A  description  of  the  topographic  map  is  printed 
on  the  reverse  of  each  sheet.  Nearly  two-fifths  of  the  area  of 
the  country,  excluding  outlying  possessions  has  been  mapped, 
every  state  being  represented.  Massachusetts,  Connecticut, 
Rhode  Island,  New  Jersey,  and  the  District  of  Columbia  are 
completely  mapped. "  Price  list  53. 

157.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.     Price  lists. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  53,  Maps. 


86 


158-159 

CHAPTER  XVII 

HISTORY 

158.  A  student  desiring  information  on  topics  in  history 
will  find  a  number  of  ways  of  approaching  the  subject.    In 
the  first  place,  through  the  card  catalog  he  can  ascertain  the 
location  of  textbooks  and  treatises  shelved  in  the  History  De- 
partment Library  and  the  stacks  of  the  General  Library. 
See  section  75  for  the  arrangement  of  history  subject  head- 
ings for  particular  countries.     Books  on  different  phases  of 
great  wars  are  entered  under  the  name  of  the  war,  if  it  in- 
volves several  nations ;  e.g.  European  war — Economic  aspects, 
or,  if  it  involves  only  one  or  two,  under  the  name  of  each 
country  as  one  of  the  period  divisions  of  its  history;    e.g. 
Great  Britain — History — Civil  war,  1642-49. 

Biographies  of  rulers,  statesmen,  and  military  leaders  are 
useful  sources  of  information  (see  sections  41-42).  Publica- 
tions of  historical  societies  are  often  needed.  For  an  index 
to  them  see  section  383.  For  finding  their  call  numbers,  see 
sections  58  and  74. 

In  the  Reference  Room,  the  general  encyclopedias,  period- 
ical indexes,  and  biographical  dictionaries  often  supply  good 
material,  especially  in  the  way  of  bibliographies.  But  in 
addition  to  these>  the  student  in  search  of  references  for  a 
paper  or  report  in  history  should  consult  the  special  refer- 
ence books  for  that  subject  listed  below. 

159.  Larned,  Josephus  Nelson.    History  for  ready  ref- 
erence from  the  best  historians,  biographers  and  specialists. 
Springfield,  Mass.  Nichols,  1895-1910.    7v. 

Companion  volume.     Springfield,  Nichols,  1913. 

A  cyclopedia  of  universal  history,  composed,  not  of  arti- 
cles written  especially  for  it,  but  of  selections  of  material 
quoted  from  the  works  of  many  good  authorities,  with  exact 
references  to  the  books  from  which  they  were  taken,  followed 
by  short  lists  of  references  to  other  books.  A  few  historical 
maps.  Arranged  alphabetically,  with  the  information  given 


87 


160  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

usually  under  the  name  of  the  place  most  concerned,  but  with 
many  cross  references  from  persons,  events,  etc.  Under  place 
the  arrangement  is  chronological.  Constitutions  of  countries 
and  some  states  are  given  in  English  under  the  word  Consti- 
tution. V.  5  includes  a  supplement  containing  translations 
from  German  and  French  works,  topics  omitted  from  previous 
volumes,  chronological  and  genealogical  tables.  Y.  6-7,  also 
supplementary,  cover  the  history  of  1894-1900  and  1901-1910 
and  are  comprised  of  extracts  from  government  documents 
and  records  of  contemporary  writers.  The  Companion  vol- 
ume contains  appendices  which  include  genealogical  tables  of 
European  rulers  and  great  historical  families,  and  a  selected 
bibliography. 

160.  Cambridge  modern.history.  Cambridge,  Eng.  Uni- 
versity press.  1902-12.  14v. 

' '  The  general  history  of  Europe  and  her  colonies  since  the 
fifteenth  century  is. .  .treated  in  twelve  volumes.''  Preface. 
Contents :  v.l,  Renaissance ;  v.2,  Reformation ;  v.3,  The  wars 
of  religion ;  v.4,  Thirty  years  war ;  v.5,  Age  of  Louis  XIV ; 
v.6,  Eighteenth  century;  v.7,  United  States;  v.8,  French 
Revolution;  v.9,  Napoleon;  v.10,  Restoration;  v.ll,  Growth 
of  nationality ;  v.12,  The  latest  age. 

All  chapters  contributed  by  specialists.  Valuable  bibliog- 
raphies included  at  the  ends  of  volumes.  Each  volume  has 
a  table  of  contents  giving  authors  and  outlines  of  chapters, 
and  a  list  of  the  bibliographies;  also  an  index. 

V.  13  contains  genealogical  tables  and  lists  of  rulers,  presi- 
dents, governors,  conferences,  universities,  etc.  and  a  general 
index  to  the  set. 

V.  15  is  an  historical  atlas,  with  maps  ' '  designed  to  illus- 
trate political  divisions . . .  territorial  changes,  wars  by  land 
or  sea,  the  growth  of  particular  States,  the  course  of  religious 
changes,  and  the  history  of  colonial  expansion."  Preface. 
An  introduction  summarizing  the  changes  made  in  the  map 
of  the  world  through  the  period  covered  describes  the  maps 
and  is  followed  by  an  Index  of  places  mentioned  in  it.  Maps 


38 


HISTORY  161-164 

are  listed  in  Table  of  contents.    Index  to  places  on  the  maps 
is  at  the  end  of  the  volume. 

161.  New  Schaff-Herzog  encyclopaedia  of  religious  knowl- 
edge contains  many  historical  articles,  with  excellent  bibliog- 
raphies.   See  section  217. 

OUTLINES 

162.  Ploetz,  Karl  Julius.     Ploetz'  manual  of  universal 
history,  from  the  dawn  of  civilization  to  the  outbreak  of  the 
great  war  of  1914,  tr.  and  enl.  by  W.  H.  Tillinghast,  with 
additions  covering  recent  events.    Boston,  Houghton,  c!915. 

An  outline  of  history,  arranged  first  by  period  and  then 
by  country.  Minute  index  preceded  by  a  Supplement  con- 
taining an  outline  of  events  of  the  European  War,  June  28, 
1914-Nov.  11,  1918.  Genealogical  tables  embodied  in  the  text. 

163.  Putnam,  George  Palmer,  comp.    Tabular  views  of 
universal  history ;  a  series  of  chronological  tables,  presenting, 
in  parallel  columns,  a  record  of  the  more  noteworthy  events 
in  the  history  of  the  world  from  the  earliest  times  down  to 
the  present  day,  together  with  an  alphabetical  index  of  sub- 
jects . . .  with  historical  chart,  maps,  and  genealogical  tables. 
N.  Y.  Putnam,  1916. 

HISTORICAL  NOTEBOOKS 

164.  These  are  useful  for  short  explanations  of  historical 
allusions,  outlines  of  the  history  of  cities,  .dates  of  famous 
events  and  inventions,  lists  of  rulers,  battles,  etc. 

Brewer,  Ebenezer  Cobham.  Historic  note-book;  with  an 
appendix  of  battles.  Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  1896. 

Little,  Charles  Eugene.  Cyclopedia  of  classified  dates. 
N.  Y.  Funk,  1900. 

Harper's  book  of  facts,  a  classified  encyclopaedia  of  the 
history  of  the  world. .  .from  4004  B.C.  to  1906  A.D.  with. . . 
references  to  subjects  in.  .  .science,  literature,  art,  and  gov- 
ernment, ed.  by  Charlton  T.  Lewis.  N.  Y.  Harper,  1906. 


89 


165-166  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Haydn,  Joseph  Timothy.  Haydn's  dictionary  of  dates 
and  universal  information  relating  to  all  ages  and  nations,  ed. 
by  Benjamin  Vincent.  25th  ed.  N.  Y.  Putnam,  1911. 

SOURCES 

165.  There  are  two  kinds  of  printed  material  generally 
recognized  in  the  subject  of  history:   primary  and  secondary 
material.     The  former,  sometimes  called  simply  " Sources," 
consists  of  documents  of  governments  concerned  with  the 
event  in  question  and  writings  of  people  who  participated  in 
or  witnessed  it.     These  are  found  not  only  in  the  numerous 
"source  books"   (collections  of  such  material)  but    also    in 
annual  cyclopedias,  periodicals,  and  newspapers,  and  through 
government  document  indexes   (see  sections  112-119,  95-99, 
364-368)  and  special  bibliographies. 

Secondary  material  comprises  the  publications  based  upon 
primary  or  other  secondary  sources;  i.e.  the  ordinary  text- 
book, treatise,  or  encyclopedia  article.  The  following  are 
some  of  the  primary  sources,  which  are  found  in  the  Refer- 
ence Room,  together  with  indexes  to  others. 

166.  Miller,  Marion  Mills,  ed.    Great  debates  in  Ameri- 
can history,  from  the  debates  in  the  British  Parliament  on  the 
colonial  stamp  act  (1764-1765)  to  the  debates  in  Congress  at 
the  close  of  the  Taft  administration  (1912-1913.)     N.  Y.  Cur- 
rent literature  publishing  co.  c!913.    14v. 

Contents:  y.l,  Colonial  rights — The  Revolution — The 
Constitution;  v.2-3,  Foreign  relations;  v.4,  Slavery,  1790- 
1857;  v.5,  State  rights,  1798-1861  and  Slavery,  1858-1861; 
v.6,  The  Civil  War;  v.7-8,  Civil  rights;  v.9,  Departments 
of  government;  v.10,  Economic  and  social  questions;  v.12, 
Revenue;  tariff  and  taxation;  v.13-14,  Finance. 

The  introduction  of  each  volume  is  by  a  distinguished 
statesman  or  publicist.  Extracts  from  debates  and  speeches 
are  connected  by  narrative  paragraphs.  Illustrated  by  por- 
traits and  reprints  of  political  cartoons.  General  indexes  in 


90 


HISTORY  167-170 

v.14:  one  of  subjects  and  the  other  of  persons.    Table  of  con- 
tents in  each  volume  notes  favorable  and  unfavorable  speeches. 

167.  Annual  register,   1758-date,   described  in  section 
115,  is  especially  useful  for  sources  of  American  history  in 
colonial  and  revolutionary  periods. 

168.  AppletoiWs  annual  cyclopaedia,  1861-1902.    N.  Y. 
Appleton,  cl863-1903. 

A  record  of  events  of  each  year  with  encyclopedic  articles 
on  subjects  of  interest  at  the  time,  including  biography.  Be- 
sides original  articles,  there  are  President's  messages  and 
proclamations,  diplomatic  correspondence,  orders  and  reports, 
and  important  laws.  Useful  especially  for  Civil  War  and 
Reconstruction  periods.  Each  volume  is  arranged  alphabet- 
ically by  large  subjects  with  an  index  in  the  back.  There  is 
also  an  index  for  each  of  the  three  series  of  the  set: 

Series  1,  15v.  1861-1875 ;    index  in  separate  volume. 
"       2,  20v.  1876-1895;    index  in  back  of  1895  v. 
"       3,     7v.  1896-1902;    index  in  back  of  1902  v. 

169.  The  New  York  times  index,  v.  1-date.    N.  Y.  New 
York  times,  1913-date. 

Issued  quarterly.  Minute  subject  index  to  current  events 
as  recorded  in  New  York  times,  giving  reference  to  the  Times 
by  date  of  issue,  page,  and  column.  Forms  an  index  to  dates 
which  may  be  used  in  looking  up  material  in  other  newspapers 
also. 

170.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Price  list  of 
government  documents.     "Washington,  Government  printing 
office. 

No.  50,  American  history  and  biography ;  no.  65,  Foreign 
relations:  Diplomacy,  international  law,  Mexico,  European 
War.  These  lists  of  documents  which  the  Superintendent  of 
documents  has  for  sale  include  many  references  to  govern- 
ment sources  for  United  States  history. 


91 


171-175  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

BIBLIOGRAPHIES 

171.  Besides  the  lists  of  books  in  the  history  reference 
books  already  described,  there  are  several  excellent  special 
bibliographies  for  history  described  in  the  chapter  on  Bib- 
liography, sections  380-383. 

ATLASES 

172.  A  few  historical  maps  are  included  in  some  general 
atlases,  in  general  encyclopedias,  and  in  histories  and  his- 
torical reference  books;    e.g.  Century  atlas,  Charles  Downer 
Hazen,  Modern  European  History,  and  Lamed,  History  for 
Ready  Reference.     There  are,  however,  several  good  atlases 
made  especially  for  use  in  studying  history.     In  these  the 
maps  are  generally  arranged  chronologically  according  to  the 
period  they  illustrate  and  are  found  through  the  table  of  con- 
tents.   The  index  of  places  in  an  historical  atlas  is  not  as  a 
rule  of  so  much  importance  to  the  student  as  the  index  in  an 
ordinary  atlas. 

173.  Shepherd,  William  Robert.    Historical  atlas.  N.  Y. 
Holt,  1911. 

Small  maps  covering  history  from  1450  B.C.  to  the  20th 
century.  Especially  good  for  war  campaigns,  treaty  adjust- 
ments, development  of  commerce,  racial  and  religious  distribu- 
tion of  peoples.  Contents  and  index. 

174.  Poole,  Reginald  Lane,  ed.    Historical  atlas  of  mod- 
ern Europe  from  the  decline  of  the  Roman  empire ;   compris- 
ing also  maps  of  parts  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  the  New  world, 
connected  with  European  history.    Oxford,  Clarendon  press, 
1902. 

Larger  maps  than  in  most  of  the  historical  atlases,  with 
valuable  explanatory  text  by  various  authorities.  More  maps 
of  the  British  Isles  than  of  any  other  one  country. 

175.  Cambridge  modern  history,    v.14,  Atlas.    See  sec- 
tion 160. 


92 


HISTORY  176-179 

176.  Droysen,  Gustav.      Allgemeiner  historischer  hand- 
atlas.    Bielefeld,  Velhagen,  1886. 

One  of  the  standard  historical  atlases,  but  difficult  to  use 
without  a  knowledge  of  German. 

CLASSICAL  ANTIQUITIES 

177.  Peck,  Harry  Thurston,  ed.    Harper 's  dictionary  of 
classical  literature  and  antiquities.    [Ed.  2.]    N.  Y.  American 
book  co.     c!896. 

Best  popular  cyclopedia  of  Greek  and  Roman  history, 
geography,  antiquities,  biography,  literature,  and  mythology. 
Short  articles  with  selected  bibliographies.  Alphabetical  ar- 
rangement usually  under  Latin  title,  with  cross  reference 
from  the  English  equivalent.  Many  illustrations  and  a  few 
maps.  Appendix  contains  a  few  additional  articles  and 
Tables  of  Greek  and  Eoman  weights  and  measures. 

178.  Smith,  Sir  William.     A  dictionary  of  Greek  and 
Roman  antiquities.    Ed.  by  William  Smith,  William  Wayte, 
G.  E.  Marindin.    3d  ed.  rev.  and  enl.    London,  Murray,  1890- 
91.    2v. 

First  edition,  published  in  1842,  has  been  thoroughly  re- 
vised. More  than  fifty  writers  who  contributed  to  the  work 
are  listed  at  the  beginnings  of  the  volumes.  Articles  signed 
by  initials.  More  detailed  than  Harper,  but  no  articles  on 
persons  or  places.  At  the  end  of  v.2  are  Tables  of  measures, 
weights  and  money,  Greek,  Latin  and  English  indexes  and 
an  appendix  of  supplementary  material. 

179.     Dictionary  of  Greek  and  Roman  biography 

and  mythology.    London,  Taylor,  1844-49. 

Includes  biographies  of  "all  persons  of  any  importance 
which  occur  in  the  Greek  and  Roman  writers,  from  the  earliest 
times  down  to  the  extinction  of  the  Western  Empire  in ... 
476. .  .and. .  .of  the  Eastern  Empire  by  the  capture  of  Con- 
stantinople by  the  Turks  in...  1453."  Preface.  Christian 
writers  as  well  as  classical.  Articles  signed  by  initials.  Illus- 
trations are  reproductions  of  coins  showing  the  heads  of 

93 


180-183  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

famous  persons.  Chronological  tables  and  lists  of  kings  in 
the  back  of  v.3;  also  list  of  genealogical  tables  with  refer- 
ences to  the  volumes  and  pages  where  they  may  be  found. 

180.  Whibley,  Leonard.    A  companion  to  Greek  studies. 
3d  ed.  rev.    Cambridge,  Eng.    University  press,  1913. 

Sandys,  Sir  John  Edwin.  A  companion  to  Latin  studies. 
2d  ed.  Cambridge,  Eng.  University  press,  1913. 

Chapters  by  different  authorities  on  Greek  or  Koman  geog- 
raphy, history,  literature,  art,  mythology,  and  public  and 
private  life,  etc.  Bibliographies  are  for  guidance  of  students. 
Illustrated.  Good  to  use  when  information  is  desired  on 
broad  subjects,  which  the  classical  dictionaries  distribute 
alphabetically  under  various  specific  terms.  Detailed  table 
of  contents  and  four  indexes  in  each  book :  1,  Persons,  deities 
and  races;  2,  Places;  3,  Scholars  and  modern  writers;  4, 
Greek  (or  Latin)  words  and  phrases. 

ENGLAND 

181.  Low,  Sidney  James  and  Pulling,  F.  S.    Dictionary 
of  English  history.    London,  Cassell,  1911. 

Concise  articles  on  English  history  and  institutions,  in- 
cluding biographies  of  historical  personages.  Some  articles 
signed  by  initials  and  followed  by  bibliographies.  Arranged 
alphabetically  by  broad  subjects.  Minute  index.  Transla- 
tion of  Magna  Carta  follows  the  Prefaces.  A  few  portraits. 

182.  Annual  register  should  be  consulted,  especially  for 
source  material  in  the  18th  to  20th  centuries.     (See  section 
115). 

UNITED  STATES 

183.  Harper's  encyclopaedia  of  United  States  history 
from  458  A.D.  to  1912.    New  ed.  rev.  and  enl.    N.  Y.  Harper, 
c!912.     lOv. 

Popular  cyclopedia  of  the  subject.  A  special  feature  is 
the  source  material  contained;  viz.  extracts  from  journals 
and  reprints  of  documents,  treaties,  orations  and  presidential 


94 


HISTORY  184-185 

messages  and  proclamations.  Includes  biographical  articles. 
Authors  of  some  articles  mentioned  in  editor's  introduction 
to  the  article.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Many  illustrations 
and  small  maps. 

184.  Hodge,  Frederick  Webb,  ed.    Handbook  of  Ameri- 
can   Indians   north   of   Mexico.      Washington,    Government 
printing  office,  1907-10.     2v.     (U.  S.  Bureau  of  American 
ethnology.   Bulletin  30.) 

Treats  of  history,  archaeology,  customs,  arts,  industries, 
and  institutions  of  Indians  north  of  Mexico,  including  Eskimo 
and  also  allied  Mexican  Indians.  Description  of  every  stock, 
confederacy,  tribe  or  tribal  division,  with  the  origin  of  every 
name  treated  and  a  list  of  its  synonyms.  Brief  biographies 
of  noted  Indians.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Illustrated. 

185.  For  source  material  on  United  States  history  eon- 
suit  Miller,  Debates,  Appleton's  annual  cyclopaedia  and  An- 
nual register.     (See  sections  166,  168  and  115). 


186-189 

CHAPTER  XVIII 
SOCIOLOGY 

186.  The  books  listed  in  this  chapter  under  the  heading 
of  "sociology"  are  taken  from  the  fields  of  political  science, 
law,  economics,  statistics  and  customs.     Referring   back   to 
sections  112-119,  it  will  be  seen  that  annual  Cyclopedias  and 
almanacs  also  include  lists  of  government  officials,  digests  of 
state  and  federal  laws  on  certain  subjects,  such  as  child  labor, 
and  texts  of  important  laws. 

187.  Statesman's  year-book,  1864-date.     London,   Mac- 
millan,  1864-date. 

"A  concise  and  reliable  manual  of  descriptive  and  sta- 
tistical information  about  the  governments  of  the  world." 
Kroeger.  British  empire  is  given  first,  followed  by  the  United 
States  and  then  by  the  other  countries  in  alphabetical  order. 
After  the  description  and  statistics  of  each  country  is  a  list 
of  official  publications  and  of  books  about  the  country.  Full 
index.  A  few  maps. 

188.  Cyclopedia  of  American  government,  ed.  by  A.  C. 
McLaughlin  and  A.  B.  Hart.    N.  Y.  Appleton,  1914.    3v. 

Articles  on  the  theory  and  principles  of  government  and 
constitutional  law  as  well  as  actual  forms  of  American  gov- 
ernment and  politics,  national,  state,  and  local.  Treats  some 
aspects  of  foreign  states  which  are  especially  interesting  to 
American  readers.  Many  small  topics,  explanations  of  such 
allusions  as  '  *  Kitchen  Cabinet. ' '  Longer  articles  are  usually 
signed,  sometimes  only  by  initials  explained  in  the  front  of 
v.l.  Selected  bibliographies.  Arranged  alphabetically,  with 
*nany  cross  references.  Analytical  index  in  v.3,  which  is  use- 
ful in  finding  everything  in  the  cyclopedia  on  a  subject. 
fO 

189.  Lalor,  John  Joseph,  ed.     Cyclopaedia  of  political 
science,  political  economy  and  of  the  political  history  of  the 
United  States.    Chicago,  Rand,  1882-84.    3v. 


SOCIOLOGY  190-193 

Not  recent,  but  useful  for  political  history.  Articles  are 
usually  long,  written  by  specialists,  and  frequently  have  bib- 
liographies. Alphabetical  arrangement  by  broad  subjects. 

190.  Palgrave,  Sir  Robert  Harry  Inglis,  ed.    Dictionary 
of  political  economy.    London,  Macmillan,  1894-1910.     3v. 

Historical  and  theoretical  articles  on  economic  subjects, 
including  foreign  as  well  as  British  phases.  Signed  by  initials  j; 
of  contributors,  whose  names  are  given  at  the  end  of  each 
volume.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Appendix  in  v.3  contains 
developments  in  economics  since  first  publication  of  the  work. 
Index  to  Appendix  follows  Index  to  main  part. 

191.  Bliss,  William  Dwight  Porter  and  Binder,  R.  N. 

ed.  New  encyclopedia  of  social  reform.      New  ed.      N.  Y. 
Funk,  1908. 

For  the  general  reader  and  student.  Includes  historical, 
biographical  and  statistical  material  as  well  as  argumentative 
articles  both  favoring  and  opposing  reforms  in  political,  eco- 
nomic and  social  conditions.  Most  of  the  longer  articles  are 
signed.  Selected  bibliographies.  Alphabetical  arrangement. 
Cross-references  to  other  articles  in  the  book  are  generally 
put  at  the  first  of  the  article.  Index  includes  both  authors 
and  subjects  of  the  articles. 

192.  Public  affairs  information  service.     Bulletin,  v.l- 
date.    N.  Y.  Wilson,  1915-date. 

Published  weekly,  with  bi-monthly  and  annual  cumula- 
tions. Indexes  books,  society  publications,  gpvernment  docu- 
ments, and  periodicals  for  subjects  in  political  and  economic 
science. 

193.  Wilson,  H.  W.  firm,  publishers.     Debaters'  hand- 
book series;   Abridged  debaters'  handbook  series;  Handbook 
series. 

About  fifty  small  volumes  on  different  subjects  of  current 
interest  in  economics,  sociology  or  political  science,  contain- 
ing extracts  from  books,  magazines,  and  pamphlets,  with 


97 


194-196  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

good  bibliographies  of  the  subjects.    The  first  two  series  con- 
tain also  briefs. 

194.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  labor  statistics.     Bulletin,  1912- 
date.    Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1912-date. 

Results  of  investigations  in  different  industries  and  differ- 
ent localities.  Published  in  series :  Wages  and  hours  of  labor, 
Workmen's  insurance  and  compensation,  Industrial  accidents 
and  hygiene,  Labor  laws  of  the  United  States,  Foreign  labor 
laws,  Retail  prices  and  cost  of  living,  Wholesale  prices,  Women 
in  industry,  Miscellaneous. 

195.  Much  descriptive  and  statistical  material  is  given 
in  the  following  year  books,  of  which  the  British  are  official 
publications  of  the  governments  of  the  respective  colonies. 

Australia  official  year  book  Argentine  year  book 

Canada  year  book  China  year  book 

Indian  year  book  Japan  year  book 
New  South  Wales  official  year  book      Mexican  year  book 

New  Zealand  official  year  book  Russian  year  book 

South  African  year  book  South  American  year 
Victorian  year  book  book 

196.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Price  lists  of 
government  documents.     Washington,  Government  printing 
office. 

The  following  lists  include  titles  of  government  documents, 
which  may  be  procured  for  comparatively  low  prices,  on  many 
subjects  of  political  science,  economics  and  sociology: 

No.  10,  Laws:  Federal,  state,  and  international. 

No.  20,  Public  domain,  public  lands,  conservation,  home- 
steading,  etc. 

No.  28,  Finance:  Revenue,  taxation,  banking,  appropria- 
tions, agricultural  credit,  coinage,  panics. 

No.  32,  Insular  possessions  and  Cuba. 

No.  33,  Labor:  Arbitration,  cost  of  living,  employers' 
liability,  old-age  and  civil  service  pensions,  eight-hour  law, 
insurance,  strikes. 

98 


SOCIOLOGY  197-198 

No.  37,  Tariff. 

No.  54,  Political  science:  Initiative,  referendum,  recall, 
elections,  prohibition,  woman  suffrage,  and  District  of  Co- 
lumbia. 

No.  60,  Alaska. 

No.  61,  Panama  Canal. 

No.  67,  Immigration:  Naturalization,  citizenship,  Euro- 
peans, Chinese,  Japanese,  Negroes. 

OFFICIAL  DIRECTORIES 

197.  U.  S.  Congress.     Official  Congressional  directory. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

Two  or  three  editions  for  each  session  of  Congress.  Bio- 
graphical sketches  of  members  of  Congress,  the  President  and 
his  Cabinet,  and  the  Supreme  Court.  Lists  of  members  of 
Congressional  committees  and  commissions,  the  judiciary,  and 
the  diplomatic  and  consular  service  between  the  United  States 
and  foreign  countries,  and  press  representatives  in  Congress. 
Official  duties  and  personnel  of  the  executive  departments 
and  their  bureaus  and  of  miscellaneous  federal  commissions 
and  boards.  Description,  plan,  and  directory  of  the  Capitol 
building.  Alphabetical  "Contents"  in  front  of  volume. 
Alphabetical  list  of  members  of  Congress,  with  their  addresses, 
near  the  back,  followed  by  maps  of  Congressional  districts. 
"Individual  Index"  at  the  end  is  an  alphabetical  list  of 
names  and  addresses  of  all  other  persons  mentioned  in  the 
book. 

198.  Illinois  Secretary  of  state.    Blue  book  of  the  state 
of  Illinois.     Springfield,  111.     State  of  Illinois. 

Published  after  each  General  Assembly;  i.e.  biennially, 
in  the  odd  years.15 

Biographies  and  portraits  of  present  state  officers,  mem- 
bers of  the  General  Assembly  and  Illinois  senators  and  rep- 
resentatives in  U.  S.  Congress.  List  of  county  officers.  Ap- 
propriations and  bills  passed  by  General  Assembly.  Consti- 


"Similar  books   are  published  for  other  states. 

99 


199-201  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

tutions  of  Illinois.  Lists  of  previous  Illinois  state  officers, 
Congressmen,  Assemblies,  etc.  Chronology  of  state  history. 
Information  about  state  schools  and  institutions.  Signed  arti- 
cles on  subjects  of  state  interest  varying  with  the  different 
editions.  General  index. 

CONSTITUTIONS  AND  LAWS 

199.  U.  S.  Laws,  statutes,  etc.    U.  S.  compiled  statutes, 
1918.     St.  Paul,  West  publishing  co.     1918. 

Often  referred  to  as  Mallory's  Statutes.  A  compact  edi- 
tion of  U.  S.  statutes  of  a  general  and  permanent  nature  in 
force  July  16,  1918.  Includes  Declaration  of  Independence, 
Articles  of  Confederation,  Northwest  Territorial  Government 
Act,  and  the  Constitution,  a  chronological  table  of  laws,  and 
an  alphabetical  list  of  the  popular  names  of  acts.  Acts  of 
Congress  June  14,  1918  to  July  16,  1918  are  in  an  Appendix. 
General  index. 

200.  Lapp,  John  Augustus,  comp.     Important  federal 
laws.    Indianapolis,  Bowen,  1917. 

A  compilation  of  federal  laws  affecting  many  classes  of 
citizens.  Arranged  in  groups  according  to  special  interest 
involved ;  e.g.  agriculture,  banking,  business,  labor,  moral  re- 
form, etc.  Includes  a  Supplement  ' '  embracing  the  important 
acts  of  the  Special  Session  of  Congress"  April  2-Oct.  6,  1917; 
i.e.  the  war  legislations.  Separate  indexes  for  main  part  of 
volume  and  for  Supplement. 

201.  U.  S.  Congress.     Congressional  record.    Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office. 

Daily  record  of  the  debates  and  proceedings  of  Congress. 
Index  issued  every  two  weeks.  Bound  volumes  issued  at  end 
of  session,  with  index  covering  whole  session.  Numerical  list 
of  bills  at  the  end  of  each  index  gives  page  references  in  the 
Record,  by  which  the  passage  of  the  bills  through  Congress 
may  be  traced. 


100 


-»  •;  •  :..=  :•:  i-# 

SOCIOLOGY  202-206 

202.  Illinois.    Laws,  statutes,  etc.    Revised  statutes  of 
the  state  of  Illinois,  1917.  .  .comp.  and  ed.  by  H.  B.  Hurd. 
Chicago,  Chicago  legal  news  co.  f  1918.  V- 

A  compilation  of  laws  in  force  in  Illinois,  Jan.  1,  1918. 
A  new  edition  is  usually  published  after  every  General  As- 
sembly. Arranged  alphabetically  in  the  form  of  chapters  on 
large  subjects.  Index  in  the  back  refers  to  chapter  and 
section. 

203.  Legislative  voters'  league  of  the  state  of  Illinois. 

Assembly  bulletin,  1913-date.    Mount  Morris,  111.  Legislative 
voters'  league,  1913-date. 

Published  weekly.  Aims  to  furnish  "exact  information 
concerning  the  scope  and  purpose  of  legislation"  in  the  state 
legislature.  Record  also  of  the  progress  of  the  state  consti- 
tutional convention. 

204.  Kettleborough,  Charles,  ed.  The  state  constitutions 
and  the  federal  constitution  and  organic. laws  of  the  territories 
and  other  colonial  dependencies  of  the  United  States  of  Amer- 
ica.   Indianapolis,  Bowen,  1918. 

Arrangement:  United  States,  followed  first  by  the  states 
and  second  by  the  dependencies,  alphabetically.  Index  is 
really  a  table  of  contents  of  the  constitutions. 

205.  'Columbia  university.  Legislative  drafting  research 
fund.    Index  digest  of  state  constitutions.    Albany  ( ?)  N.  Y. 
state  constitutional  convention  commission,  1915. 

A  subject  index  giving  briefly  the  provisions  of  and  exact 
references  to  the  articles  and  sections  of  the  various  state 
constitutions  on  specific  subjects. 

STATISTICS 

206.  Great  care  must  be  taken  in  trying  to  prove  any 
point  by  statistics,  first,  that  they  are  accurate,  and  second, 
that  in  comparing  statistics  they  shall  be  based  on  like  con- 
ditions.   It  is  often  difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  find  in  print 
as  recent  statistics  as  are  desired.    Almanacs  usually  give  the 

101 


207-210  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

most  recent  statistics,  but  they  are  not  always  reliable.  Gov- 
ernment bureaus  may  be  expected  to  publish  the  most  accurate 
statistics,  but  their  figures  are  very  frequently  a  year  or  more 
old  before  they  are  published.  Certain  statistical  reference 
books  are  based  on  official  returns  and  they  are  listed  below 
with  some  of  the  government  statistical  reports  of  a  general 
nature.  The  Statesman's  year-book,  described  in  section  187 
is  also  very  often  referred  to  for  statistics  connected  with 
particular  countries. 

207.  Mulhall,  Michael  George.    Dictionary  of  statistics. 
4th  ed.  rev.  to  November  1898.    London,  Routledge,  1903. 

Comparative  tables  of  statistics  of  all  countries,  in  two 
parts:  "the  first  comprising  all  known  statistical  data  from 
the  time  of  the  Emperor  Diocletian  down  to  the  year  1890,  the 
second  embracing  so  far  the  final  decade  of  the  century." 
Preface,  Feb.  2,  1899.  Each  part  is  arranged  alphabetically 
by  subjects.  Minute  index. 

208.  Webb,  Augustus  Duncan.    The  new  dictionary  of 
statistics.     London,  Routledge,  1911. 

Supplementary  to  Mulhall,  which  it  resembles  in  arrange- 
ment. Preface  is  well  worth  reading  before  attempting  to 
use  any  statistics. 

UNITED  STATES 

209.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  foreign  and  domestic  commerce. 

Statistical  abstract  of  the  United  States,  1878-date.  Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office,  1879-date. 

Comparative  statistical  tables  for  varying  numbers  of 
years  of  the  population,  resources,  commerce,  social  and  eco- 
nomic conditions  of  the  United  States.  A  few  statistics  for 
foreign  countries.  Source  of  each  table  usually  given.  De- 
tailed table  of  contents  and  minute  index. 

210.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  the  census.    Census  of  the  United 
States.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

102 


SOCIOLOGY  211-212 

Compiled  and  published  every  ten  years  since  1790.  Sta- 
tistics and  monographs  on  population,  industries,  and  re- 
sources of  the  United  States. 

The  last  Census  was  the  Thirteenth,  taken  in  1910  and 
published  in  1913  in  llv.  Contents:  v.  1-3,  Population; 
v.4,  Occupation;  v.5-7,  Agriculture;  v.8-10,  Manufactures; 
v.ll,  Mines  and  quarries.  Includes  many  charts,  diagrams, 
maps,  etc.  Complete  Tables  of  contents  in  each  volume,  but 
no  index. 

The  Abstract  of  the  Thirteenth  Census  "presents  con- 
densed statistics  for  the  United  States  as  a  whole ...  It  is  is- 
sued in  53  editions — one  without  supplement,  and  each  of 
the  others  including  a  supplement  for  some  one  state,"  (or 
dependency)  which  "contains  full  and  detailed  statistics  for 
the  state  and  its  counties".  U.  S.  Census  bureau.  Circular 
of  information.  1917,  p.  106. 

The  Statistical  atlas  of  the  United  States,  1914,  illus- 
trates by  means  of  charts,  maps,  and  diagrams  the  statistics 
of  population,  agriculture,  manufactures,  etc.  which  are  given 
in  the  Thirteenth  census  reports.  Index  to  illustrations  as 
well  as  Table  of  contents. 

CUSTOMS 

211.  In  addition  to  the  special  books  noted  below,  hand- 
books of  general  information  (see  sections  239-243)  may  be 
consulted  for  the  customs  of  certain  holidays  and  seasons  and 
the  legends  connected  with  famous  people.     Books  of  travel 
furnish  material  on  national    customs    and   may   be    found 
through  the  card  catalog  by  looking  under  the  name  of  the 
country  with  subheadings  Description  and  travel  and  Man- 
ners and  customs.    Dictionaries  of  classical  antiquities  should 
be  consulted  for  the  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  (see  sections 
177-180). 

212.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.     Curiosities  of  popular 
customs  and  of  rites,  ceremonies,  observancies,  and  miscellan- 
eous antiquities.    Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!897. 

103 


213-215  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Compiled  largely  from  older  books,  but  containing  also 
American  and  Oriental  customs  not  usually  found  in  the 
English  books  of  this  nature.  Lives  and  legends  of  saints 
included.  Arranged  alphabetically.  A  few  illustrations. 

213.  Chambers,  Robert,  ed.     The  book  of  days,  a  mis-V 
cellany  of  popular  antiquities  in  connection  with  the  calendar. 
London,  Chambers,  1869.     2v. 

A  great  variety  of  information,  including  biographical  and 
historical  anecdotes,  arranged  in  the  order  of  the  days  of  the 
year.  Events  and  traditions  connected  with  special  days  may 
be  found  under  the  day.  For  other  information  it  is  neces- 
sary to  use  the  index  in  v.2. 

214.  Brand,  John.    Observations  on  the  popular  antiqui- 
ties of  Great  Britain ;  rev.  and  enl.  by  Sir  Henry  Ellis.   Lon- 
don, Bell,  1888-95.    3v. 

First  prepared  in  1795.  First  volume  contains  customs 
and  ceremonies  connected  with  special  days ;  the  second,  those 
connected  with  special  occasions;  and  the  third,  omens  and 
superstitions.  General  index  to  specific  subjects  in  v.3. 

215.  Hazlitt,  William  Carew.     Faiths  and  folklore;    a 
dictionary  of  national  beliefs,  superstitions  and  popular  cus- 
toms . . .  forming  a  new  ed.  of  the  Popular  antiquities  of  Great 
Britain  by  Brand  and  Ellis.     London,  Reeves,  1905.     2v. 

A  later  edition  of  Brand  and  similar  to  it  in  scope,  but 
arranged  alphabetically. 


104 


216-220 

CHAPTER  XIX 
RELIGION 

216.  Encyclopaedia  of  religion  and  ethics,  ed.  by  James 
Hastings,  with  the  assistance  of  J.  A.  Selbie,  and  other  schol- 
ars.   N.  Y.  Scribner,  1908-19.    v.1-10. 

Not  yet  completed.  ' '  The  Encyclopaedia  will  contain  arti- 
cles on  all  religions  of  the  world  and  on  all  the  great  systems 
of  ethics.  It  will  aim,  further,  at  containing  articles  on  every 
religious  belief  or  custom,  and  on  every  ethical  movement, 
every  philosophical  idea,  every  moral  practice.  Such  persons 
and  places  as  are  famous  in  the  history  of  religion  and  morals 
will  be -included."  Preface,  v.l.  "Much  attention  is  given 
to  social  topics  which  have  an  ethical  or  religious  aspect." 
Preface,  v.2.  Signed  articles  with  bibliographies.  Arranged 
alphabetically. 

217.  Schaff,  Philip.     The  new  Schaff-Herzog  encyclo- 
pedia of  religious  knowledge.    S.  M.  Jackson,  editor-in-chief. 
N.  Y.  Funk,  c.1908-14.     13v. 

Includes  religious  biographies  and  articles  on  religions, 
sects,  theology,  church  history,  etc.  Most  of  the  articles  are 
signed  and  have  bibliographies.  Alphabetical  arrangement. 
V.13  contains  a  general  index  to  the  set  which  is  useful  for 
finding  all  the  important  references  on  a  subject. 

218.  Bible.    Riverside  parallel  Bible. .  .being  the  version 
set  forth  A.D.  1611,  commonly  called  King  James's  version; 
arranged  in  parallel  columns  with  the  revised  versions  of  1881 
and  1885.    Boston,  Houghton,  n.d. 

219.  Hastings,  James,  ed.  Dictionary  of  the  Bible.  N.  Y. 
Scribner,  c!898-1904.     5v. 

Signed  articles  on  persons,  places,  antiquities,  archaeology, 
theology,  contents,  and  literature  of  the  Bible;  brief  bibli- 
ographies. The  arrangement  in  v.1-4  is  alphabetical.  V.5 
is  an  "extra"  volume,  containing  articles  not  alphabetically 
arranged  and  indexes  to  the  entire  set.  An  alphabetical  list 
of  articles  included  in  the  ' '  extra ' '  volume  is  in  the  front. 

220.  Young,   Robert.     Analytical   concordance   to   the 
Bible.    22d  American  ed.  rev.  throughout  by  W.  B.  Steven- 
son.   N.  Y.  Funk,  1919. 

105 


221-223  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

An  alphabetical  index  of  the  principal  words  used  in  the 
Bible,  with  exact  references  to  the  passages  in  which  each 
word  is  found. 

221.  Julian,  John,  ed.    Dictionary  of  hymnology.    Rev. 
ed.  with  new  supplement.    London,  Murray,  1907. 

Articles  on  hymn  writers,  the  origin  and  history  of  Chris- 
tian hymns,  and  various  phases  of  hymnology  signed  by  ini- 
tials and  arranged  alphabetically.  In  the  back  are  indexes  to 
the  main  part,  to  the  appendices,  and  to  the  supplement  by 
first  lines  of  hymns  in  English  and  other  languages,  and  by 
names  cf  authors,  translators,  etc. 

222.  Catholic  encyclopedia;  an  international  work  of  ref- 
erence on  the  constitution,  doctrine,  discipline  and  history  of 
the  Catholic  church.     N.  Y.    R.  Appleton,  c!907-14.     16v. 
V.16  published  by  the  Encyclopedia  press. 

' '  It  differs  from  the  general  encyclopedia  in  omitting  facts 
and  information  which  have  no  relation  to  the  Church.  On 
the  other  hand,  it  is  not  exclusively  a  church  encyclopedia,  nor 
is  it  limited  to  the  ecclesiastical  sciences  and  the  doings  of 
the  churchmen.  It  records  all  that  Catholics  have  done,  not 
only  in  behalf  of  charity  and  morals,  but  also  for  the  intel- 
lectual and  artistic  development  of  mankind. "  Preface. 
Signed  articles  arranged  alphabetically ;  bibliographies.  V.16 
contains  additional  articles  and  an  analytical  index  to  the 
complete  work.  Illustrated. 

223.  Jewish  encyclopedia. .  .prepared  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Cyrus  Adler. . .  [and  others].    Isidore  Singer,  manage- 
ing  editor.    N.  Y.  Funk,  1901-1906.    12v. 

1 '  It  endeavors  to  give ...  a  full  and  accurate  account  of  the 
history  and  literature,  the  social  and  intellectual  life,  of  the 
Jewish  people — of  their  ethical  and  religious  views,  their 
customs,  rites,  and  traditions  in  all  ages  and  in  all  lands.  It 
also  offers  detailed  biographical  information  concerning  rep- 
resentatives of  the  Jewish  race  who  have  achieved  distinction 
in  any  of  the  walks  of  life."  Preface.  The  articles  are 
signed  by  initials  and  arranged  in  alphabetical  order.  Bib- 
liographies and  illustrations. 

106 


224-226 

CHAPTER  XX 
LITERATURE 

224.  In  the  field  of  literature  there  are  many  excellent 
works  of  reference,  the  most  generally  used  of  which  are  listed 
below.     Often,  however,  information  can  be  more  quickly  or 
satisfactorily  secured  from  other  books  in  the  Reference  col- 
lection, such  as  general  encyclopedias,  biographical  diction- 
aries, and  periodical  indexes,  or  from  books  in  the  stacks,  such 
as  general  histories  of  literature,  books  on  the  various  forms 
of  literature,   biographical   and   critical  material   about   an 
author,  and  the  texts  of  his  works.     (See  sections  40-44  for 
headings  used  in  the  catalog  for  such  material.) 

COLLECTIONS  AND   DICTIONARIES 

GENERAL 

225.  Warner,  Charles  Dudley,  ed.  Library  of  the  world 's 
best  literature,  ancient  and  modern.    N.  Y.  Hill,  c!902.  46  v. 

Consists  mainly  of  selections  from  the  writings  of  the 
more  important  authors  of  all  countries  and  all  times.  Good 
biographical  and  critical  discussions  precede  the  selections 
from  each  author.  Arrangement  is  alphabetical  by  author 
discussed.  In  some  cases,  when  the  name  of  the  author  is 
unknown  or  would  have  no  special  significance,  the  material 
is  grouped  under  nationality,  period,  or  special  topic;  for 
example,  Egyptian  literature,  Anglo-Saxon  literature,  folk- 
song, Arabian  nights,  etc.  Contents  of  v.  40-41,  Songs,  hymns, 
and  lyrics ;  v.42-43,  Dictionary  of  authors ;  v.44-45,  Synopses 
of  noted  books;  v.46,  Guide  to  systematic  reading.  Illus- 
trated by  portraits  of  authors. 

226.  Stedman,  Edmund  Clarence  and  Hutchinson,  E.  M., 

ed.    Library  of  American  literature.    N.  Y.  Webster,  c!887- 
90.    llv. 

Extracts  from  the  writings  of  Americans  from  the  begin- 
ning of  the  colonial  period  to  1888.  Broad  in  scope,  includ- 
ing much  material  which  illustrates  the  political  or  social  life 

107 


227-230  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

of  the  nation,  but  which  is  not  literature  in  the  usual  sense. 
No  criticism.  Arrangement  is  chronological.  Brief  biogra- 
phies of  all  authors  represented  in  the  work  are  given  in  v.ll. 
General  index  in  v.ll  is  by  author,  subject,  or  form  of  litera- 
ture, sermons  being  indexed  under  Theology,  letters  under 
Correspondence,  poems  under  Poetry,  stories  under  Fiction, 
etc.  Illustrated  with  portraits. 

227.  Chambers,  Robert.    Cyclopaedia  of  English  litera- 
ture.   New  ed.  by  David  Patrick.    Philadelphia,  Lippincott, 
1902-04.    3v. 

Gives  biographies  and  selections  from  typical  writings  of 
the  most  important  English  authors.  Also,  two  sections  en- 
titled "English  literature  in  the  British  dominions  beyond 
the  seas"  and  "American  literature."  Arranged  chronolog- 
ically. A  general  index  in  v.3. 

ANTHOLOGIES 

228.  Carman,  Bliss,  ed.     World's  best  poetry.      Phila- 
delphia.   Morris,  c!904.    lOv. 

An  anthology  arranged  by  broad  subjects,  as  Home, 
Friendship,  Love,  Sorrow  and  consolation,  National  spirit, 
Tragedy,  Humor,  Nature,  etc.  Essays  at  the  front  of  each 
volume  on  subjects  relating  to  -poetry.  Portraits  and  other 
illustrations.  V.10  is  a  dictionary  of  quotations  but  also  con- 
tains general  indexes  to  the  whole  work  under  authors,  titles 
and  first  lines. 

229.  Ward,  Thomas  Humphry,  ed.    English  poets.    N.  Y. 
Macmillan,  1908-18.     5v. 

A  chronological  arrangement.  Brief  biographical  sketches 
and  good  critical  essays  by  authorities  precede  the  selections 
from  each  author.  No  American  poets  are  included.  Index 
of  poets  and  of  critics  in  v.5. 

230.  Bryant,    William    Cullen,    ed.       New   library   of 
poetry  and  song.    Kev.  and  enl.    N.  Y.  Ford,  c!900. 


108 


LITERATURE  231-234 

A  collection  of  poems  written  in  English,  arranged  by 
large  subjects.  Index  of  authors  in  the  front  of  the  book,  and 
an  index  of  titles,  of  first  lines,  and  of  poetical  quotations  in 
the  back  of  the  book. 

231.  Stevenson,  Burton  Egbert,  ed.  Home  book  of  verse, 
American  and  English,  1580-1918,  with  an  appendix  contain- 
ing a  few  well  known  poems  in  other  languages.    3d  ed.  rev. 
and  enl.     N.  Y.  Holt,  1918. 

Especially  valuable  in  including  work  of  modern  poets. 
Arranged  by  broad  subjects  with  an  index  under  authors,  first 
lines  and  titles. 

232.  Stedman,  Edmund  Clarence,  ed.    American  anthol- 
ogy, 1787-1900.    Boston,  Houghton,  1901. 

A  collection  of  poems  arranged  by  period.  Short  biogra- 
phies of  the  poets  represented,  including  the  titles  of  their 
leading  works,  are  given  at  the  back  of  the  book.  Index  of 
first  lines,  titles  and  poets. 

233.     Victorian   anthology,    1837-1895.     Boston, 

Houghton,  c!895. 

A  selection  from  British  poetry  written  during  the  reign 
of  Queen  Victoria.  Arranged  in  broad  chronological  divi- 
sions with  the  work  of  colonial  poets  in  a  separate  division. 
Under  each  period  poems  are  arranged  according  to  their 
type.  Brief  biographical  notes  of  poets  represented  are  in- 
cluded in  the  back  of  the  book.  Index  of  first  lines,  titles 
and  poets. 

ORATIONS. 

234.  Reed,  Thomas  Brackett,  ed.     Modern   eloquence. 
Philadelphia,  Morris,  1901-03.    15v. 

V.I -10  are  limited  to  speeches  delivered  during  the  last 
century.  V.l-3,  After-dinner  speeches ;  v.4-6,  Lectures ;  v.7-9, 
Occasional  addresses;  v.10,  Anecdotes,  arranged  by  classes. 
V.ll-15,  Political  oratory,  from  all  periods.  Brief  introduc- 


109 


235-238  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

tions  before  each  speech,  give  the  circumstances  which  occa- 
sioned it.    General  index  to  v.1-10  in  v.10 ;  to  v.11-15  in  v.15. 

235.  Brewer,  David  Josiah,  ed.    World's  best  orations. 
St.  Louis,  Kaiser,  1900.    lOv. 

Includes  in  full  selected  speeches  of  the  world's  greatest 
orators  from  the  earliest  period  to  modern  times  and  extracts 
from  speeches  of  others  of  less  importance.  Alphabetically 
arranged  by  names  of  orators.  A  general  index  in  v.10  for 
authors,  subjects  and  titles ;  also  a  number  of  special  indexes. 

ESSAYS 

236.  Brewer,  David  Josiah,  ed.    World 's  best  essays.  St. 
Louis,  Kaiser,  1900.    lOv. 

General  plan  corresponds  to  that  used  in  his  World's  best 
orations.  Indexes  are  in  v.10. 

COLLECTIONS    OF    LITERARY    CRITICISM. 

237.  Allibone,  Samuel  Austin.     Critical  dictionary  of 
English  literature  and  British  and  American  authors.    Phila- 
delphia, Childs  and  [Lippincott],  1858-71.    3v. 

Supplement,  by  J.  F.  Kirk.  Philadelphia,  Lip- 
pincott, 1892.  2v. 

Includes  a  great  many  names,  and  gives  under  each  a  short 
biographical  sketch,  full  list  of  works,  and  references — with 
extracts  in  some  cases — to  criticisms  published  in  books  and 
periodicals.  "The  supplement  brings  the  work  down  to 
1888."  Some  of  the  later  authors  are  included  both  in  the 
main  work  and  in  the  supplement.  Arrangement  is  alpha- 
betical by  author. 

238.  Moulton,  Charles  Wells,  ed.     Library  of  literary 
criticism  of  English  and  American  authors.    Buffalo,  Moulton 
pub.  co.,  1901-05.    8v. 

Similar  to  Allibone  in  scope  and  purpose.  Fewer  authors 
are  included,  but  more  criticisms  are  given  under  each.  Ar- 
rangement is  chronological.  For  each  author,  there  is  given 

110 


LITERATURE  239-243 

brief  biographical  information,  comment  on  the  personality 
of  the  author,  criticisms  of  the  separate  works  in  the  order 
of  their  publication,  followed  by  criticisms  of  his  work  in 
general.  The  first  of  the  two  indexes  in  v.  8  is  of  the  authors 
criticized;  the  second,  of  the  authors  of  the  criticisms. 

HANDBOOKS 

239.  Handbooks   of  general  information  are  useful  in 
identifying  literary,  biographical  or   mythological   allusions, 
and  in  finding  a  brief  statement  of  plots  or  legends.     There 
are  a  great  number  of  these  books,  many  of  them  covering 
much  the  same  field,  but  no  two  duplicating  each  other.    The 
arrangement  is  usually  alphabetical  and  the  title  often  shows 
the  scope  of  the  particular  work. 

240.  Brewer,  Ebenezer  Cobham.    Reader's  handbook  of 
famous  names  in  fiction,  allusions,  references,  proverbs,  plots, 
stories  and  poems.     New  ed.,  rev.  and  enl.     Philadelphia, 
Lippincott,  c!898. 

One  of  the  most  satisfactory  of  the  handbooks. 

241.    Dictionary  of  phrase  and  fable.    New  ed. 

enl.  Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!896. 

Similar  to  Reader's  handbook,  but  includes  rather  smaller 
subjects  and  explanations  of  phrases. 

242.  Century  cyclopedia  of  names;   a  pronouncing  and 
etymological  dictionary.    Eev.  and  enl.  ed.    N.  Y.    Century 
co.,  c!911. 

(For  description  of  this  volume  see  note  on  Century  dic- 
tionary, section  123). 

243.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.    Heroes  and  heroines  of 
fiction;    classical,  mediaeval,  legendary.     Philadelphia,  Lip- 
pincott, c!915. 

Heroes  and  heroines  of  fiction;  modern  prose 

and  poetry.  Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!914. 

Handy-book  of  literary  curiosities.  Philadelphia, 

Lippincott,  1893. 

Ill 


243  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Edwards,  Eliezer.  Words,  facts,  and  phrases.  Philadel- 
phia, Lippincott,  pref.  1881. 

Frey,  Albert  Homer.  Sobriquets  and  nicknames.  Boston, 
Houghton,  1895. 

Phyf  e,  William  Henry  Pinkney.  Five  thousand  facts  and 
fancies.  N.  Y.  Putnam,  1901. 

Keddall,  Henry  Frederic.  Fact,  fancy  and  fable.  Chi- 
cago, McClurg,  1892. 

Spence,  Lewis.  Dictionary  of  medieval  romance  and  ro- 
mance writers.  London,  Routledge,  1913? 

Thome,  Robert.  Fugitive  facts ;  a  dictionary  of  rare  and 
curious  information.  N.  Y.  Burt,  c!889. 

Wheeler,  William  Adolphus.  Explanatory  and  pronounc- 
ing dictionary  of  the  noted  names  of  fiction,  including  also, 
familiar  pseudonyms,  surnames  bestowed  on  eminent  men, 
and  analogous  popular  appellations  often  referred  to  in  lit- 
erature and  conversation.  23d  ed.  Boston,  Houghton,  1894. 

Who  wrote  it?  An  index  to  the  authorship  of 

the  more  noted  works  in  ancient  and  modern  literature ;  ed. 
by  C.  G.  Wheeler.  Boston,  Lee,  c!881. 


112 


244-247 

CHAPTER  XXI 
LITERATURE  (Continued) 

QUOTATIONS 

244.  Collections  of  quotations  are  useful  in  finding  quota- 
tions on  a  certain  subject  or  appropriate  to  a  certain  occasion, 
the  authorship  of  a  particular  quotation,  the  correct  form  of 
a  quotation,  or  the  lines  of  an  author  that  are  most  often 
quoted. 

245.  Bartlett,  John.    Familiar  quotations.    10th  ed.,  rev. 
and  enl.  by  N.  H.  Dole.     Boston,  Little,  1914. 

Quotations  from  prose  and  poetry  from  the  earliest  times 
down  to  the  present.  Gives  exact  reference  to  author  and 
work  from  which  the  quotation  is  taken.  Arrangement  is 
chronological  under  authors.  Index  of  authors  in  the  front 
and  index  by  important  words  of  the  quotation  in  the  back. 
One  of  the  most  complete,  accurate,  and  satisfactory  of  the 
collections. 

246.  Hoyt,  Jehiel  Keeler.    Cyclopedia  of  practical  quota- 
tions, English,  Latin,  and  modern  foreign  languages.  New  ed., 
rev.,  corrected  and  enl.    N.  Y.   Funk,  c!896. 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  subjects,  and  under  each  sub- 
ject alphabetically  by  author.  Main  part  of  the  work  de- 
voted to  English  quotations.  Special  sections  for  (1)  Latin 
authors  and  Latin  law  maxims,  (2)  Modern  foreign  authors, 
and  (3)  Mottoes  from  the  Latin  and  French.  Index  of 
authors  quoted,  and  separate  indexes  to  English  and  foreign 
language  quotations.  Reference  is  given  not  only  to  the  page 
but  also  to  the  exact  position  on  the  page  where  a  quotation 
will  be  found.  Most  useful  collection  for  quotations  by  sub- 
jects. 

247.  Walsh,  William  Shepard.     International  encyclo- 
pedia of  prose  and  poetical  quotations  from  the  literature  of 
the  world.     Philadelphia,  Winston,  c!908. 


113 


248-253  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Arranged  in  one  alphabet  by  subject.  An  index  of  topics 
with  cross  references,  and  a  list  of  authors  quoted,  is  given 
at  the  beginning  of  the  book;  an  index  of  important  words 
at  the  end. 

248.  Allibone,  Samuel  Austin.    Poetical  quotations  from 
Chaucer  to  Tennyson.     New  ed.     Philadelphia,  Lippincott, 
c!873. 

Only  English  quotations  are  included.  Arranged  alpha- 
betically by  subject.  Indexed  by  authors,  subjects,  and  first 
lines. 

249.    Prose  quotations  from  Socrates  to  Macau- 
lay.    Philadelphia,  Lippincott,  c!875. 

Brief  quotations  from  the  prose  literature  of  the  world. 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  subject.  Index  of  authors  and 
subjects. 

250.  Bent,  Samuel  Arthur.     Familiar  short  sayings  of 
great  men;   with  historical  and  explanatory  notes.     9th  ed., 
rev.  and  enl.    Boston,  Houghton,  c!887. 

Contains  only  oral  utterances  with  the  exception  of  some 
passages  from  letters,  journals,  proclamations,  and  addresses. 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  quoted.  Index  of  sayings. 

251.  Day,  Edward  Parsons.    Day's  collacon;   an  ency- 
clopaedia of  prose  quotations.     London,  Low,  1883? 

Prose  quotations  arranged  alphabetically  by  subjects.  No 
index  to  quotations,  but  an  index  to  subjects  in  the  front  of 
the  book  and  a  biographical  index  of  authors. 

252.  Swan,  Helena.    Dictionary  of  contemporary  quota- 
tions (English).    London,  Sonnenschein,  1904. 

"Roughly  speaking,  the  poems  from  which  these  quota- 
tions are  taken  date  from  after  1850."  Preface.  Subject 
arrangement.  Author  index. 

253.  Christy,  Robert.    Proverbs,  maxims,  and  phrases  of 
all  ages.    N.  Y.   Putnam,  c!887.    2v. 


114 


LITERATURE  254-257 

Arrangement  alphabetical  by  subject.  Index  of  subjects 
in  v.2. 

254.  Hazlitt,   William  Carew.     English  proverbs   and 
proverbial  phrases.    London,  Reeves,  1907. 

255.  Edmund,  Peggy  and  Williams,  H.   W.     Toaster's 
handbook ;  jokes,  stories  and  quotations.  White  Plains,  N.  Y., 
Wilson,  1914. 

Aims  to  assist  the  toast  writer  by  supplying  him  with  a 
story,  definition  or  verse  (for  the  most  part  humorous).  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically  by  subject. 

256.  Concordances  to  the  Bible  (see  section  220)  afford 
the  best  means  of  identifying  Biblical  quotations.     Special 
author  concordances,  when  available,  furnish  more  complete 
treatment  of  their  authors  than  books  of  general  quotations 
can  give;    e.g.  John  Bartlett's  Concordance  to  Shakespeare, 
and  similar  publications  for  Burns,  Cowper,  Keats,  Shelley, 
Tennyson,  Wordsworth,  and  so  on.     There  are  also  special 
author  dictionaries  that  are  useful  in  identifying  references 
to  the  characters,  places,  etc.,  mentioned  in  an  author's  works. 

INDEXES  TO  GENERAL  LITERATURE 

257.  The  "A.  L.  A."  index;  an  index  to  general  litera- 
ture.    2d.  ed.  enl.  and  brought  down  to  January  1,  1900. 
Boston,  American  library  association,  c!901. 

-* supplement,  1900-10.  Chicago,  American  library 

association  publishing  board,  1914. 

A  subject  index  to  books  of  essays  and  travel,  society  and 
government  publications,  and  volumes  of  a  miscellaneous  con- 
tent that  are  most  commonly  found  in  the  libraries  of  this 
country  and  that  are  especially  useful  for  reference  work. 
Information  given:  author  and  brief  title  of  book,  volume 
and  page.  An  alphabetical  author  list  of  the  books  indexed 
(with  call  number,  if  in  this  library)  is  in  the  back  of  the 
main  work  and  in  the  front  of  the  supplement. 

115 


258-261  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

258.  Baker,  Ernest  Albert.    Guide  to  the  best  fiction  in 
English.    New  ed.  enl.  and  rev.    London,  Routledge,  1913. 

A  selected  list  of  the  best  English  and  American  fiction 
and  of  foreign  fiction  translated  into  English  with  brief  note 
as  to  the  contents  and  style  of  each  book.  Arranged  accord- 
ing to  the  nationality  of  the  author  and  then,  under  periods, 
alphabetically  by  author.  Index  is  by  authors,  titles,  subjects, 
characters,  and  localities. 

259.     Guide  to  historical  fiction.    London,  Rout- 
ledge,  1914. 

A  list  of  about  5,000  novels  in  English  which  in  any  way 
picture  the  life  of  the  past.  Brief  note  as  to  scene,  plot, 
characters,  and  so  on,  of  each  novel.  Arranged  first  by  the 
country  furnishing  the  setting  of  the  novel  and  then  chrono- 
logically by  historical  period.  Index  of  authors,  titles,  sub- 
jects, historical  characters,  places,  events,  etc. 

260.  Firkins,  Ina  Ten  Eyck.     Index  to    short    stories. 
White  Plains,  N.  Y.    Wilson,  1915. 

Refers  to  stories  by  the  more  important  English  and  Amer- 
ican authors  and  by  a  few  foreign  authors  whose  stories  have 
been  translated  into  English.  Indexes  stories  published  in 
collected  editions  and  in  separate  volumes  of  an  author's 
works,  in  periodicals,  and  in  collections  of  literature.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically  by  author  and  title,  with  the  author's 
name  in  heavy  type.  References  to'  the  books  and  magazines 
in  which  the  story  may  be  found  are  given  only  under  the 
author's  name. 

261.  Granger,  Edith,  ed.     Index  to  poetry  and  recita- 
tions.    Rev.  and  enl.  ed.     Chicago,  McClurg,  1918. 

Indexes  "four  hundred  and  fifty  volumes,  comprising 
standard  and  popular  collections  of  poetry,  recitations  (both 
prose  and  verse),  orations,  drills,  dialogues,  selections  from 
drama,  etc."  Preface.  The  book  is  divided  into  three  parts: 
title,  author  and  first  line  indexes.  The  title  index  is  the 
main  part  and  references  are  given  here  by  means  of  symbols 

116 


LITERATURE  262-265 

to  the  various  books  in  which  the  selection  may  be  found.  In 
the  front  is  a  Key  to  symbols  to  which  the  call  numbers  have 
been  added  if  the  books  are  in  this  library. 

262.  Book  review  digest,  1905-date.    N.  Y.  Wilson,  1905- 
date. 

Monthly  numbers  with  annual  cumulations.  Lists  the 
more  important  books  of  general  interest  published  during 
the  period  covered  by  the  volume.  Gives  exact  reference — 
with  sometimes  a  brief  digest — to  reviews  published  about 
each  book  (selected  from  about  sixty  English  and  American 
publications) .  Indicates  the  number  of  words  in  each  article 
and,  by  the  use  of  +  (for  favorable)  and  —  (for  unfavor- 
able), shows  the  reviewer's  estimate  of  the  book.  Arranged 
alphabetically  by  authors  with  an  index  under  subject,  title 
and  pseudonym.  The  index  in  the  monthly  issue  covers  all 
the  numbers  since  the  last  annual  cumulation. 

263.  A.  L.  A.  booklist;   a  guide  to  the  best  new  books, 
1905-date.     Chicago,  American  library  association  publishing 
board,  1905-date. 

Published  monthly  (except  for  two  months  of  the  year). 
Planned  primarily  as  an  aid  in  book  selection  for  a  medium 
sized  public  library  but  useful  as  a  guide  to  important  new 
books.  Gives  brief  descriptive  notes. 

264.  Unite!!  States  catalog1;   books  in  print  January  1, 
1912.     Minneapolis,  Wilson,  1912. 

—Supplement;    books  published  1912-17.      N.    Y., 
Wilson,  1918. 

A  list  of  all  the  books  in  print  in  the  U.  S.  Jan.  1,  1912, 
and  a  supplement  for  all  books  published  from  1912  to  1917. 
Arranged  alphabetically  under  author,  subject  and  title  of 
the  book.  Gives  publisher  and  price  for  each.  In  the  back, 
is  a  directory  of  publishers  giving  their  street  addresses. 

265.  Cumulative  book  index,  1898-date.    N.  Y.,  Wilson, 
1898-date. 


117 


266-267  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Supplements  the  United  States  catalog  (above)  and  keeps 
it  up-to-date. 

266.  Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.     American  newspaper  an- 
nual and  directory,  1881-date.    Philadelphia,  Ayer,  1881-date. 

A  list  of  American  (including  Canadian,  Cuban,  and  the 
West  Indian)  newspapers  and  periodicals  with  information 
concerning  the  circulation,  names  of  editors,  frequency  of 
issue,  publishers  and  prices,  date  of  establishment,  politics  or 
other  distinctive  features.  Arrangement  is  alphabetical  un- 
der states  and  then  towns.  Classified  list  of  publications  in 
the  back;  e.g.,  Daily  newspapers,  Religious  publications,  Agri- 
cultural publications,  etc.  Contains  other  miscellaneous  ma- 
terial such  as  postal  information,  proof-reader's  marks,  popu- 
lation statistics,  etc. 

267.  Severance,  Henry  Ormal.    A  guide  to  the  current 
periodicals  and  serials  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.    3d 
ed.    Ann  Arbor,  Mich.   Wahr,  1914. 

An  alphabetical  list  of  periodical  publications  giving  fre- 
quency of  publication,  price,  publisher  and  place  of  publica- 
tion. Classified  list  of  periodicals  in  the  back. 


118 


268-271 

CHAPTER  XXII 
FINE  ARTS 

ARCHITECTURE 

268.  Sturgis,  Russell.     Dictionary  of  architecture  and 
building. .  .by  Russell  Sturgis  and  many  architects,  painters, 
engineers,  and  other  expert  writers.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  cl901. 
3v. 

Descriptions  of  famous  buildings,  articles  on  the  archi- 
tecture of  various  countries,  biographies  of  architects  as  well 
as  more  technical  material.  Some  articles  are  very  short, 
hardly  more  than  definitions,  others  are  long  and  signed.  Ar- 
ranged alphabetically  and  illustrated. 

269.  Longfellow,  William  Pitt  Preble,  ed.    Cyclopaedia 
of  works  of  architecture  in  Italy,  Greece  and  the  Levant.  N.  Y. 
Scribner,  1903. 

Descriptions  of  important  architectural  works  in  Italy, 
Greece,  and  the  Levant  arranged  alphabetically  by  places. 
Illustrations. 

PAINTING 

270.  Bryan,  Michael.     Bryan's  dictionary    of   painters 
and  engravers.    New  ed.  rev.  and  enl.  under  the  supervision 
of  G.  C.  Williamson.    London,  Bell,  1903-05.    5v. 

Biographies  of  painters  and  engravers,  exclusive  of  those 
living  at  the  time  of  publication,  and  lists  of  their  most  im- 
portant works  with  the  name  of  the  gallery  or  museum  con- 
taining the  original.  Some  of  the  articles  are  signed  by  the 
initials  of  the  authors.  The  arrangement  is  alphabetical  by 
names  of  artists  only.  Full  page  reproductions  of  famous 
paintings.  First  edition  was  issued  in  1816. 

271.  Champlin,  John  Dennison,  ed.  Cyclopedia  of  paint- 
ers and  painting.    Critical  editor,  C.  C.  Perkins,  c!885-87.  4v. 

Brief  biographical  facts  concerning  painters,  with  lists  of 
their  works.  Under  the  names  of  famous  paintings  are  very 


119 


272-275  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

short  descriptions,  usually  including  the  name  of  the  artist, 
the  size  of  the  painting,  the  date  when  painted  if  known,  and 
the  name  of  the  gallery  or  museum  containing  the  original. 
Alphabetically  arranged  by  names  of  artists  and  pictures. 
Illustrations  are  merely  outlines. 

MUSIC 

272.  Grove,  Sir  George,  ed.    Grove 's  dictionary  of  music 
and  musicians;   ed.  by  J.  A.  F.  Maitland.    N.  Y.  Macmillan, 
1904-10.    5v. 

A  standard  work  on  the  subject,  but  especially  good  for 
English  music  and  musicians.  The  articles  are  signed  by 
the  initials  of  the  authors  and  arranged  in  alphabetical  order. 

273.  Hubbard,  William  Lines,  ed.  American  history  and 
encyclopedia  of  music.     Toledo,  Squire,  c!908-10.     12v. 

Contents:  v.1-2,  Operas;  v.3,  Foreign  music;  v.4,  Instru- 
ments ;  v.5-6,  Musical  biographies ;  v.7,  American  music ;  v.8, 
Oratorios  and  masses;  v.9,  Theory  of  music;  v.10,  Musical 
dictionary;  v.11-12;  Essentials  of  music.  General  index  in 
v.12  refers  to  volumes  by  letters. 

274.  University  musical  encyclopedia,  by  many  eminent 
editors,  experts,  and  special  contributors.    N.  Y.  University 
society,  c!910-14.     12v. 

Contents :  v.1-2,  History  of  music ;  v.3-4,  Great  composers ; 
v.5,  Religious  music;  v.6,  Vocal  music  and  musicians;  v.7, 
The  opera ;  v.8,  Theory  of  music ;  v.9-10,  Dictionary  of  music ; 
v.11-12,  Musicians'  practical  instructor.  No  general  index. 

275.  Riemann,  Hugo.    Dictionary  of  music.    4th  ed.  rev. 
and  enl.  Translation  by  J.  S.  Shedlock.     London,  Augener, 
1908. 

Biographies  of  musicians,  definitions  of  musical  terms,  ar- 
ticles on  musical  instruments,  forms,  etc.  Alphabetical  ar- 
rangement. 


120 


276-279 

CHAPTER  XXIII 
SCIENCE 

276.  Smithsonian  institution.    Annual  report,  1846-date. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1846-date. 

Besides  official  reports  of  officers  of  the  Institution,  it  con- 
tains popular  papers  by  different  authorities  on  scientific 
topics  of  current  interest.  Well  illustrated. 

277.  Thorpe,  Sir  Thomas  Edward.    A  dictionary  of  ap- 
plied chemistry.     Rev.  and  eiil.    ed.      London,    Longmans, 
1912-13.    5v. 

A  cyclopedia  of  chemistry  in  its  application  to  arts  and 
manufactures.  Long  articles  by  authorities.  Many  are  signed 
by  initials  and  are  followed  by  good  bibliographies.  Ab- 
breviations used  in  bibliographies  explained  in  front  of  each 
volume.  Arrangement  alphabetical  by  small  subjects.  Illus- 
trated. 

278.  Chemical  catalog  company,  inc.  New  York.     The 
condensed  chemical  dictionary;    a  reference  volume  for  all 
requiring  access  to  a  large  amount  of  essential  data  regarding 
chemicals.     N.  Y.     The  author,  1919. 

Prepared  for  the  non-technical  user,  it  is  also  a  time-saver 
for  chemists.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Explanation  of 
terms  and  symbols  used,  in  the  front.  Condensed  informa- 
tion given:  [chemical]  derivation,  color  and  properties,  con- 
stants, grades,  method  of  purification,  containers,  uses,  fire 
hazard,  railroad  shipping  regulations.  Appendixes:  tables 
of  weights  and  measures,  temperatures  for  Fahrenheit  and 
Centigrade  compared,  specific  gravity  equivalents,  definitions 
of  units,  transportation  of  dangerous  articles  other  than  ex- 
plosives. 

279.  Gannett,  Henry.    A  dictionary  of  altitudes  in  the 
United  States.     4th  ed.     Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1906.     (U.  S.  Geological  survey.     Bulletin  274.) 


121 


280-283  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Arranged  alphabetically  by  state  and  then  by  place.  Ele- 
vation in  feet  given  and  abbreviation  denoting  authority. 
Sources  of  information  listed  in  introductory  note,  with  ex- 
planation of  the  abbreviations  of  names  of  railroads  used 
as  authorities. 

280.  U.  S.  Geological  survey.     Geologic  atlas    of    the 
United  States,  no.  1-date.  Washington,  The  author,  1894-date. 

"Issued  in  parts  called  folios.  Each  folio  includes  topo- 
graphic, geologic,  economic  and  structural  maps  of  a  'quad- 
rangle' or  small  section  of  the  country,  together  with  other 
illustrations  and  a  general  description."  Kroeger. 

281.  Gray,  Asa.    Gray's  new  manual  of  botany,  a  hand- 
book of  the  flowering  plants  and  ferns  of  the  central  and 
northeastern  United  States  and  adjacent  Canada.     7th  ed. 
N.  Y.   American  book  co.   c!908. 

Classified  arrangement  of  plants  by  families  and  species, 
with  analytical  key  in  front  and  Glossary  and  minute  index 
in  back  of  book.  Illustrations  small,  showing  details  rather 
than  general  appearance  of  plants. 

282.  Mathews,    Ferdinand   Schuyler.     Field   book    of 
American  wild  flowers.    New  ed.  rev.  and  enl.    N.  Y.  Putnam, 
c!912. 

Field  book  of  American  trees  and  shrubs.  N.  Y. 

Putnam,  c!915. 

Two  small  and  popular  handbooks  containing  short  de- 
scriptions of  the  plants,  arranged  by  families.  Very  pro- 
fusely illustrated,  including  many  colored  plates.  Index  of 
Latin  and  common  names  in  the  back  of  each  book  and  keys 
to  families  by  leaves  are  also  provided.  The  Field  book  of 
flowers  contains  a  color  index,  while  the  Field  book  of  trees 
has  instead  a  key  for  identification  by  bark  and  maps  show- 
ing distribution  in  the  United  States. 

283.  Hough,  Romeyn  Beck.    Handbook  of  the  trees  of 
the  northern  states  and  Canada  east  of  the  Kocky  Mountains. 
Lowville,  N.  Y.   The  author,  1907. 

122 


SCIENCE  284-287 

For  each,  tree  are  given  a  brief  description,  including  com- 
mercial value,  and  fine  illustrations  from  photographs  of  the 
trunk,  leaves,  fruit,  winter  branchlet,  a  small  map  of  the 
United  States  shaded  to  show  distribution,  and  in  some  cases 
a  cross  section  showing  grain  of  the  wood.  Analytical  keys, 
glossary,  and  index. 

284.  Rogers,  Julia  Ellen.    The  tree  book.    Garden  City, 
N.  Y.   Doubleday,  1905. 

Description  of  trees,  and  chapters  on  forestry,  uses  of 
wood  and  life  of  trees.  Illustrations  show  shape  of  tree, 
leaves,  bark,  fruit,  and  winter  buds.  Some  colored  plates. 
Appendix  contains  special  lists  of  trees ;  e.g.  tallest  and  old- 
est trees  in  the  world,  trees  with  bright  autumn  foliage.  Good 
index. 

285.  Atkinson,  George  Francis.     Studies  of  American 
fungi,  mushrooms,  edible,  poisonous,  etc.    3d  ed.    N.  Y.  Holt, 
1911. 

Descriptions  and  photographs  of  mushrooms,  with  chap- 
ters on  cultivation,  uses,  and  cooking.  Glossary  and  indexes 
of  genera  and  species. 

286.  Hornaday,  William  Temple.     American    natural 
history.    N.  Y.    Scribner,  1914.     4v. 

Popular,  but  authoritative,  work  describing  vertebrates  of 
North  America.  Classified  arrangement,  with  index  at  end 
of  v.4.  Many  illustrations. 

287.  Newton,  Alfred.     Dictionary   of   birds.     London, 
Black,  1893.    4v. 

Based  on  the  author's  articles  in  the  9th  ed.  of  the  En- 
cyclopaedia Britannica,  with  a  large  number  of  additional 
articles,  some  of  which  are  by  other  authorities.  Includes 
not  only  descriptions  of  particular  birds,  but  also  articles  on 
general  subjects  such  as  eggs,  geographical  distribution,  color 
of  birds.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Illustrated.  Index  in  v.4. 


123 


288-290  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OP  LIBRARIES 

288.  Chapman,  Prank  Michler.    Handbook  of  birds  of 
eastern  North  America.    Rev.  ed.    N.  Y.  Appleton,  1912. 

Long  introduction  on  bird  life  in  general,  with  bibliogra- 
phy of  ornithological  magazines,  followed  by  Key  to  families 
and  descriptions  of  birds  in  a  classified  arrangement.  Bib- 
liographical appendix  lists  books  dealing  with  birds  of  par- 
ticular states  arranged  alphabetically  by  states.  Well  indexed 
and  illustrated. 

289.  Holland,  William  Jacob.    The  butterfly  book.  Gar- 
den City,  N.  Y.     Doubleday,  c!898. 

— —  The  moth  book.     Garden  City,  N.  Y.     Double- 
day,  c!903. 

Popular  handbooks,  with  introductory  chapters  on  life 
history  and  anatomy  of  the  insects  and  their  collecting  and 
classification,  with  a  bibliography.  Descriptions  of  the  dif- 
ferent species.  Beautifully  illustrated  with  colored  plates. 
Minute  index  in  each  book. 

290.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.     Price  lists. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  15,  Geological  survey:  Works  on  geology,  mineral 
resources,  and  water  supply. 

No.  39,  Birds  and  wild  animals.  North  American  fauna, 
game,  and  mice. 

No.  48,  Weather.  Scientific  studies  in  climate,  local  rec- 
ords, floods,  earthquakes,  use  of  kites  and  other  instruments. 

No.  55,  National  museum  and  National  academy  of  sci- 
ences, reports,  bulletins,  and  proceedings. 

No.  57,  Astronomy. 


124 


291-294 

CHAPTER  XXIV 
AGRICULTURE 

291.  Bailey,  Liberty  Hyde,  ed.    Cyclopedia  of  American 
agriculture.    N.  Y.  Macmillan,  c!907-09.    4v. 

Signed  articles  with  bibliographies.  Contents :  v.l,  Farms ; 
v.2,  Crops ;  v.3,  Animals ;  v.4,  Farm  and  community.  Index 
in  each  volume.  Well  illustrated. 

292.    Standard  cyclopedia  of  horticulture.  N.  Y. 

Macmillan,  1914-17.     6v. 

Signed  articles  on  the  different  species  of  plants  grown 
in  the  U.  S.  and  Canada,  the  standard  methods  of  cultivation 
for  the  staple  flowers,  fruits  and  vegetables,  and  the  effective 
arrangement  of  plant  materials.  Bibliographical  references 
in  abbreviated  form  are  explained  in  the  front  of  v.l.  Mainly 
an  alphabetical  arrangement.  V.  6  contains  supplementary 
articles,  a  finding  list  of  binomials,  and  a  general  index  to 
synonyms,  vernacular  names,  and  miscellaneous  references 
not  in  alphabetical  order  in  the  cyclopedia.  Many  illustra- 
tions. 

293.  Agricultural  index,  1916-date.    N.  Y.  Wilson,  1919- 
date. 

One  volume  for  1916-1918  is  continued  by  numbers  cumu- 
lating quarterly,  annually,  and  triennially.  Indexes  agri- 
cultural periodicals,  bulletins,  government  reports,  and 
occasionally  other  literature.  Arranged  alphabetically  by 
subjects.  Information  given  with  the  periodical  references: 
title  of  the  article,  author's  name  if  known,  abbreviated  title 
of  the  periodical,  volume,  inclusive  page  reference,  exact  date. 
List  of  periodicals  indexed  with  abbreviations  used  is  in  the 
front  of  each  volume  or  number. 

GOVERNMENT  DOCUMENTS 

294.  The  publications  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agri- 
culture and  the  state  agricultural  experiment  stations  contain 
a  great  deal  of  valuable  information,  and  special  card  indexes 

125 


295-298  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

to  these  publications  are  in  the  Agricultural  Library.  The 
index  on  Library  of  Congress  cards  to  the  U.  S.  Department 
of  agriculture  publications  is  arranged  by  author,  subject, 
and  sometimes  title.  The  classified  index  on  half  size  cards 
to  the  agricultural  experiment  station  literature,  prepared  by 
the  Office  of  experiment  stations  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of 
agriculture,  is  rather  difficult  to  use  because  a  key  must  first 
be  consulted  in  order  to  find  the  classification  number  under 
which  the  cards  on  a  subject  are  filed.  The  Experiment  sta- 
tion record,  described  in  section  303,  and  the  Agricultural 
index  are  often  used  in  research  work  as  indexes  to  the  recent 
literature  issued  by  the  agricultural  experiment  stations  and 
the  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture. 

295.  A  large  reference  collection  of  popular  agricultural 
experiment  station  material  on  many  subjects  pertaining  to 
agriculture  and  home  economics   is    arranged   in    pamphlet 
boxes  in  the  Agricultural  Library  according  to  classification 
numbers;   a  convenience  when  several  bulletins  on  a  certain 
topic  are  wanted  in  a  hurry. 

A  few  of  the  current  publications  of  the  U.  S.  Depart- 
ment of  agriculture  are  listed  below. 

296.  Finch,  Vernor  Clifford  and  Baker,  0.  E.    Geogra- 
phy of  the  world's   agriculture.     Washington,    Government 
printing  office,  1917. 

Sections  on  farm  products,  including  both  crops  and  live 
stock.  Brief  text  supplemented  by  maps  and  statistical 
charts  showing  geographical  distribution. 

297.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.    Yearbook,  1894- 
date.    Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1895-date. 

Each  volume  contains  signed,  illustrated  articles  of  a 
popular  character  on  practical  agricultural  subjects,  a  report 
by  the  Secretary  of  agriculture  on  the  Department's  work 
during  the  year  and  many  agricultural  statistics. 

298.    Farmers'  bulletin,  no.l-date.    Washington, 

Government  printing  office,  1889-date. 

126 


AGRICULTURE  299-302 

Concise,  practical,  and  instructive  material  on  topics  per- 
taining to  agriculture  and  home  economics ;  e.g.  no.  1087, 
Beautifying  the  farmstead;  no.1089,  Selection  and  care  of 
clothing.  A  general  index  covering  Farmers'  bulletins  no. 
1-1000  has  been  issued. 

299. — U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.  Department  bul- 
letin, no.l-date.  Washington,  Government  printing  office, 
1913-date. 

This  series  of  popular  and  semitechnical  contributions 
from  the  bureaus,  divisions,  and  offices  of  the  Department  of 
agriculture  was  started  in  1913,  superseding  the  series  of 
bulletins  and  circulars  formerly  issued  by  the  various  bu- 
reaus, divisions,  and  offices  of  the  Department  separately. 
Department  bulletins  which  are  too  technical  to  be  of  gen- 
eral interest  are  in  a  subseries  called  "Professional  papers;" 
e.g.  no.724,  Drainage  methods  and  foundations  for  county 
roads;  no.772,  The  genera  of  grasses  of  the  United  States. 

300.     Department  circular,  no.l-date.    Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office,  1919-date. 

Brief  pamphlets  on  matters  concerning  agriculture  and 
home  economics:  e.g.  no.3,  Drying  vegetables  and  fruits  for 
home  use;  no.  66,  Organization  and  results  of  boys'  and  girls' 
club  work  (Northern  and  western  states). 

301.    Office  of  the  secretary  circular,  no.l-date. 

Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1896-date. 

These  short  pamphlets  from  the  office  of  the  Secretary  of 
agriculture  deal  with  the  work  of  the  Department  or  some 
phase  of  agriculture;  e.g.  no.  120,  Rules  and  regulations  of 
the  Secretary  of  agriculture  under  the  food  products  inspec- 
tion law  of  October  1,  1918;  no.127,  Tlie  f<  17-year  locust" 
in  1919. 

302.    Journal  of  agricultural  research,  v.l-date. 

Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1913-date. 

A  periodical  on  agricultural  science,  now  published  semi- 
monthly, containing  articles  by  scientific  workers  of  the  agri- 

127 


303-304  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

cultural  experiment  stations  and  the  Department  of  agricul- 
ture.    Too  technical  to  be  of  general  interest. 

303.  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.    Experiment  sta- 
tion record,   v.l-date.     Washington,   Government  printing 
office,  1889-date. 

A  monthly  publication,  consisting  mainly  of  abstracts  and 
reviews  of  the  world's  current  agricultural  literature.  Use- 
ful to  the  research  worker  as  an  index  to  the  material  bearing 
upon  agricultural  science  appearing  in  periodicals,  publica- 
tions of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture,  the  agricultural 
experiment  stations  of  the  world,  etc.  The  abstracts  are 
classified  under  the  following  subjects:  Agricultural  chem- 
istry— Agrotechny,  Meteorology,  Soils — Fertilizers,  Agricul- 
tural botany,  Field  crops,  Horticulture,  Forestry,  Diseases  of 
plants,  Economic  zoology — Entomology,  Foods — Human  nu- 
trition, Animal  production,  Dairy  farming — Dairying,  Vet- 
erinary medicine,  Rural  engineering,  Rural  economics,  Agri- 
cultural education,  Miscellaneous.  Minute  table  of  contents 
in  each  number;  index  of  names,  and  index  of  subjects  in 
each  volume.  Separate  indexes  for  v.1-12,  and  v.13-25.  Cir- 
cular 62  of  the  Experiment  stations  office  of  the  U.  S.  De- 
partment of  agriculture  is  a  list  of  abbreviations  used  for 
publications  reviewed  in  the  Experiment  station  record  with 
the  names  of  the  publications  in  full. 

304.  The  following  lists  are  convenient  guides  for  order- 
ing personal  copies  of  the  Department's  publications. 

U.  S.  Department  of  agriculture.  Monthly  list  of  pub- 
lications of  the  Department  of  agriculture.  Washington, 
Government  printing  office. 

This  is  sent  regularly  to  all  who  request  it.  Many  of  the 
publications  entered  may  be  obtained  free  from  the  Depart- 
ment of  agriculture. 

U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price  lists.  Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office. 

No.  16,  Farmers'  bulletins,  Department  bulletins,  Year- 
books, Journal  of  agricultural  research. 

128 


AGRICULTURE  304 

No.  38,  Animal  industry. 

No.  39,  Birds  and  wild  animals. 

No.  40,  Agricultural  chemistry. 

No.  41,  Insects. 

No.  42,  Agricultural     experiment     stations,    irrigation, 
drainage. 

No.  43,  Forestry. 

No.  44,  Plants. 

No.  46,  Soils  and  fertilizers. 

No.  68,  Farm  management. 


129 


305-307 

CHAPTER  XXV 
HOME  ECONOMICS 

305.  For  the  lack  of  a  cyclopedia  of  home  economics,  it 
is  necessary  for  the  student  of  this  subject  to  supplement  her 
textbooks  and  treatises  by  reference  books  which  were  pre- 
pared with  a  view  to  satisfying  the  needs  of  specialists    in 
other  fields  than  her  own.    She  will  find  material  of  interest 
and  value,  especially  on  the  chemical  and  physiological  side 
of  the  subject,  in  the  Experiment  Station  Record  and  the 
Farmers'  Bulletins  (see  sections  303  and  298).     The  refer- 
ence collection  of  pamphlets  in  the  Agricultural  Library  also 
includes  subjects  in  home  economics  (see  section  295).     The 
Industrial  Arts  Index  (see  section  103)  may  be  used  to  find 
magazine  articles  and  bulletins  on  electric  equipment  and 
textiles  and  the  Agricultural  Index,  (see  section  293)  on  foods 
and  their  marketing,  canning  and  preserving.    The  following 
reference  books,  chiefly  on  foods,  textiles  and  clothing,  con- 
tain material  not  likely  to  be  found  in  so  complete  or  con- 
venient a  form  either  in  general  encyclopedias  or  in  home 
economics  textbooks. 

306.  Lyford,  Carrie  Alberta.    Bibliography  of  home  eco- 
nomics. Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1919.    (U.  S. 
Bureau  of  education.    Bulletin,  1919,  no.46.) 

As  nearly  complete  a  bibliography  as  possible  of  subjects 
in  and  connected  with  home  economics.  Gives  authors,  titles, 
publishers,  place,  and  date  of  publication,  number  of  pages, 
and  price  for  each  book  or  pamphlet.  Classified  arrangement. 

307.  Hopkins,  Albert  Allis,  ed.    The  Scientific  American 
cyclopedia  of  formulas.    N.  Y.    Munn,  c!910. 

Fifteen  thousand  formulas  compiled  from  Scientific  Amer- 
ican and  drug  and  technical  journals.  Alphabetical  arrange- 
ment of  chapters  on  such  broad  subjects  as  Cleansing  and 
bleaching,  Glass,  Photography,  Preserving  and  canning.  In- 
dividual chapters  are  either  arranged  alphabetically  or  have 
an  outline  of  the  contents  at  their  beginning.  The  minute 

130 


HOME  ECONOMICS  308-311 

index  should  be  used  in  looking  up  formulas  for  a  definite 
object.  Appendix  contains  miscellaneous  formulas,  chemical 
manipulations,  and  tables  of  weights  and  measures. 

CLOTHING  AND  TEXTILES 

308.  Harmuth,  Louis.     Dictionary  of   textiles.      N.  Y. 
Fairchild,  1915. 

Definitions  of  terms  "  relating  to  textiles  from  the  fibres 
to  the  finished  fabrics  and  everything  which  goes  into  them 
in  the  course  of  the  manufacture."  Preface.  Includes  obso- 
lete fabrics  and  textiles  found  in  use  in  every  country,  with 
special  emphasis  on  French,  English,  and  German.  Bibliog- 
raphy follows  Preface.  Addenda  at  the  end  contain  chiefly 
Japanese  and  Philippine  terms. 

309.  Costume  books  are  of  use,  not  only  to  students  of 
the  history  of  dress,  but  also  to  anyone  interested  in  staging 
historical  plays  or  pageants  or  in  fancy  dress  for  social  af- 
fairs.    Books  of  smaller  size  similar  to  the  reference  books 
listed  below  may  be  found  by  looking  in  the  card  catalog 
under  the  headings:    Costume,  Dress.     Illustrations  of  cos- 
tume are  also  often  found  in  books  of  travel  and  in  the  Na- 
tional Geographic  Magazine. 

310.  Planche,  James  Robinson.    Cyclopaedia  of  costume. 
London,  Chatto,  1876-79.     2v. 

V.  1  is  a  dictionary  of  costume,  giving  definitions,  de- 
scriptions, and  illustrations  of  parts  of  dress  and  armor  of 
different  periods.  V.  2.  is  a  history  of  costume  in  Europe 
from  53  B.C.  through  the  eighteenth  century.  Well  illus- 
trated. Index  to  both  volumes  at  the  end  of  v.  2. 

311.  Kretschmer,  Albert.     Die  trachten  der  volker . . . 
mit  text  von  Carl  Rohrbach.  3.  aufl.  Leipzig,  Schumann,  1906. 

First  half  of  book  is  a  history  of  costume  from  the  early 
Egyptians  to  modern  times;  second  half  is  a  series  of  colored 
illustrations  of  costumes  of  all  nations  and  times.  Text  is 
in  German. 

131 


312-315  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

312.  Racinet,  Albert  Charles  Auguste.    Le  costume  his- 
torique.     Paris,  Firmin-Didot,  1888.     6v. 

Five  hundred  plates  showing  costumes  and  other  personal 
effects  of  people  of  all  times  and  countries,  and  also  interior 
scenes  in  ancient  and  medieval  homes.  A  descriptive  article 
accompanies  each  plate.  V.  1  contains  analytical  contents  of 
the  work,  a  geographical  and  ethnological  index,  a  glossary,  a 
bibliography  of  costume,  and  other  miscellaneous  material  on 
the  subject.  Text  is  in  French.  A  card  index  in  English  to 
the  illustrations  is  kept  at  the  Reference  Desk. 

313.  Pauquet  freres.    Modes  et   costumes   historiques. 
Paris,  Bureau  des  modes  et  costumes  historiques,  n.d. 

No  text.  The  book  consists  of  ninety-six  plates  in  color, 
illustrating  French  costume  from  the  fifth  to  the  nineteenth 
century. 

FOODS  AND  BEVERAGES 

314.  Wiley,  Harvey  Washington.    1001  tests  of  foods, 
beverages,  and  toilet  accessories,  good  and  otherwise.    Rev.  ed. 
N.  Y.  Hearst,  1916. 

Brief  notes  of  the  results  of  chemical  and  microscopic  tests 
made  in  the  laboratories  of  Good  Housekeeping  1912-13.  The 
appendix  adds  tests  in  the  Lederle  Laboratories  1914-15. 
Products  examined  were  those  in  the  open  market  "having 
a  general  sale  and  presumably  of  the  best  quality.  "  Tests 
were  made  for  injurious  ingredients,  misleading  labels,  and 
quality  in  general.  Three  ratings  made,  as  explained  at  the 
end  of  the  introductory  section.  Classified  arrangement  with 
alphabetical  index  of  trade  names. 

315.  Ward,  Artemas,  comp.    Encyclopedia  of  foods  and 
beverages;   the   grocer's   encyclopedia.    N.   Y.     [Kempster] 


Information,  popular  rather  than  scientific,  not  only  on 
foods  and  beverages,  but  also  on  other  articles  handled  by 
grocers  and  on  food  values  and  the  care  of  food.  Description 
of  each  article  generally  includes  place,  season,  and  method 


132 


HOME  ECONOMICS  316 

of  production,  storage  care  and  preparation  for  the  table. 
Many  illustrations,  including  colored  plates.  Arranged  alpha- 
betically. Appendix  contains  dictionary  of  food  names  in 
English,  French,  German,  Italian  and  Swedish,  culinary  and 
bill-of-fare  terms,  and  tables  of  weights  and  measures. 

316.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price  lists. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  11,  Foods  and  cooking. 

No.  40,  Chemistry  of  food  and  drugs,  adulterations,  and 
preservatives. 


133 


317-320 

CHAPTER  XXVI 
ENGINEERING 

317.  The  chief  sources  of  information  on  engineering  are 
the  cyclopedias,  handbooks,  and  textbooks  of  engineering  sup- 
plemented by  the  technical  journals  and  the  publications  of 
engineering  societies.    The  Engineering  Library  contains  two 
classified    collections    of    technical   manufacturers'    catalogs. 
One,  called  Catalogue  studies,  has  an  alphabetical  index  in 
pamphlet  form ;  the  other  has  an  alphabetical  index  on  cards. 

318.  Cyclopedia  of  engineering*;     a    general   reference 
work.      Editor-in-chief:     Louis    Derr.      Chicago,    American 
technical  society,  c!915.     7v. 

Condensed  treatises  on  the  different  branches  of  mechan- 
ical and  electrical  engineering.  The  names  of  the  authors  of 
the  treatises  are  given  in  the  table  of  contents  in  each  vol- 
ume. Separate  indexes  in  v.1-6 ;  general  index  to  the  set  in 
v.7. 

319.  Cyclopedia  of  civil  engineering;    a  general  refer- 
ence work.     Chicago,  American  technical  society,  c!916.     9v. 

Concise  treatises  on  the  various  divisions  of  civil  engineer- 
ing. Use  the  table  of  contents  in  each  volume  to  find  the 
names  of  the  authors  of  the  treatises.  Separate  indexes  in 
v.1-8 ;  general  index  to  the  set  in  v.9. 

320.  International  library  of  technology;    a    series   of 
text-books.     Scranton,  International  textbook  co.     c!901,  v.l. 

' '  The  volumes . . .  are  made  up  of  instruction  papers,  or 
sections,  comprising  the  various  courses  of  instruction  for  stu- 
dents of  the  International  correspondence  schools."  Preface, 
v.  152.  The  series  is  not  limited  to  engineering  but  includes 
volumes  on  the  other  industrial  arts,  also  related  subjects, 
such  as  Banks  and  banking,  History  of  architecture,  Princi- 
ples of  law,  Advertising,  etc.  Many  illustrations.  An  index 
in  each  volume  refers  to  both  sections  and  pages. 


134 


ENGINEERING  321-323 

321.  Modern  shop  practice;    a  general  reference  work. 
Editor-in-chief;    H.  M.  Raymond.     Chicago,  American  tech- 
nical society,  1916.     6v. 

"  Practical  treatises  on  the  various  shop  subjects  have 
been  supplied  by  well-known  teachers  and  practical  men." 
Foreword,  v.l.  The  table  of  contents  in  each  volume  gives 
the  names  of  the  authors  of  the  treatises  included.  Separate 
indexes  in  v.1-5 ;  general  index  to  the  set  in  v.6. 

322.  Machinery's  encyclopedia;   a  work  of  reference. . . 
comp.  and  ed.  by  Erik  Oberg  and  F.  D.  Jones. .  .in  collabora- 
tion with  many  prominent  mechanical  and  electrical  engi- 
neers.   N.  Y.   Industrial  press,  1917.    7v. 

"Deals  with  practical  mathematics  and  mechanics; 
strength  of  materials;  design  of  machine  details;  machine 
tools  and  machine  shop  practice;  heat-treatment  of  iron  and 
steel ;  forge  shop,  pattern  shop,  and  foundry  practice ;  metal- 
lurgy of ...  the  more  important .  . .  metals .  . .  including  very 
complete  treatises  on  electrical  machinery,  gas  engines,  hy- 
draulic turbines,  steam  engines  and  turbines,  boilers  and 
accessories,  pumps,  air  compressors,  etc. "...  Editors '  preface, 
v.l.  Some  of  the  articles  are  signed  by  initials  explained  in 
the  front  of  v.l.  Arranged  alphabetically.  Use  the  general 
index  in  v.7  to  find  all  the  information  on  a  certain  subject 
in  the  encyclopedia.  It  refers  not  only  to  the  page,  but  also 
to  that  section  of  the  page  where  the  information  will  be 
found;  e.g.  IV,  285-3.  This  means  that  the  reference  is  in 
v.4,  p.  285,  upper  right  hand  corner. 

323.  Automobile  engineering:  a  general  reference  work 
.  . .  covering  the  construction,  care,  and  repair    of    pleasure 
cars,  commercial  cars,  and  motorcycles  with  especial  atten- 
tion to  ignition,  starting,  and  lighting  systems,  garage  design 
and  equipment,  welding  and  other  repair  methods.    Chicago, 
American  technical  society,  1917.     5v. 

Treatises  by  automobile  experts  whose  names  are  given  in 
the  table  of  contents  in  each  volume.  Separate  indexes  in 
v.1-4 ;  glossary  and  general  index  to  the  set  in  v.5.  (A  later 
edition  is  announced). 

135 


324  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

HANDBOOKS 

324.  The  handbooks  on  the  various  engineering  special- 
ities are  small,  conveniently  arranged  volumes  which  include 
rules,  formulae,  and  other  concise  material,  sometimes  difficult 
to  find  elsewhere.  Below  are  listed  a  few  of  the  more  im- 
portant ones. 

Marks,  Lionel  Simeon,  ed.  Mechanical  engineers'  hand- 
book. N.  Y.  McGraw,  1916. 

Kent,  William.  Mechanical  engineers'  pocket-book.  9th 
ed.  thoroughly  rev.  with  the  assistance  of  R.  T.  Kent.  N.  Y. 
Wiley,  1916. 

Machinery's  handbook  for  machine  shop  and  drafting 
room.  N.  Y.  Industrial  press,  1914. 

Gillette,  Halbert  Powers  and  Dana,  R.  T.  Handbook  of 
mechanical  and  electrical  cost  data.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1918. 

Standard  handbook  for  electrical  engineers.  F.  F.  Fowle ; 
editor-in-chief.  4th  ed.  rewritten  and  greatly  enl.  N.  Y. 
McGraw,  1915. 

Trautwine,  John  Cresson.  Civil  engineer's  pocket-book. . . 
rev.  by  J.  C.  Trautwine,  jr.,  and  J.  C.  Trautwine,  3d.  20th 
ed.  Philadelphia,  Trautwine,  1919. 

Merriam,  Mansfield,  ed.  American  civil  engineers'  hand- 
book. 4th  ed.  thoroughly  rev.  and  enl.  N.  Y.  Wiley,  1920. 

Gillette,  Halbert  Powers.  Handbook  of  cost  data  for  con- 
tractors and  engineers.  2d.  ed.  Chicago,  Clark,  1910. 

Ketchum,  Milo  Smith.  Structural  engineers'  handbook; 
data  for  the  design  and  construction  of  steel  bridges  and 
buildings.  2d  ed.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1916. 

Hool,  George  Albert  and  others.  Concrete  engineers' 
handbook,  data  for  the  design  and  construction  of  plain  and 
reinforced  concrete  structures.  N.  Y.  McGraw,  1918. 

Blanchard,  Arthur  Horace.  American  highway  engineers ' 
handbook.  N.  Y.  Wiley,  1919. 

Peele,  Robert,  ed.  Mining  engineers'  handbook.  N.  Y. 
Wiley,  1918. 


136 


ENGINEERING  325-327 

INDEXES  TO  ENGINEERING  PERIODICALS  AND  U.   S. 
GOVERNMENT   PUBLICATIONS 

325.  Industrial  arts  index,  1913-date.     N.    Y.    Wilson, 
1914-date.    For  description  see  section  103. 

326.  Engineering  index  annual,  1906-date.    N.  Y.  Engi- 
neering magazine,  1907-18,  American  society  of  mechanical 
engineers,  1919-date. 

Indexes  foreign  as  well  as  American  technical  journals 
and  publications  of  engineering  societies.  Arranged  by  sub- 
jects in  broad  divisions,  such  as  Civil  engineering,  Electrical 
engineering,  Mechanical  engineering,  etc.  The  divisions  are 
divided  into  sections  arranged  in  alphabetical  order ;  e.g.  Civil 
engineering — Bridges,  Civil* engineering — Construction.  The 
sections  are  subdivided  into  many  subheadings,  also  arranged 
alphabetically,  and  under  these  subheadings  the  references 
are  listed.  Information  given  with  each  reference:  title, 
author's  name  if  known,  brief  summary  of  the  article,  name 
of  the  publication  abbreviated,  volume,  inclusive  page  ref- 
erence, exact  date,  and  beginning  with  1919,  the  number  of 
figures  in  the  article.  Before  1919  the  number  of  words  in 
the  article  was  given  instead  of  the  volume  and  inclusive 
page  reference.  The  Engineering  index  annual  is  compiled 
from  the  Engineering  index,  published  monthly. 

327.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.     Price  lists. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

No.  18,  Engineering  and  surveying. 

No.  58,  Mines. 

No.  64,  Standards  of  weight  and  measure. 


137 


328-332 

CHAPTER  XXVII 
COMMERCE  AND  GENERAL  BUSINESS 

328.  American  school  of  correspondence,  Chicago.    Cy- 
clopedia of  commerce,  accountancy,  business  administration; 
prepared  by  a  corps  of  auditors,  accountants,  attorneys,  and 
specialists  in  business  methods  and  management.     Chicago, 
Amer.  school  of  correspondence,  c!909-12.     lOv. 

329.  Chisholm,  George  Goudie.    Handbook  of  commer- 
cial geography.     8th  ed.     London,  Longmans,  1918. 

For  various  commodities  such  as  wheat,  potatoes,  wool, 
rice,  spices,  furs,  coal,  copper,  paper,  glass,  soap,  etc.  gives 
the  conditions  or  history  of  their  production  and  the  locali- 
ties where  the  greatest  amount  of  each  is  produced.  Also 
takes  up  the  various  countries  and  their  products.  Trade 
routes  of  the  world  are  especially  treated.  Appendix  gives 
statistical  tables.  Index. 

330.  Freeman,  William  George  and  Chandler,  S.  E.  The 

world's  commercial  products.     Boston,  Ginn,  1908. 

Treats  in  separate  chapters  the  various  products  of  the 
plant  world  that  are  of  commercial  importance.  Index. 

331.  Bartholomew,    John    George,    ed.      Atlas    of   the 
world 's  commerce ;  a  new  series  of  maps  with  descriptive  text 
and  diagrams  showing  products,  imports,  exports,  commer- 
cial conditions  and  economic  statistics  of  the  countries  of  the 
world.     London,  Newnes,  [1907]. 

332.  U.   S. — Foreign  and  domestic  commerce  bureau. 

Commerce  reports.    Washington,  Government  printing  office, 
1910-date. 

Supplement. 

Daily  except  Sundays  and  holidays.  "This  live  daily 
commercial  reporter  contains  important  commercial  facts  and 
reports  of  business  conditions  gathered  by  the  American  con- 
sular officers  and  commercial  agents  of  the  Government 


138 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  333-336 

throughout  the  world.  Supplemental  issues  will  appear  from 
time  to  time,  which  will  be  devoted  to  reviewing  trade,  in- 
dustrial, and  general  conditions  in  the  respective  districts  of 
the  United  States  consular  officers."  Monthly  catalogue  of 
United  States  public  documents. 

333.     Foreign  commerce  and  navigation  of  the 

U.  S.,  1911/12-1918.  Washington,  Government  printing  office, 
1912-19. 

Each  volume  gives  detailed  statistics  for  the  period  cov- 
ered of  the  commerce  of  the  U.  S.  and  her  insular  possessions, 
with  comparative  statements  and  statistics  for  the  five-year 
period  just  preceding.  Series — with  slightly  different  title 
and  issuing  office — extends  back  to  1837. 

334.  Exporters'  encyclopaedia,  1904-date.     Containing 
full  and  authentic  information  relative  to  shipments  for  every 
country  in  the  world.  N.  Y.  Exporters'  encyc.  co.,  c!904-date. 

Published  annually.  Arranged  alphabetically  by  country. 
For  each  country  gives  brief  note  as  to  area,  population, 
commerce,  products,  etc.,  statistics  of  import  and  export, 
points  for  which  through  bills  of  lading  are  issued,  consular 
charges  or  regulations,  shipping  routes  from  New  York,  etc. 
Shipping  routes  from  Philadelphia,  Boston,  Baltimore,  New- 
port News,  Norfolk,  Savannah,  Mobile,  New  Orleans,  Galves- 
ton,  San  Francisco,  Seattle,  Tacoma,  Vancouver,  etc.,  are 
given  separately.  Much  miscellaneous  material  of  interest  to 
the  exporter. 

335.  "Shipping  world"  yearbook:    a    desk  manual  in 
trade,     commerce,     and    navigation.      London,     "Shipping 
World,"  1887-date. 

Published  annually.  Gives  a  port  directory  and  tariffs  for 
the  various  countries  of  the  world.  Map  showing  trade  routes 
is  in  pocket  on  back  cover  of  book. 

336.  Hendricks'   Commercial  register  of    the    United 
States  for  buyers  and  sellers.    N.  Y.  Hendricks,  c!890-date. 


139 


337-339  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Especially  devoted  to  the  interests  of  the  architectural, 
contracting,  electrical,  engineering,  hardware,  iron,  mechan- 
ical, mill,  mining,  quarrying,  railroad,  steel  and  kindred  in- 
dustries. The  greater  part  of  this  work  consists  of  a  list  of 
manufacturers  classified  by  articles  manufactured,  the  ar- 
rangement under  each  heading  being  alphabetical  under  the 
firm's  name.  Trade  names  listed  in  the  back  of  the  book; 
an  alphabetical  index  in  the  front. 

337.  Thomas'  Register  of  American  manufacturers.  Ed. 

10.    N.  Y.    Thomas,  c!919. 

The  main  part  of  this  work  consists  of  a  list  of  manu- 
facturers classified  by  articles  manufactured,  the  arrangement 
under  each  article  being  geographical  by  state  and  city.  Ad- 
dresses and  financial  ratings  are  given.  The  remainder  of 
the  book  includes  manufacturing  firms  arranged  by  names — 
with  officers  of  companies  and  location  of  branches — ,  a  list 
of  trade  names,  an  international  trade  section  giving  export- 
ers and  importers,  and  a  list  of  forwarders  or  concerns  es- 
pecially well  equipped  to  promote  and  handle  business  be- 
tween manufacturers  and  others  in  the  U.  S.  and  abroad. 
Before  attempting  to  use  this  book  it  is  well  to  read  the  ' '  In- 
structions for  the  use  of  this  work"  printed  on  the  inside  of 
the  front  cover. 

338.  Rand-McNally  Bankers'  directory  and  list  of  at- 
torneys; the  original  " Bankers'  Blue  Book."  Chicago,  Rand, 
c!876-date. 

Two  editions  each  year,  in  January  and  July.  Lists  banks 
in  the  U.  S.,  Canada,  and  Mexico,  giving  for  each  the  year 
established,  the  names  of  officers,  financial  statement,  etc. 
Contains  other  miscellaneous  related  material  such  as  na- 
tional bank  examiners  and  districts,  values  of  foreign  coins, 
clearing  houses  in  the  U.  S.  and  Canada,  towns  accessible  to 
banking  points,  banking  and  commercial  laws,  maps,  etc. 

339.  Poor's   manual   of   industrials,   1910-date.    N.  Y. 
Poor,  c!910-date, 

140 


COMMERCE  AND  BUSINESS  340-344 

Issued  annually.  Since  1913  includes  only  manufactur- 
ing, mining  and  miscellaneous  companies.  Gives — as  do  the 
four  following  titles — for  each  of  the  companies  included, 
such  information  as  brief  history,  capital  stock,  names  of 
officers,  income  account,  balance  sheet,  etc.  General  index 
of  companies  including  merged  companies. 

340.  Poor's  manual  of  public  utilities,  street  railway, 
gas,  electric,  water,  power,  telephone  and  telegraph  compan- 
ies, 1913-date.    N.  Y.   Poor,  c!913-date. 

Annual.  Formerly  included  in  Poor's  Manual  of  indus- 
trials. Merged  companies  may  be  found  through  the  index. 

341.  Poor's  manual  of  the  railroads  of  the  United  States, 
1868/69-date.    N.  Y.    Poor,  1868-date. 

Annual.     Merged  companies  listed  in  a  separate  index. 

342.  Moody 's  manual  of  railroads  and  corporation  se- 
curities, 1900-date.    N.  Y.   Moody,  1900-date. 

Annual.  Title  has  varied  slightly.  General  index  (in- 
cluding merged  companies). 

343.  Moody's  analyses  of  investments,  1909-date.    N.  Y. 
Moody 's  investor's  service,  1909-date. 

Annual.  Continues  Moody's  analyses  of  railroad  invest- 
ments. 

344.  Official  guide  of  the  railways  and  steam  navigation 
lines  of  the  United  States,  Porto  Rico,  Canada,  Mexico  and 
Cuba,  also  time  tables  of  railroads  in  Central  America.    N.  Y. 
National  railway  pub.  co.,  1905-date. 

Monthly  numbers.  Gives  a  list  of  officials,  schedules  and 
usually  a  map  for  each  company.  An  index  of  railroads  and 
steamship  lines  is  given  in  the  front  of  each  number.  In  the 
back  there  is  an  index  of  points  reached  by  water  routes  and 
a  general  index  of  stations  indicating  what  railroads  run  into 
a  town  (with  the  number  of  the  company's  time  table  to  be 
consulted)  and  the  relative  location  of  the  stations  if  there 
is  more  than  one  railroad  in  the  town. 

141 


345-347  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

345.  U.  S.  Interstate  commerce  commission.     Annual 
report  on  the  statistics  of  railways  in  the  United  States, 
1887/88-date.  Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1887- 
date. 

346.  A  valuable  source  of  information  for  the  business 
man  is  the  city  directory,  not  only  the  directory  of  his  own 
city,  but  of  other  large  cities  of  the  country  and  of  the  towns 
with  which  his  business  brings  him  in  contact.    These  usually 
contain,  in  addition  to  the  alphabetical  list  of  residents,  a  list 
classified  according  to  business  or  profession.    The  directories 
of  Chicago,  New  York,  St.  Louis,  Washington  and  towns  of 
Illinois  such  as  Springfield,  Peoria,  Champalgn-Urbana,  Dan- 
ville, Decatur,  etc.  are  typical  directories  and  may  be  found 
in  the  Reference  Room. 

There  are  also  directories  published  listing  people  of  a 
certain  profession  or  trade.  Business  men  are  often  inter- 
ested in  those  which  cover  their  own  and  related  fields. 

347.  Business  digest  and  investment  weekly,  Sept.  30, 
1918-date.    N.  Y.    Arrow  publishing  corp.     1918-date. 

Weekly.  Formed  -by  the  combination  of  Business  digest 
and  Investment  weekly.  Gives  editorial  comments  and  short 
articles  under  such  divisions  as  Advertising  and  selling,  Man- 
ufacturing and  industrial  management,  Foreign  trade,  Bank- 
ing and  finance,  and  Investment  market.  In  the  section 
"Week's  business  digest"  articles  of  special  interest  to  busi- 
ness men  are  listed  under  subjects  alphabetically  with  an 
indication  of  the  number  of  words  in  the  article  and  a  short 
summary  of  the  article. 


148 


348-351 

CHAPTER  XXVin 
EDUCATION 

348.  Although  there  is  some  reference    material   to   be 
found  on  education  in  general  encyclopedias,  religious  cy- 
clopedias, Cyclopedia  of  American  government,  Larned,  His- 
tory for  ready  reference,  and  Bailey,  Cyclopedia  of  Ameri- 
can agriculture,  more  information  is  given  in    the    special 
cyclopedia  of  education  and  the  directories  and  government 
publications  listed  below. 

349.  Monroe,  Paul,  ed.    Cyclopedia  of  education.    N.  Y. 
Macmillan,  1911-13.     5v. 

A  comprehensive  work  by  authorities  on  education  as  an 
art  and  a  science,  including  also  biography  of  educators,  de- 
scriptions of  higher  institutions  of  learning,  and  the  history 
and  present  systems  of  education  in  different  countries,  states, 
and  cities.  Articles  are  signed  by  initials  and  completed  by 
excellent  bibliographies.  A  few  illustrations.  Alphabetical 
arrangement.  Analytical  indexes  in  v.5  group  the  articles 
in  their  logical  relations. 

350.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  education.    Annual  report,  1867-68, 
1870-date.     Washington,   Government  printing  office,   1867- 
date. 

Two  volumes  for  each  year:  the  first  containing  articles 
on  educational  topics  of  current  interest,  laws,  and  informa- 
tion concerning  education  in  the  various  states  and  countries ; 
the  second  consisting  of  statistics  of  schools  and  colleges  in 
the  United  States.  Index  in  each  volume  and  general  index 
for  1867-1907. 

351.    Bulletin,  1906-date.    Washington,  Govern- 
ment printing  office,  1906-date. 

Issued  irregularly,  usually  about  fifty  a  year.  Each  num- 
ber is  on  a  separate  topic  of  current  educational  interest, 
such  as  the  honor  system,  vocational  education,  Gary  school 
system,  etc. 

143 


352-355  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OP  LIBRARIES 

352.  U.  S.  Bureau  of  education.     Educational  directory, 
1912-date.     Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1912- 
date. 

Issued  as  one  of  the  Bulletins  each  year.  Directory  for 
1919-20  is  in  seven  parts :  Government  educational  activities, 
Public-school  systems,  Higher  education  and  Training  of 
teachers,  Special  schools,  Summer-school  directors,  Museums 
and  libraries,  Miscellaneous  educational  organizations. 

353.    Library.    Monthly  record  of  current  edu- 
cational publications,   1912-date.     Washington,   Government 
printing  office,  1912-date. 

Lists  books  and  articles  on  educational  subjects  appearing 
in  periodicals,  government  and  society  publications.  Ar- 
ranged under  broad  subjects.  Author  and  subject  index  for 
each  annual  volume. 

354.  Illinois.    Department  of  public  instruction.  Illinois 
school  directory,   1905-date.     Springfield,   State  of  Illinois, 

1905-date. 

\ 

Published  annually.  Personnel  of  the  state  department 
of  public  instruction,  county  superintendents  of  schools,  list 
of  all  graded  schools  in  Illinois,  with  names  of  superintend- 
ents and  principals,  faculties  of  Illinois  state  normal  schools, 
officers  of  Illinois  state  teachers'  association. 

355.  Patterson's  American  educational  directory,  comp. 
and  ed.  by  H.  L.  Patterson.    Chicago,  American  educational 
co.  1903-date. 

Published  annually.  First  part  of  book  is  a  geographical 
list,  by  state  and  city,  of  public  school  officials  and  "all 
schools  and  colleges,  together  with  information  as  to  the  kind 
of  school,  class  of  students  admitted,  religious  denomination, 
year  established,  and  the  name  of  the  head  of  the  institu- 
tion." Introduction.  Following  this  are  a  list  of  schools 
arranged  according  to  the  kind  of  school;  e.g.  law  schools; 
a  geographical  list  of  libraries;  an  alphabetical  list  of  col- 
lege colors;  and  an  alphabetical  "index"  of  schools,  giving 
simply  their  location. 

144 


EDUCATION  356-357 

356.  Baird,  William  Raimond.    Baird  's  manual  of  Amer- 
ican college  fraternities.    9th  ed.   N.  Y.   J.  T.  Brown,  1920. 

Introductory  section  on  origin,  progress,  manners,  cus- 
toms, and  peculiar  features  of  Greek-letter  fraternities.  Main 
part  consists  of  histories  of  separate  fraternities,  with  pic- 
tures of  their  badges,  list  of  chapters,  and  famous  alumni 
members.  Includes  men's  fraternities,  women's  fraternities, 
professional,  honorary,  local,  and  inactive  fraternities.  Bib- 
liography, statistics,  and  directory  of  colleges  and  chapters. 
Alphabetical  index  of  fraternities. 

357.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Price  list,  no. 
31.    Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

List  of  documents  for  sale  by  superintendent  of  docu- 
ments on  education,  including  agricultural  and  vocational 
education,  and  libraries. 


145 


358-359 

CHAPTER  XXIX 
UNITED  STATES  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS 

358.  ' '  The  government  of  the  United  States  is  the  great- 
est of  all  modern  publishers.     It  employs  thousands  of  sci- 
entists, who  are  engaged  the  year  round  in  making  researches 
and  investigations  in  all  branches  of  agriculture  and  house- 
hold economy,  in  geology,  in  mining,  in  electricity,  in  chem- 
istry, in  astronomy,  in  engineering,  in  aviation,  in  preventive 
medicine,  in  forestry,  in  irrigation,  in  shipping  and  railroad 
problems,  in  trade  and  manufactures.     The  arts  of  war  as 
well  as  those  of  peace  are  also  actively  cultivated.    The  great- 
est art  of  all,  that  of  maintaining  and  spreading  free  govern- 
ment, is  strenuously  carried  on  by  President,  Cabinet,  Sen- 
ators, Eepresentatives,  Army,  and  Navy. 

"The  results  of  all  these  activities  of  the  most  compre- 
hensive and  effective  organization  ever  known  are  constantly 
reduced  to  print  and  poured  out  in  an  incessant  flood  from 
the  Government  Printing  Office  at  Washington,  the  largest 
printing  plant  in  the  world. 

"The  greater  number  of  these  public  documents  are  sold 
by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  located  in  the  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office.  The  Government  did  not  establish  this 
sales  office  for  purposes  of  profit,  but  as  a  public  convenience. 
The  prices  charged  cover  only  paper  and  printing,  no  charge 
being  made  for  the  services  of  the  statesmen  and  scientists 
who  are  the  authors  of  the  various  books,  pamphlets,  period- 
icals, and  maps,  nor  are  commissions  allowed  for  their  sale. 
The  documents  have  the  freedom  of  the  mails  and  are  sent 
without  postage. "  U.S.  Superintendent  of  documents.  Price 
list. 

Useful  keys  to  the  departments  of  the  government  and 
their  publications  are  the  following: 

359.  Swanton,  Walter  I.  comp.     Guide  to  United  States 
government  publications.    Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1918.  (U.  S.  Bureau  of  education.  Bulletin,  1918,  No.  2.) 


146 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS  360-362 

"This  Bulletin  is  divided  into  11  parts,  one  for  each  of 
the  10  executive  departments  of  the  Government  and  one  part 
for  the  miscellaneous  important  independent  bureaus  and 
commissions.  Each  part  is  divided  into  sections,  one  for  each 
of  the  bureaus  under  the  department  considered,  and  the  de- 
scription is 'given  in  most  instances  in  the  following  order: 
Principal  administrative  officials,  general  information  and 
duties,  general  publications,  method  of  distribution  of  gen- 
eral publications,  annual  and  other  periodical  publications, 
lists,  indexes,  mailing  lists,  maps,  and  correspondence.  At 
the  beginning  of  each  part  is  a  brief  description  of  the  de- 
partment considered."  Introduction.  A  chart  following  the 
title  page  shows  the  relations  between  departments,  bureaus, 
divisions,  etc.  The  appendix  contains  various  lists  and  a 
directory  of  executive  departments  and  bureaus.  Index  at 
the  end. 

360.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Monthly  cata- 
logue United  States  public  documents,  1895-date.    Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office,  1895-date. 

Arranged  by  departments  alphabetically.  Gives  price  of 
documents  or  indicates  by  symbols  those  which  are  free  or 
unobtainable.  Twelve  monthly  numbers  form  a  volume  end- 
ing with  the  June  number.  Minute  author  and  subject  in- 
dex for  each  volume. 

361.     Price    lists    of    government    publications. 

Washington,  Government  printing  office. 

Lists  of  government  publications  on  various  subjects ;  e.g. 
Army,  Eoads,  Fishes,  Government  periodicals,  with  prices  of 
each.  Each  subject  forms  a  separate  pamphlet  bibliography. 

362.  A  very  large  proportion  of  the  United  States  docu- 
ments is  received  by  the  University  of  Illinois  Library.  Many 
of  them  are  classified  and  cataloged  like  other  books  (see  sec- 
tion 57)  and  some  of  these  have  been  listed  in  preceding  chap- 
ters on  Sociology,  Geography,  Education,  Science,  Agricul- 
ture, etc.    Others  are  shelved  in  one  collection  known  as  the 

147 


363-364  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Congressional  Documents  or  Serial  Set,  and  like  periodicals 
require  special  indexes  to  unlock  their  contents. 

363.  The  Congressional  Documents  and  Serial  Number. 
— The  publications  authorized  printed  by  Congress  include 
the  Journals,  which  are  the  bare  minutes  of  the  proceedings 
of  Congress;    Keports  of  the  committees  of -the  Senate  and 
House   of   Representatives;    Documents,   which  are   papers 
originating  chiefly  in  the  departments  of  the  federal  govern- 
ment outside  of  Congress;    and  the    Congressional    Record, 
which  is  the  daily  verbatim  report  of  all  that  is  spoken  in 
Congress.    All  except  the  last  are  published  in  a  series  called 
the  Congressional  Edition  or  Serial  Set.    The  volumes  of  this 
set  are  arranged  in  groups,  first,  according  to  Congress  and 
Session16  then  by  Senate  or  House,  and  finally  according  to 
Reports  or  Documents.     Beginning  with  the  15th  Congress, 
Dec.  1,  1817,  a  separate  number  has  been  assigned  to  each 
volume,  so  that  the  volumes    are    numbered    consecutively 
throughout  the  set  from  the  above  date  to  the  present  time, 
no.  1  being  the  first  volume  of  the  publications  of  the  15th 
Congress  and  no.  6897  being  the  number  of  the  first  volume 
of  the  64th  Congress  in  1915.     These  numbers  are  known 
as  "serial  numbers,"  and  as  the  Congressional  Edition  is 
shelved  according  to  them,  any  volume  wanted  from  the  set 
must  be  called  for  at  the  Loan  Desk  by  its  serial  number. 
The  serial  number  must  not  be  confused  with  the  document 
or  report  number  or  the  volume  number,  which  may  be  du- 
plicated many  times  over  in  the  different  Congresses.     The 
serial  number  may  be  determined  by  the  use  of  the  Indexes 
to  the  U.  S.  public  documents. 

364.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Checklist  of 
United  States  public  documents,  1789-1909,  v.l.     Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office,  1911. 

Checklist  to  the  Congressional  edition,  p.  3-169,  is  ar- 
ranged 1st  by  Congress,  2d  by  session,  3d  by  classes  (Senate 
or  House  reports  or  documents)  and  4th  by  volume  number 


"There   is   a   new  Congress   every  odd  year  and  a  new  Session  every  year. 

148 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS  365-367 

in  the  class.  Serial  numbers  are  given  in  a  column  at  the 
left.  The  rest  of  the  book  is  made  up  of  a  classified  list  of 
publications  issued  by  the  Executive  departments  and  the 
independent  publishing  offices  to  the  end  of  1909,  noting 
which  ones  are  also  in  the  Congressional  Edition.  Index  to 
the  classified  list  in  the  back. 

365.  Poore,  Benjamin  Perley.    Descriptive  catalogue  of 
the  government  publications  of  the  United  States,  September 
5,  1774-March  4,  1881.     Washington,  Government  printing 
office,  1885. 

Not  restricted  to  the  Congressional  Edition,  it  includes 
all  government  publications  for  these  years.  Arrangement 
strictly  chronological,  even  to  the  day.  Author  and  subject 
index  in  the  back.  Brief  abstract  of  each  document,  but  no 
serial  numbers. 

366.  Ames,  John  Griffith.    Comprehensive  index  to  the 
publications  of  the  United  States  government,  1881-93.  Wash- 
ington, Government  printing  office,  1905. 

Includes  department  as  well  as  Congressional  documents. 
Arranged  by  subject,  with  an  author  index  in  v.2. 

367.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Catalogue  of 
the  public  documents  of ...  Congress  and  of  all  the  depart- 
ments of  the  government  of  the  United  States . . .  the  ' '  Com- 
prehensive index/'  March  4,  1893- June  30,  1915.    Washing- 
ton, Government  printing  office,  1896-1918.    v.1-12. 

Often  called  by  the  title  Document  Catalogue,  which  ap- 
pears on  the  binding  of  v.9-12. 

Issued  every  two  years,  one  volume  for  each  Congress. 
Includes  department  as  well  as  Congressional  publications. 
Arranged  alphabetically  by  author  and  subject.  The  serial 
number  is  given  in  the  Congressional  documents  list,  which 
is  found  in  regular  alphabetical  order  with  the  letter  C  in 
each  volume  and  is  arranged  similarly  to  the  Checklist.  Since 
July  1,  1899  the  serial  number  is  also  given  with  the  refer- 
ence in  bold-face  type,  thus:  6640.  Often  several  editions 


149 


368-369  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

of  the  same  document  are  listed,  the  Congressional  Edition 
with  the  serial  number  usually  being  given  last,  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner: 

NICKLES,  JOHN  MILTON.  Bibliography  of  North  American 
geology,  1912,  with  subject  index.  1913.  I92p.  (Geolog- 
ical survey.  Bulletin  545.) 

Same.    ( H.  doc.  31 1,  63d  Cong.  2d  sess.   In  v.43 ;  6640. ) 

368.  U.  S.  Superintendent  of  documents.    Index  to  the 
reports  and   documents  of ...  Congress . . .  being  the  ' t  Con- 
solidated  index,"   December   2,   1895-November   21,    1918. 
Washington,  Government  printing  office,  1897-1919.    v.1-26. 

Usually  called  by  its  binders'  title,  Document  index. 

Supplements  the  Document  Catalogue  by  being  more  up- 
to-date — a  new  volume  being  issued  for  each  session  of  Con- 
gress— but  indexes  only  the  Congressional  Edition.  Arranged 
by  author  and  subject.  In  back  of  each  volume  are  numerical 
lists  and  a  schedule  of  reports  and  documents  giving  serial 
numbers. 

369.  Directions  for  finding  serial  numbers.— 

Before  1895,  look  under  subject  in  Poore  or  Ames  and  find 
reference  like  this:  H.E.  48-1,  v.10,  no.l.  Look  in  Checklist, 
1789-1909  for  corresponding  serial  number  under  48th  Con- 
gress, 1st  session,  House  executive  documents,  v.  10  and  find 
at  the  left  the  serial  number  2190. 

1895-June  1899,  look  for  subject  in  Document  Catalogue 
and  find  a  reference  similar  to  those  in  Ames.  Then  turn  to 
the  letter  C  in  the  Document  Catalogue  itself  and  in  Con- 
gressional documents  list,  find  a  schedule  similar  to  the  one 
in  the  Checklist.  Serial  number  is  given  in  brackets.  ( Check- 
list may  be  used  as  above  instead.) 

July,  1899 — June  30,  1915  (date  covered  by  last  volume 
of  Document  Catalogue)  look  for  the  subject  in  the  Docu- 
ment Catalogue,  then,  if  the  serial  number  is  not  given  in 
bold-face  type  with  the  reference,  turn  to  the  department  or 
bureau  which  issued  the  document  originally  and  find  the 


150 


U.  S.  PUBLIC  DOCUMENTS 

serial  number  in  bold-face  type  after  the  title  and  imprint 
of  the  document. 

July,  1915-Nov.  1918  (from  the  last  date  of  the  latest  vol- 
ume of  the  Document  Catalogue  to  the  date  of  the  latest  vol- 
ume of  the  Document  Index)  look  for  the  subject  in  the 
Document  Index,  then  turn  to  the  back  of  the  volume  and 
find  serial  number  in  the  same  way  as  in  the  Checklist,  either 
in  Numerical  Lists  of  Eeports  and  Documents  or  in  the  Sched- 
ule of  Volumes.  Serial  number  is  given  at  the  right  of  the 
page. 


151 


370 


CHAPTER  XXX 
BIBLIOGRAPHY 

370.  Definition  and  kinds. — A  bibliography  is  a  list  of 
books  or  articles  by  a  certain  author  or  about  a  certain  sub- 
ject ;  e.g.  Slater,  J.  H.,  Robert  Louis  Stevenson,  a  bibliography 
of  Tiis  complete  works;  or  U.  S.  Children's  Bureau,  List  of 
references  on  child  labor. 

Author  bibliographies  are  used  chiefly  by  scholars  who 
are  making  a  study  of  some  author's  works  or  who  want  in- 
formation about  the  editions  of  some  work.  The  kind  of 
bibliography  most  generally  used  by  the  undergraduate  stu- 
dent is  the  subject  bibliography.  He  uses  it  in  much  the 
same  way  as  indexes;  namely,  to  find  material  for  a  report 
or  paper  on  some  subject. 

A  bibliography  may  be  either  complete  or  partial.  The 
former  attempts  to  list  everything  published  on  the  subject. 
The  latter  may  be  limited  to  a  selection  of  the  best  or  the 
most  recent  material.  Comparatively  few  subject  bibliogra- 
phies claim  completeness,  as  that  usually  involves  a  long  and 
extremely  painstaking  search  through  many  libraries,  cata- 
logs, and  indexes  to  make  sure  that  nothing  has  been  omitted. 
Since  an  undergraduate  is  not  expected  to  make  so  exhaustive 
a  study  of  the  literature  of  a  subject  as  a  specialist,  but  needs 
only  to  examine  the  best  material,  he  will  find  a  selected 
bibliography  of  the  most  practical  value.  As  Dr.  Francis  G. 
Peabody  says,  "a  perfect  bibliography  may  justify  pride  in 
the  compiler,  but  may  provoke  despair  in  the  reader."  An 
extensive  bibliography  is  more  useful  when  annotated;  i.e. 
when  descriptions  of  the  books  referred  to  are  included,  with 
estimates  of  their  value.  Larned's  Literature  of  American 
liistory  is  a  good  example. 

An  undergraduate  student,  therefore,  will  naturally  pre- 
fer a  fairly  extensive,  but  well  selected  and  annotated,  bib- 
liography which  has  been  compiled  for  the  library  in  which 
he  is  working,  if  it  is  attainable ;  but  as  he  often  will  be  able 


152 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  371-373 

to  secure  only  a  bibliography  compiled  for  some  other  library, 
he  must  bear  in  mind  that  in  such  a  list  he  will  find  that  not 
all  the  references  are  in  the  library  in  which  he  happens  to 
be,  just  as  in  using  periodical  indexes  he  finds  references  to 
magazines  not  in  the  library. 


HOW  TO  FIND  BIBLIOGRAPHIES 

371.  Encyclopedias.    One  of  the  features  which  is  ex- 
pected of  the  modern  reference  book  is  bibliographical  in- 
formation.   All  its  articles  on  subjects  of  importance  which 
have  been  sufficiently  developed  to  have  a  literature  are  fol- 
lowed by  bibliographies. 

372.  Treatises.    Textbooks  and  treatises  of  the  day,  like 
reference  books,  are  expected  to  furnish  bibliographies,  which 
are  called  by  the  various  titles  of  Authorities,  Bibliography, 
Book  List,  Reading  List,  References,  Sources,  etc.    These  bib- 
liographies are  found  in  different  places  in  books:  near  the 
front,  in  an  appendix,  or  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  chap- 
ters.   Some  books,  especially  the  older  ones,  have  bibliograph- 
ical references  in  footnotes  or  insets  in  the  margins,  instead 
of  collected  into  a  list.     Such  references  are  often  given  by 
very  abbreviated  titles,  which  may  be  explained  in  full  in 
a  list  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  the  book  or  volume.    A  few 
examples  of  valuable  bibliographies  in  treatises  are  those  in 
Cambridge  History  of  English  Literature,  American  Nation, 
Sidney  Lee,  Queen  Victoria. 

373.  Periodicals.     Several  periodicals   in   special  lines 
contain  bibliographies  of  current  material;    e.g.  American 
City,  American  Gas  Association  Monthly.    Excellent  bibliog- 
raphies on  various  subjects  are  printed  in  the  Bulletin  of 
Bibliography,  issued  quarterly  by  The  F.  W.  Faxon  Co.  of 
Boston,  and  in  Special  Libraries,  a  periodical  devoted  to  the 
interests  of  technical  and  business  libraries.    Municipal,  state, 
and  federal  departments,  bureaus,  and  libraries  are  respon- 
sible for  a  great  many  of  the  bibliographies  published.    Li- 


153 


374-376  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

braries  printed  over  two  hundred  in  191817  and  the  U.  S. 
government,  over  four  hundred  in  the  year  ending  June 
1918. 18  Many  of  these  come  out  in  bulletins,  but  some  are 
separates. 

374.  Separate  Bibliographies.    Besides  the  government 
agencies,  frequent  sources  of  separate  bibliographies  are  col- 
lege faculties,  societies,  and  the  publishers  of  periodical  in- 
dexes. 

The  Library  of  Congress  issues  many  printed  and  type- 
written bibliographies,  chiefly  on  economic,  political  and  his- 
torical subjects.  A  list  of  them  is  in  S  wanton,  Guide  to  gov- 
ernment publications,  p.  122-24. 

The  Drama  League  of  America  publishes  selected  lists  of 
plays  and  works  on  dramatic  subjects. 

The  H.  W.  Wilson  Co.  publishes  club  study  outlines,  with 
bibliographies,  as  well  as  the  Handbook  series.  (See  section 
193). 

375.  Cataloging  and  shelving  of  bibliographies. — Sep- 
arate bibliographies  and  the  most  important  of  the  bibliog- 
raphies in  books  and  periodicals  are  indicated  in  the  card 
catalog  as  shown  in  section  45.    New  ones  are  listed  in  the 
Bulletin  of  the  Public  Affairs  Information  Service  and  the 
Library  Journal.  Manuscript  and  typewritten  bibliographies, 
whether  compiled  by  the  University  of  Illinois  Library  or 
by  some  other  library,  are  kept  in  a  file  in  the  Keference 
Room  and  are  cataloged  in  a  subject  index  at  the  Reference 
Desk.  A  selected  collection  of  printed  separate  bibliographies 
is  shelved  near  the  Reference  Desk.    Important  among  these 
bibliographies  are  the  following: 

376.  Harvard  University. — A  guide  to  reading  in  social 
ethics  and  allied  subjects;  lists  of  books  and  articles  selected 
and  described  for  the  use  of  general  readers,  by  teachers  in 


"Bulletin   of  bibliography,   Feb.    1919,    10:87-90. 

"Monthly    catalog  of    U.    S.    documents.      Index,    1917-18,    nos.    271-282,    p. 
xvii-xix. 

154 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  377-381 

Harvard  University.    Cambridge,  Mass.    Harvard  university, 
1910. 

Selected  and  annotated,  on  topics  in  social  philosophy,  so- 
cial institutions,  social  service,  ethics  of  modern  industry, 
social  aspects  of  religion.  Index  of  authors  whose  books  are 
listed. 

377.  Munro,  William  Bennett.    A  bibliography  of  mu- 
nicipal government  in  the  United  States.    Cambridge,  Mass. 
Harvard  university  press,  1915. 

Selected,  including  only  the  more  recent  material  both 
elementary  and  semi-technical.  Partly  annotated.  Classified 
arrangement,  with  a  good  index.  Includes  such  topics  as  city 
manager  plan,  municipal  ownership,  sanitation,  censorship  of 
amusements. 

378.  Stevens,  Don  Lorenzo.  A  bibliography  of  municipal 
utility    regulation   and    municipal    ownership.      Cambridge, 
Mass.    Harvard  university  press,  1918. 

Selected  and  annotated  bibliography  of  electric,  gas, 
water,  and  traction  utilities,  intended  for  business  men.  Clas- 
sified arrangement,  with  index. 

379.  Modern  drama  and  opera,  reading  lists   on  the 
works  of  various  authors.  Boston,  Boston  book  co.  1911-15.  2v. 

Annotated  bibliography  of  books  and  magazine  articles 
on  traits,  tendencies,  and  technique  of  modern  drama,  and 
on  certain  dramatists  and  opera-composers,  with  a  title  index 
of  Plays  and  Operas  in  each  volume. 

380.  Paetow,  Louis  John.    Guide  to  the  study  of  medi- 
eval history.    Berkeley,  University  of  California  press,  1917. 

Following  an  outline  of  each  topic  is  a  list  of  books  rec- 
ommended for  reading  and  a  bibliography  of  the  most  im- 
portant material  to  use  in  preparing  papers  and  reports. 
Author  and  subject  index.  • 

381.  Gross,  Charles.    The  sources  and  literature  of  Eng- 
lish history  from  the  earliest  times  to  about  1485.     2d  ed. 
rev.  and  enl.    London,  Longmans,  1915. 

155 


382-384  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Selected  bibliography  of  the  "printed  materials  relating 
to  the  political,  constitutional,  legal,  social,  and  economic  his- 
tory of  England,  Wales,  and  Ireland. ' '  Preface.  Annotated. 
Classified  arrangement,  with  full  index. 

382.  Lamed,  Josephus  Nelson,  ed.  Literature  of  Ameri- 
can history ;  a  bibliographical  guide.    Boston,  A.  L.  A.  pub- 
lishing board,  1902. 

A  bibliography  of  the  history  of  the  U.  S.,  Canada,  and 
Latin  America,  with  a  critical  note  for  each  book  signed  by 
the  initials  of  the  critic.  Arranged  by  geographical  sections, 
by  subjects,  and  chronologically.  Author  and  subject  index 
in  the  back,  which  refers  to  books  by  number  of  entry  in  the 
bibliography  instead  of  page  reference.  Appendix  includes 
selected  lists  of  books. 

Annual  supplements  are  entitled  Writings  on  American 
history. 

383.  Griffin,  Appleton  Prentiss  Clark.    Bibliography  of 
American  historical  societies   (the    United    States    and    the 
Dominion  of  Canada).  2d  ed.  rev.  and  enl.  Washington,  Gov- 
ernment  printing   office,   1907.     (American   historical   asso- 
ciation.    Annual  report,  1905.     v.2.) 

Lists  publications  of  American  historical  societies  from 
their  beginnings  to  1905.  Arrangement :  1,  National  organi- 
zations ;  2,  State  and  local  societies.  For  each  society  is  given 
a  full  list  of  its  publications  with  detailed  contents  of  each 
volume.  Indexes:  1,  Subject  and  author;  2,  Biographical; 
3,  Societies.  References  are  to  title  numbers  and  not  to  pages. 

384.  Catalogs  and  Indexes. — There  are  two  other  kinds 
of  lists  which  are  sometimes  called  bibliographies,  but  which 
have  certain  distinguishing  features  from  the  bibliography  as 
usually  defined.     One  is  the  catalog,  either  of  a  library  or 
of  all  books  published  by  a  certain  publisher  or  group  of 
publishers.    A  portion  of  a  catalog  may  be  taken  as  the  foun- 
dation of  a  bibliography,  as  when  one  copies  from  the  card 
catalog  of  a  library  or  from  the  U.  S.  Catalog  the  entries 


156 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  385-386 

which  are  found  under  a  given  author  or  subject,  but  this 
copied  part  in  itself  would  make  neither  a  complete  nor  a 
selected  bibliography,  since  the  limitations  would  be  those  of 
necessity  rather  than  choice.  A  list  of  the  books  issued  by 
the  publishers  of  a  certain  country  is,  however,  called  a 
"trade  bibliography,"  though  the  use  of  the  term  bibliog- 
raphy in  this  case  hardly  conforms  to  the  customary  definition. 
The  other  list  similar  to  a  bibliography  is  the  Index,  of 
which  examples  are  Readers'  guide,  Hasse,  Index  of  eco- 
nomic material  in  the  documents  of  fke  United  States,  and 
Baker,  Guide  to  best  fiction.  These  are  limited  by  form  of 
material  included  rather  than  subject  matter;  i.e.  as  in  the 
above  examples,  to  periodicals,  documents,  or  novels.  Indexes 
and  catalogs  are  helps  in  preparing  bibliographies,  rather 
than  bibliographies  in  themselves. 

HOW  TO  MAKE  A  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OR  REFERENCE  LIST 

385.  In  many  courses  in  the  University  the  students  are 
required  to  make  bibliographies,  either  to  precede  or  accom- 
pany papers.     The  following  suggestions  are  made  for  pre- 
paring accurate,  consistent,  and  well  selected  bibliographies. 

386.  Before  starting  to  collect  references,  be  sure  that 
you  understand  the  scope  of  the  subject.    Read  an  account 
of  it  in  a  reference  book,  or,  if  it  is  too  new  a  subject  for 
that,  read  as  general  a  magazine  article  about  it  as  you  can 
find.     Then  look  at  the  subject  from  different  angles.    For 
example,  consider  the  topic,  English  cathedrals.     This  may 
be  regarded  from  the  viewpoint  of  church  architecture  or  of 
English  architecture,  of  travellers'  descriptions  or  of  the  re- 
ligious history  of  England,  or  of  the  present  government  and 
usage  of  the  Church  of  England.    You  should  consult  differ- 
ent classes  of  books  for  these  different  phases  of  the  one  sub- 
ject and  you  may  think  of  several  headings  to  consult  in  the 
catalog  and  indexes.     Be  on  the  lookout  always  for  bibli- 
ographical suggestions  in  books  and  articles  as  you  look  them 
over. 

157 


387-388  GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

387.  Collecting  the  references: 
Books. 

1.  Select  books  from  those  listed  in  the  card  catalog  on 
the  topic,  noticing  as  a  basis  of  selection  authors,  dates,  pub- 
lishers, etc. 

2.  Examine  bibliographies  which  may  be  found  in  them 
for  new  titles. 

3.  List  articles  in  reference  books  and  their  bibliogra- 
phies. 

4.  Consult  the  bibliographies,  indexes,  and  special  cata- 
logs available  on  the  subjects  which  include    the    different 
phases  of  the  topic;    e.g.  Gross,  Sources  of  English  History. 
and  Boston  Public  Library,  Books  on  Architecture. 

5.  Look  for  chapters  in  books  by  consulting  the  " A.  L.  A.  -' 
Index  to  General  Literature  (see  section  257)  and  Readers' 
Guide   (see  section  97).     It  may  be  necessary  to  look  for 
chapters  in  books  of  a  broader  scope  than  the  special  topic 
on  which  you  are  working;    e.g.  books  on  history  of  archi- 
tecture for  chapters  on  cathedrals. 

Periodical  articles. 

Consult  the  Magazine  Indexes  to  find  articles  published 
in  periodicals.  (See  section  106).  Carefully  examine  articles 
to  see  whether  they  are  worth  including. 

388.  Recording1  the  References. — A  good  bibliography 
is  well  arranged  and  notes  references  with  sufficient  fullness 
of  detail  to  identify  them  easily. 

1.  For  convenience  the  references  should  be  entered  first 
on  separate  P  slips  or  cards  because  they  can  be  rearranged 
as  desired.    After  the  references  are  collected  and  arranged, 
copy  them  on  sheets,  with  two  line  spaces  between  entries. 

2.  The  following  details  should  be  included  in  the  ref- 
erences : 

a.  In  reference  books :  author,  title,  edition,  if  other  than 
1st,  place  of  publication,  publisher,  and  date  of  the  book; 
and  the  author,  title,  volume,  and  inclusive  pages  of  the 
article. 

158 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  389 

b.  In  other  books;    Whole  books:  call  number,  author, 
title,  edition,  if  other  than  1st,  place  of  publication,  publisher, 
date,  and  number  of  pages  or  volumes.    Parts  of  books:  call 
number,  author,  edition,  if  other  than  1st,  title,  place  of  pub- 
lication, publisher,  and  date  of  the  book;    and  title  and  in- 
clusive pages  of  the  chapter  or  section. 

c.  Periodical  articles :   the  title  of  the  periodical  and  the 
volume,  inclusive  pages,  author,  and  title  of  the  article,  with 
the  date  of  the  issue  of  the  periodical  (day  and  month  as 
well  as  year) .    The  call  number  should  be  included  for  period- 
icals in  the  stacks. 

3.  The  general  arrangement  of  the  list  varies  with  the? 
subject,  but  whatever  method  of  entry  and  arrangement  is 
decided  upon  it  should  be  followed  consistently.  In  a  short 
bibliography,  which  does  not  require  a  special  grouping  of 
references  according  to  subdivisions  of  the  subject,  a  con- 
venient arrangement  is  to  divide  the  references  into  two 
groups:  one  of  books  and  the  other  of  periodical  articles, 
and  then  arrange  the  first  group  alphabetically  by  authors, 
and  the  second  group  alphabetically  either  by  authors  of  the 
articles,  or  by  the  titles  of  the  periodicals.  In  case  of  anony- 
mous books  and  articles  the  entries  and  arrangement  should 
be  by  title. 

389.  The  following  bibliographies  show  two  methods  of 
entering  and  arranging  the  same  material. 


159 


389 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 


282 

Able 

v.2 

726.6 
B64c4 

283 

C98d4 


914.2 
G79o 

726.6 

M38c2 

726.6 
M38ca3 


SAMPLE    BIBLIOGRAPHY    1. 

ENGLISH  CATHEDRALS 

A  LIST  OF  REFERENCES 

BOOKS 

Abbey,  Charles  John  and  Overton,  John  Henry. 

The  English  Church  in  the  eighteenth  century.    Lon- 
don, Longmans,   1878. 

v.2,  p.  485-87.     Church  music;  cathedrals. 

Bond,  Francis. 

The    cathedrals    of    England    and    Wales.     4th    ed. 
London,  Batsford,  pref.  1912.     493p. 

Cutts,  Edward  Lewes. 

Dictionary  of  the  Church  of  England.    4th  ed.  Lon- 
don, "Society  for  promoting  Christian  knowledge,   1913. 
p.  122-31.     Cathedral. 

Encyclopaedia    Britannica.      llth    ed.      Cambridge,    Eng. 
University  press,  1910. 

v.5,  p.521-23.  Cathedral  architecture,  by  R.  P.  Spiers. 

Great  western  railway  company  of  England. 

The  cathedral  line  of  England:    its  sacred  sites  and 
shrines.    London,  Published  by  the  author,  1908.    72p. 

Masse,  Henri  Jean  Louis  Joseph. 

The  cathedral  church  of  Bristol.     2d  ed.     London, 
Bell,  1910.     112p. 


7&0.5 
MUS 
v.14 


The  cathedral  church  of  Gloucester.    3d  ed.    London, 
Bell,  1910.     133p. 

PERIODICALS 

Century.     New  series,  v.ll,  p.  724-35.     March  1887.     The 
cathedral  churches  of  England,  by  M.  G.  van  Rensselaer. 

Living  age.     v.194,  p.  367-70.     6  Aug.  1892.     Curiosities 
in  our  cathedrals. 

Musician,      v.14,    p.    178-79.      April    19-09.      Observations 
about  some  English  cathedrals,  by  J.  L.  Erb. 


160 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


389 


282 

Able 

v.2 

726.6 
B64c4 

283 

C98d4 


914.2 
G79o 

726.6 
M38c2 

726.6 
M38ca3 


780.5 
MUS 
v.14 


SAMPLE   BIBLIOGRAPHY   2. 

ENGLISH  CATHEDRALS 
A  LIST  OF  REFERENCES 

BOOKS 

Abbey,  Charles  John  and  Overton,  John  Henry. 

Church  music ;  cathedrals.  (In  their  English  Church 
in  the  eighteenth  century.  London,  Longmans,  1878. 
2:485-87.) 

Bond,  Francis. 

The  cathedrals  of  England  and  Wales.  4th  ed. 
London,  Batsford,  pref.  1912.  493p. 

Cutts,  Edward  Lewes. 

Cathedral.  (In  his  Dictionary  of  the  Church  of 
England.  4th  ed.  London,  Society  for  promoting 
Christian  knowledge,  1913.  p.  122-31.) 

Great  western  railway  company  of  England. 

The  cathedral  line  of  England:  its  sacred  sites  and 
shrines.  London,  Published  by  the  author,  1908.  72p. 

Masse,  Henri  Jean  Louis  Joseph. 

The  cathedral  church  of  Bristol.  2d  ed.  London, 
BeU,  1910.  112p. 


The  cathedral  church  of  Gloucester.  3d  ed.  London, 
Bell,  1910.  133p. 

Spiers,  It.  Phene 

Cathedral  architecture.  (Encyclopaedia  Britannica. 
llth  ed.  Cambridge,  Eng.  University  press,  1910.  5: 
521-23.) 

PERIODICALS 

Curiosities  in   our  cathedrals.      (Living   age.      194:367-70. 
6  Aug.  1892.) 

Erb,  John  Lawrence. 

Observations  about  some  English  cathedrals.  (Mu- 
sician. 14:178-79.  April  1909.) 

Van  Rensselaer,  M.  G. 

The  cathedral  churches  of  England.  (Century,  n.s. 
11:724-35.  March  1887.) 


161 


APPENDIX  I 
QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

1.  What  is  meant  by ' '  classification ' '  as  applied  to  libraries  ? 

2.  What  system  of  classification  is  used  in  this  library? 

Name  the  main  classes. 

3.  Explain  the  terms  (1)  shelf  list,  (2)  card  catalog,  (3) 

reference  book,  (4)  reserve  book,  (5)  title  page,  (6) 
copyright,  (7)  scope  of  the  book,  (8)  bibliography, 
(9)  guide  card. 

4.  Distinguish  between  the  terms  (a)  subject  heading  and 

title  entry  in  the  card  catalog;  (b)  table  of  contents 
and  index  in  a  book;  (c)  call  number,  classification 
number  and  book  number. 

5.  Where  is  the  Gilt  Star  collection  shelved  ?   Where  is  the 

Open  Shelf  collection  shelved?  Distinguish  between 
the  types  of  books  found  in  them. 

6.  Give  the  location  in  this  library  of  (1)  bound  volumes 

of  popular  magazines,  (2)  bound  volumes  of  technical 
magazines,  (3)  recent  numbers  of  popular  magazines, 
(4)  older  unbound  numbers  of  popular  magazines. 

7.  What  are  some  of  the  characteristics  of  a  good  reference 

book?  Show  how  some  work  of  reference  studied  in 
this  course  fulfills  the  requirements. 

8.  Name  and  describe  briefly  the  four  standard  unabridged 

English  language  dictionaries,  giving  distinctive  fea- 
tures of  each. 

9.  What  three  classes  of  reference  books  are  represented 

by  the  Century  dictionary? 

10.  If  you  were  buying  a  synonym  dictionary,  which  one 

would  you  select? 

11.  Where  would  you  expect  to  find  something  about  a 

prominent  American  living  today  ?  A  prominent  Eng- 
lishman ? 

162 


APPENDIX  I :  QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

12.  Name  4  works  in  which  you  would  expect  to  find  a  bio- 

graphical sketch  of  an  English  painter  who  died  dur- 
ing the  last  century.  Which  two  would  give  the  best 
bibliographies  ? 

13.  For  pronunciation  of  proper  names  of  people  or  places 

where  would  you  look? 

14.  If  you  wish  to  find  a  poem  and  can  remember  only  the 

first  line,  what  reference  book  would  you  consult  first? 

15.  If  you  wish  to  find  a  short  story  where  would  you  look 

to  find  references  to  books  or  periodicals  in  which  it 
has  appeared? 

16.  Distinguish  between  the  Book  review  digest  and  Cumu- 

lative book  index  for  1918. 

17.  Where  would  you  find  the  price  and  publisher  of  a  cer- 

tain book  if  you  knew  the  author,  the  title",  or  the 
subject? 

18.  Where  would  you  find  listed  books  published  last  year 

on  a  certain  subject?  references  to  reviews  of  the  most 
important  of  them? 

19.  What  index  to  general  periodical  literature  covers  the 

19th  century?  What  index  brings  it  down  to  date? 
Distinguish  between  the  two  in  arrangement  and  in- 
formation given. 

20.  Where  would  you  look  for  criticism  of  a  book  by  an 

English  or  American  author  of  the  19th  century,  e.g. 
Thackeray's  Henry  Esmond?  Where  would  you  look 
for  criticism  of  books  of  the  20th  century? 

21.  What  is  the  scope  of  Warner's  Library  of  the  world's 

best  literature  ?    For  what  would  you  use  it  ? 

22.  Distinguish  as  to  scope  and  arrangement  between  (a) 

Statesman's  year-book,  (b)  American  year  book,  and 
(3)  the  New  International  year  book. 

23.  Where  would  you  look  to  find  the  source  of  some  fa- 

miliar quotation? 

163 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

24.  Name  several  works  in  which  you  could  find  population 

statistics  for  larger  American  cities. 

25.  Where  would  you  look  for  a  map  of  an  important  city  ? 

a  map  showing  the  products  of  a  certain  country?  a 
map  showing  changes  in  boundaries  of  countries  dur- 
ing a  particular  period? 

26.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  description  of  some  city  ? 

27.  Where  would  you  look  for  the  duties  of  a  department 

of  the  U.  S.  Government? 

28.  In  what  books  of  reference  would  you  look  for  an  exten- 

sive article  on  education  in  a  particular  country,  e.g. 
Norway  ? 

29.  Give  scope  and  arrangement  of  the  Cambridge  modern 

history  and  mention  two  features  which  make  the  work 
especially  valuable. 

30.  Where  would  you  expect  to  find  an  article  about  a 

mythological  character?  a  noted  name  of  fiction? 

31.  What  class  of  books  would  you  consult  to  identify  a  tree, 

a  bird,  or  a  flower? 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  CARD  CATALOG 

32.  In  what  order  are  author,  title  and  subject  cards  filed 

when  the  entry  word  is  the  same,  e.g.  steel? 

33.  How  are  cards  arranged  under  the  heading  "  History " 

for  the  more  important  countries,  e.g.  U.  S. — History 
— Civil  war,  U.  S. — History — Revolution,  etc? 

34.  Under  what  heading  in  the  card  catalog  would  you  look 

for 

a.  publications  of  a  government,  e.g.  annual  report 

of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  of  the  U.  S.  ? 

b.  publications  of  a  society,  e.g.  proceedings  of  the 

National  Educational  Association? 

c.  periodicals;  e.g.  Atlantic  Monthly,  Engineering 

Magazine. 

164 


APPENDIX  I :   QUESTIONS  FOR  ORAL  REVIEW 

35.  Give  the  complete  subject  heading  for 

a.  a  bibliography  on  the  cost  of  living 

b.  a  history  of  French  literature 

c.  a  book  of  travels  in  France 

d.  a  periodical  devoted  to  music 

e.  a  criticism  of  Tennyson's  In  Memoriam 

36.  Write  the  first  lines  for  all  the  cards  which  would  be 

made  in  the  catalog  for 

a.  David  Copperfield  by  Charles  Dickens 

b.  Seven  Lamps  of  Architecture  by  John  Ruskin 

c.  History  of  Philosophy  by  Alfred  Weber 


165 


APPENDIX  H 

SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS 

LIBRARY   SCIENCE   12 

Section  E  Problem  10 

April  15,  1920  Literature: 

Problem  due  April  22,  1920  Indexes  and 

Quotations 

Based  on  Manual,  ch.20,  sec.  244-67. 

In  questions  with  similar  parts  (e.  g.  1,  b)  answer  the  part 
that  is  checked  ( V )  • 

1.  Give  the  information  and  the  reference  to  where  you  can 
find 

a.  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  poem  entitled  The 
jumblies. 

E.  Lear. 

Granger,  Edith.   Index  to  poetry  and  recitations.  Rev. 

ed.  p.  156. 

b.  the  author  and  title  of  the  poem  whose  first  line  is : 
"Boot,  saddle,  to  horse  and  away!" 

V  "Three  fishers  went  sailing  away  to  the  West" 

Kingsley.    The  three  fishers. 

Granger,  Edith.    Index  to  poetry  and  recitations.    Rev. 

ed.  p.  967. 

c.  the  title  of  a  rather  familiar  poem  by  "Father 
Ryan"  about  Robert  Lee's  sword. 

The  sword  of  Robert  Lee. 

Granger,  Edith.   Index  to  poetry  and  recitations.   Rev. 

ed.  p.  552. 

2.  a.  What  is  the  title  of  the  volume  of  Emerson's  works 

in  which  his  essay  on  culture  appears? 

Conduct  of  life. 

b.  Where  did  you  find  this  information? 

166 


APPENDIX  II:    SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

The  "A.L.A."  index  to  general  literature.  2d  ed.  p.  147. 
c.  Give  the  call  number  of  the  book  containing  this  essay 
if  it  is  in  the  library. 

814 
Em3co 

3.  a.  Of  whom  was  it  written  "Her  home  is  on  the  deep?" 

V  that  he  had  a  "clasp  of  things  divine?" 

Chaucer. 

b.  Give  author  and  title  of  the  poem  from  which  the 
above  words  were  taken,  and  a  reference  to  the  col- 
lection of  quotations  used. 

Browning,  E.  B.    Vision  of  poets. 

Bartlett,  John.  Familiar  quotations.   10th  ed.  p.  657. 

4.  Where  can  you  find 

a.  the  name  of  the  author  of  the  short-story  entitled 
On  trial? 

Firkins,  Ina  Ten  Eyck.    Index  to  short  stories,  p.  251. 

b.  (1)  References  to  books  and  periodicals  in  which 

Bret  Harte's  Tennessee's  partner  has  been  pub- 
lished ? 

(2)  Give  the  title  of  a  periodical  and  the  volume 
of  Bret  Harte's  short-stories  in  which  this  has 
been  published. 

Overland  monthly. 
Luck  of  Roaring  Camp. 

5.  a.  Give  a  reference  to  a  list  of  reviews  of  Mrs.  0  'Shaugh- 

nessy's  Diplomat's  wife  in  Mexico,  1916. 

Book  review  digest,  1916.   p.  423. 

b.  Is  the  review  in  the  Nation  entirely  favorable? 

No. 

6.  a.  Where  is  there  a  list  of  ten  or  more  novels  picturing 

the  Spanish  American  war?  V  the  reign  of  Terror  in 
France  ? 

167 


GUIDE  TO  THE  USE  OF  LIBRARIES 

Baker,  Ernest  A.    Guide  to  historical  fiction,  p.  282. 
b.  Give  the  author  and  title  of  one. 

Dickens,  Charles.   A  tale  of  two  cities. 

7.  Answer  the  following  questions  and  also  give  references 
to  books  used. 

a.  Who  is  the  publisher  and  what  is  the  price  of  the 
edition  of  Gulliver's  travels  which  is  illustrated  by 
Louis  Rhead. 

Harper.    $1.50. 

U.  S.  Catalog,  1912-17.   p.  1984. 

b.  Who  wrote  the  book  published  within  the  last  year 
or  two  entitled  V  Athletes  all?    Master  musicians? 

W.  Camp. 

Cumulative  book  index,  1918-19.   p.  45. 

c.  Give  author,  title,  and  publisher  of  a  book  published 
this  year  on  the  causes  of  the  European  War. 

Haldane,  R.  B.  H.    Before  the  war.    Funk. 
Cumulative  book  index,  April  1920.    p.  44. 

8.  a.  Where  do  you  find  a  list  giving  brief  plot  of  the  best 

Scandinavian  novels  from  1800  to  the  present  day? 

Baker,  Ernest  A.    Guide  to  the  best  fiction  in  English. 
New  ed.  p.  612-19. 

b.  How  many  novels  by  Bjornson  are  listed? 

11. 

c.  What   country  furnishes  the  setting  for  his  novel 
Synnove  Solbakken? 

Norway. 

9.  Give  reference  to  a  book  containing  a  group  of  quota- 
tions on 

a.  libraries 

Hoyt,  J.  K.    Cyclopedia  of  practical  quotations.    New 
ed.     p.  344-45. 

b.  sunflowers 
p.  245-46. 

168 


\ 


APPENDIX  II:    SAMPLE  PROBLEM 

10.  a.  Where  can  you  find  the  title  of  the  poem  beginning 

"Four  things  a  man  must  learn  to  do?"  V  "It's 
easy  to  fight  when  everything's  right?" 

Granger,  Edith.  Index  to  poetry  and  recitations.  Rev. 
ed.  p.  783. 

b.  Give  the  author  and  title  of  a  collection  of  poetry 
which  contains  the  poem  and  is  in  this  library. 

Stevenson,  B.  E.     The  home  book  of  verse. 

11.  Answer  the  following  questions  and  give  reference  to 
where  you  found  the  information. 

a.  In  what  city  is  the  periodical  entitled  "Printers' 
ink"  published? 

New  York. 

Severance,  H.  0.    Guide  to  the  current  periodicals  and 

serials  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.   1914.   p.  308. 

b.  What  is  the  name  of  its  present  editor,  what  is  the 
subscription  price,  and  what  are  the  circulation  sta- 
tistics ? 

John  Irving  flomer.    $3.00.   13,634. 

Ayer,  N.  W.  and  Son.    American  newspaper  annual  and 

directory.    19®0.    p.  680. 

12.  a.  Compare  Hoyt's  Cyclopedia  of  practical  quotations 

and  Bartlett's  Familiar  quotations  in  regard  to  gen- 
eral arrangement. 

Hoyt:  arranged  alphabetically  under  subject  of  quota- 
tion. 

Bartlett:    arranged   chronologically   under   author   of 

quotation. 

b.  Give  a  question  (and  page  reference  to  the  answer) 
which  can  be  more  easily  and  satisfactorily  answered 
from  the  collection  made  by  Hoyt. 

Where  are  there  a  number  of  quotations  on  various  rivers 

of  the  world?    p.  530-33. 


169 


INDEX 


NOTE.     The  numbers  refer  to  sections,  not  to  pages. 


A.L.A.  Booklist,  263. 

Index,  257. 

Abbreviations,  86. 

Agricultural  index,  293. 

Agriculture,  291-304. 

Allibone.  Critical  dictionary  of 
English  literature,  237;  Poetical 
quotations,  248;  Prose  quota- 
tions, 249. 

Almanacs,  112,  116-19. 

Alphabetizing,  card  catalog,  62- 
75. 

Altitudes,  278. 

American  anthology,  232. 

history,  see  United  States, 


history. 


history  and  encyclopedia 


of  music,  273. 
-  library 
A.L.A. 


association,     see 


literature,  226,  232. 
newspaper     annual 


and 


directory,  266. 
school  of  correspondence. 

Cyclopedia  of  commerce,  328. 

year  book,  113. 

Ames.      Comprehensive    index    to 

the  publications   of  the    U.   S. 

government,  366. 
Analytical  cards,  5-0-52. 
Animals,  see  Zoology. 
Annual  cyclopedias,  112-15,  168. 
magazine-subject     index, 

99. 

register,  115;  use  in  his- 
tory, 167. 

Appendix  of  a  book,  84. 
Appleton  's     annual     cyclopaedia, 

168. 
cyclopaedia  of  American 

biography,  138. 


Architecture,  268-69. 

Arrangement  of  cards  in  the  cata- 
log, 62-75. 

Art,  268-75. 

Assembly  bulletin,  203. 

Atkinson.  Studies  of  American 
fungi,  285. 

Atlases,  148-55;  explanation  of 
index,  143;  location,  4. 

• agricultural,  296;  com- 
mercial, 331;  historical,  172-76. 

Author  cards,  29;  filing,  63-68; 
for  government,  57;  institution, 
59-61;  joint  authors,  48;  so- 
ciety, 58. 

Author  numbers,  18. 

Automobile  engineering,  323. 

Ayer.  American  newspaper  an- 
nual and  directory,  266. 

' '  B ' ',  use  instead  of  classification 
number  for  biography,  16. 

Bailey.  Cyclopedia  of  American 
agriculture,  291;  Standard  cy- 
clopedia of  horticulture,  292. 

Baird.  Manual  of  American  col- 
lege fraternities,  356. 

Baker.  Guide  to  historical  fiction, 
259;  Guide  to  the  best  fiction, 
258. 

Bankers'  directory,  338. 

Bartholomew.  Advanced  atlas  of 
physical  and  political  geogra- 
phy, 153;  Atlas  of  economic 
geography,  154;  Atlas  of  the 
world's  commerce,  331. 

Bartlett.   Familiar  quotations,  245. 

Bent.   Familiar  short  sayings,  250. 

Bible,  218;  concordance,  220; 
dictionary,  219. 


171 


INDEX 


Bibliographies,  how  to  find,  371- 
75. 

Bibliography,  370-89;  catalog  sub- 
ject card,  45,  68;  definitions, 
370;  distinguished  from  cata- 
logs and  indexes,  384;  how  to 
make,  385-89;  sample,  389. 

Biography,  catalog  subject  cards, 
41-42,  68,  135;  classification  of, 
16;  reference  books,  135-42,177, 
179. 

Birds,  287-88. 

Blanchard.  American  highway  en- 
gineers' handbook,  324. 

Bliss  and  Binder.  New  encyclo- 
pedia of  social  reform,  191. 

Book,  parts  of,  76-85. 

Book  number,  20. 

Book  review  digest,  262. 

reviews,  see  Criticism. 

Botany,  280-85,  292. 

Brand.  Observations  on  the  popu- 
lar antiquities  of  Great  Britain, 
214. 

Brewer,  D.  J.  World's  best  es- 
says, 236;  World's  best  ora- 
tions, 235. 

E.  C.  Dictionary  of 

phrase  and  fable,  241;  Historic 
note-book,  164;  Keader's  hand- 
book of  famous  names  in  fic- 
tion, 240. 

Brockhaus '  konversations-lexikon, 
111. 

Bryan.  Dictionary  of  painters, 
270. 

Bryant.  New  library  of  poetry 
and  song,  230. 

Business,  328-47. 

digest  and  investment 

weekly,  347. 

Butterflies,  289. 

"C",  use  instead  of  classification 
number,  16. 


Call  numbers,  18-22. 

Call  slips,  32. 

Cambridge  modern  history,  160. 

Card  catalog,  25-75;  filing,  62-75, 
information  obtained  from,  32, 
33,  54;  location,  4. 

Carman,  World's  best  poetry,  228. 

Catalog    distinguished    from    bib- 
liography, 384. 
See  also  Card  catalog. 

Catholic  encyclopedia,  222. 

Century  atlas  of  the  world,  148. 

cyclopedia      of      names, 

123. 

dictionary  and  cyclo- 
pedia, 123. 

Chambers.  Book  of  days,  213; 
Cyclopaedia  of  English  litera- 
ture, 227. 

Champlin.  Cyclopedia  of  painters, 
271. 

Chapman.  Handbook  of  birds, 
288. 

Checklist  of  U.  S.  public  docu- 
ments, 364. 

Chemistry,  277. 

Chicago  daily  news  almanac,  119. 

Chisholm.  Handbook  of  commer- 
cial geography,  329. 

Christy.  Proverbs,  maxims,  and 
phrases,  253. 

Classical  antiquities,   177-80. 

Classification,  definition,  8;  nota- 
tion, 9;  systems,  10-17. 

Clothing,  308-13. 

Columbia  university.  Index  digest 
of  state  constitutions,  205. 

Commerce,  328-47. 

Comprehensive  index,  367. 

Concordances,  256. 

Congressional  directory,  197. 

documents,  see  Serial  set. 

record,  201. 

Consolidated  index,  368. 

Constitutions,  state,  204-05. 


172 


INDEX 


Constitutions,  U.  S.,  199. 

Copyright,  78. 

Costume,  309-13. 

Crabb.      English   synonymes,   127. 

Criticism,  catalog  subject  cards, 
43-44,  68-69;  collections,  237- 
238;  contemporary,  262-63;  in 
magazines,  92. 

Cumulative  book  index,  265. 

Cross  reference  cards,  35-37;  fil- 
ing, 72. 

Current  events  in  magazines,  92. 

'index,  169. 

Customs,  211-15. 

Cutter  classification,  11. 

numbers,  18. 

Cyclopedia  of  American  govern- 
ment, 188. 

—  of  civil  engineering,  319. 

of  engineering,  318. 

Daily  news  almanac,  119. 

Dates,  dictionaries  of,  164. 
See  also  Current  events. 

Day.    Collacon,  251. 

Debates,  166,  193. 

Decimal  classification,  13-17. 

Dewey.  Decimal  classification,  13- 
17. 

Diccionario  enciclopedico  hispano- 
americano,  111. 

Dictionaries,   120-34. 

Dictionary  of  national  biography, 
137. 

Directories,  banks  and  bankers, 
338. 

city,    346;     location,    in 

library,  4. 

education,    352,    354-55 ; 

government,  197-98 ;  manufac- 
turers, 336-37;  newspapers,  266; 
railroads,  341-44. 

Document  catalog,  367. 

index,  368. 


Domestic  economy,  see  Home  eco- 
nomics. 

Doubleday,  Page  &  co's  geograph- 
ical manual,  152. 

Drama,  bibliographies,  374,  379. 

Dramatic  index,  102. 

Dress,  309-13. 

Droysen.  Allgemeiner  historischer 
handatlas,  176. 

Economics,  187-96. 

Edition,  77;    on  catalog  card,  54. 

Editor  card,  49. 

Edmund  and  Williams,  Toaster's 
handbook,  255. 

Education,  348-57. 

Edwards.  Words,  facts  and 
phrases,  243. 

Encyclopedia  Americana,   110. 

Encyclopaedia  Britannica,  108. 

Encyclopaedia  of  religion  and 
ethics,  216. 

Encyclopedias,  107-11;  distin- 
guished from  dictionaries,  120. 

Engineering,  317-27. 

index  annual,   326. 

England,  history,  181-82;  bibliog- 
raphy, 381. 

English  literature,  227,  229,  233. 

Engravers,  270. 

Essays,  236. 

Expansive  classification,  11. 

Experiment  station  record,  303. 

Exporters'  encyclopaedia,  334. 

"F",  use  instead  of  classification 

number  for  fiction,  16. 
Fernald.     English    synonyms    and 

antonyms,  128. 
Fiction,  classification,  16;  indexes, 

258-60;    names,  240,  243. 
Finch  and  Baker.     Geography  of 

the  world's  agriculture,  296. 
Fine  arts,  see  Art. 


173 


INDEX 


Firkins.  Index  to  short  stories, 
260. 

Flowers,  280-81,  292. 

Foods,  314-16. 

Fraternities,  college,  356. 

Freeman  and  Chandler.  World's 
commercial  products,  330. 

Frey.  Sobriquets  and  nicknames, 
243. 

Funk  and  Wagnalls.  New  stand- 
ard dictionary,  122. 

Gannett.  Dictionary  of  altitudes, 
278. 

Geography,  143-57. 

Geology,  278-79. 

Gillette.  Handbook  of  cost  data, 
324. 

and  Dana.    Handbook  of 

mechanical  and  electrical  cost 
data,  324. 

Gilt  Star  collection,  7 ;  location,  4. 

Government,  187-205. 

city,  bibliographies,  377- 

78. 

Government  documents,  catalog 
cards,  57,  74. 

state;      education, 

354;    laws,  202-03. 

United  States,  358- 

69;  guide,  359;  indexes,  364- 
68;  agriculture,  294-304;  com- 
merce, 332-33;  Congress,  197, 
201;  education,  350-53;  geol- 
ogy, 156,  279;  laws,  199-200; 
statistics,  194,  209-10. 

See  also  U.S.  Superintendent 
of  documents.     Price  lists. 

Government  officials,  197;  state, 
198. 

La  grande  encyclopedic,  111. 

Granger.  Index  to  poetry  and 
recitations,  261. 

Gray.  New  manual  of  botany, 
280. 


Griffin.  Bibliography  of  Ameri- 
can historical  societies,  383. 

Grocer's  encyclopedia,  315. 

Gross.  Sources  and  literature  of 
English  history,  381. 

Grove.     Dictionary  of  music,  272. 

Guide  books,  catalog  subject  card, 
144. 

Guide  cards,  27. 

Handbooks;  engineering,  324; 
historical,  164;  literary,  239-43. 

Harmuth.  Dictionary  of  textiles, 
308. 

Harper's  book  of  facts,  164. 

dictionary  of  classical 

literature  and  antiquities,  177. 

Harper's  encyclopaedia  of  U.  S. 
history,  183. 

Harvard  university.  Guide  to  read- 
ing in  social  ethics,  376. 

Hastings.  Dictionary  of  the  Bible, 
219;  Encyclopaedia  of  religion 
and  ethics,  216. 

Haydn's  dictionary  of  dates,  164. 

Hazell's  annual,  116. 

Hazlitt.  English  proverbs,  254; 
Faiths  and  folklore,  215. 

Hendricks '  commercial  register, 
336. 

History;  bibliographies,  380-83; 
catalog  cards,  40,  75,  158;  ref- 
erence books,  158-85. 

Hodge.  Handbook  of  American 
Indians,  184. 

Holland.  Butterfly  book,  289; 
Moth  book,  289. 

Home  book  of  verse,  231. 

Home  economics,  305-16. 

Hool.  Concrete  engineers'  hand- 
book, 324. 

Hopkins.  Scientific  American  cy- 
clopedia of  formulas,  307. 

Hornaday.  American  natural  his- 
tory, 286. 

Horticulture,  292. 


174 


INDEX 


Hough.  Handbook  of  the  trees, 
283. 

Household  science,  see  Home  eco- 
nomics. 

Hoyt.  Cyclopedia  of  practical 
quotations,  246. 

Hubbard.  American  history  and 
encyclopedia  of  music,  273. 

Hurd.     Revised  statutes,  202. 

Hymns,  dictionary,  221. 

Illinois  blue  book,  198. 

Laws,  202-03. 

Public    instruction    dept. 

Illinois  school  directory,  354. 

Index,  definition  and  description, 
85;  distinguished  from  bibliog- 
raphy, 384. 

See  also  Concordances,  Maga- 
zine indexes,  Quotations. 

Index  digest  of  state  constitutions, 
205. 

Indians,  American,  184. 

Industrial  arts  index,  103. 

International  library  of  technol- 
ogy, 320. 

Introduction,  purpose  of,  82. 

Investments,  339-43,  347. 

Jewish  encyclopedia,  223. 

Joint  author  cards,  48. 

Journal   of   agricultural   research, 

302. 
Julian.    Dictionary  of  hymnology, 

221. 

Kent.  Mechanical  engineers'  pock- 

etbook,  324. 
Ketchum.      Structural    engineers ' 

handbook,  324. 
Kettleborough.   State  constitutions, 

204. 
Kretschmer.       Die    trachten    der 

volker,  311. 


Labor,    194. 

Lalor.  Cyclopaedia  of  political 
science,  189. 

Lapp.  Important  federal  laws, 
200. 

Larned.  History  for  ready  refer- 
ence, 159;  Literature  of  Ameri- 
can history,  382. 

Larousse.  Grand  dietionnaire  uni- 
versel,  111. 

Lathrop.     Rhymers'   lexicon,   133. 

Laws,  199-205. 

Legislative  voters'  league  of  Illi- 
nois. Assembly  bulletin,  203. 

Libraries,  use,  1. 

Library  of  American  literature, 
220. 

of  Congress.  Bibliogra- 
phies, 374;  Classification,  12; 
printed  cards,  33-34. 

Library  of  literary  criticism,  238. 

of  the  world's  best  lit- 
erature, 225. 

regulations,    5 ;     reserve 

books,  6. 

University     of     Illinois ; 

arrangement,  3;  department  li- 
braries and  reading  rooms,  4; 
development,  2;  plan,  3. 

Lippincott  's  biographical  diction- 
ary, 136. 

new  gazetteer,  145. 

Literature;  cataloging  of,  40;  ref- 
erence books,  224-67. 
See  also  Criticism. 

Little.  Cyclopedia  of  classified 
dates,  164. 

Loan  department,  6;  location,  4. 

Longfellow.  Cyclopaedia  of  works 
of  architecture,  269. 

Loring.     Rhymers'  lexicon,  133. 

Low  and  Pulling.  Dictionary  of 
English  history,  181. 

Lyford.  Bibliography  of  home 
economics,  306. 


175 


INDEX 


Machinery's  encyclopedia,  322. 

handbook  for  machine 

shop  and  drafting  room,  324. 

McLaughlin  and  Hart.  Cyclopedia 
of  American  government,  188. 

Magazine  indexes,  94-106;  agricul- 
tural, 293;  engineering,  103, 
325-26;  suggestions  about  the 
use  of,  106. 

Magazine — subject  index,  99. 

Magazines,  91-106;  catalog  cards, 
46-47;  directories,  266-67;  list 
of  standard,  92;  location  and 
arrangement,  7. 

Manufacturers,  336-37. 

Maps,  144,  157;  subject  catalog 
card  for,  144;  topographic,  156. 

March.    Thesaurus  dictionary,  130. 

Marks.  Mechanical  engineers ' 
handbook,  324. 

Mathews.  Field  book  of  Ameri- 
can wild  flowers,  282;  Field 
book  of  American  trees  and 
shrubs,  282. 

Mawson,  Geographical  manual, 
152;  Standard  thesaurus  of 
English  words  and  phrases,  132. 

Merriam.  American  civil  engi- 
neers' handbook,  324. 

Meyers  grosses  konversations-lexi- 
kon,  111. 

Mill.  International  geography, 
146. 

Miller.  Great  debates  in  Ameri- 
can history,  166. 

Modern  drama  and  opera,  379. 

eloquence,  234. 

shop   practice,   321. 

Monroe.  Cyclopedia  of  education, 
349. 

Moody 's  analyses  of  investments, 
343. 

Manual  of  railroads,  342. 

Moulton.  Library  of  literary  crit- 
icism, 238. 


Moths,  289. 

Mulhall.     Dictionary  of  statistics, 

207. 
Munro.    Bibliography  of  municipal 

government,  377. 
Murray.     New  English  dictionary, 

124. 

Mushrooms,  285,  292. 
Music,  272-75. 
Mythology,    337;      classical,    177, 

179. 

National  cyclopaedia  of  American 

biography,  139. 
New  English  dictionary,  124. 
New  Hazell  annual  and  almanack, 

110. 
New    international    encyclopaedia, 

109. 

year  book,  114. 

New  Schaff-Herzog   encyclopaedia 

of  religious  knowledge,  217. 
New  York  times  index,   169. 
Newton.    Dictionary  of  birds,  287. 
Nuova  enciclopedia  italiana,  111. 

Official  guide  of  the  railways,  344. 
Open  Shelf  collection,  7;    location, 

4. 

Orations,  234-35. 
Oxford  dictionary,   124. 

Paetow.  Guide  to  the  study  of 
medieval  history,  380. 

Painting,  270-71. 

Palgrave.  Dictionary  of  political 
economy,  190. 

Pamphlets,  55. 

Patterson's  American  educational 
directory,  355. 

Pauquet.  Modes  et  costumes  his- 
toriques,  313. 

Peck.  Harper's  dictionary  of 
classical  literature  and  antiqui- 
ties, 177. 


176 


INDEX 


Peele.  Mining  engineers'  hand- 
book, 324. 

Periodicals,  see  Magazines. 

Phyfe.  Five  thousand  facts  and 
fancies,  243. 

Place,  arrangement  of  catalog 
cards,  73-74. 

Planche.  Cyclopaedia  of  costume, 
310. 

Ploetz.  Manual  of  universal  his- 
tory, 162. 

Poetry,  collections,  228-33;  index, 
261. 

Political  science,  187-205. 

Poole.  Historical  atlas  of  modern 
Europe,  174. 

Poole 's  index,  95-96. 

Poore.  Descriptive  catalogue  of 
government  publications,  365. 

Poor 's  manual  of  industrials,  339 ; 
of  public  utilities,  340;  of  the 
railroads,  341. 

Preface,  purpose  of,  79. 

Proverbs,  253-54. 

Public  affairs  information  service, 
192. 

Public  documents,  see  Government 
documents. 

Publishers,  264-67. 

Putnam.  Tabular  views  of  univer- 
sal history,  163. 

Quotations,  244-56. 

Racinet.  Le  costume  historique, 
312. 

Eailroads,   341-45. 

Rand-McNally  bankers'  directory, 
338 ;  Commercial  atlas  of  Amer- 
ica, 150;  Library  atlas  of  the 
world,  149. 

Readers'  guide,  97. 

supplement,   98. 

Reader's  handbook,  240. 


Reddall.      Fact,  fancy  and  fable, 

243. 

Reed.     Modern  eloquence,  234. 
Reference    books,    definition,    87; 

judging,   89;     using,  90. 
collection,    88 ;    location, 


7. 


department,   6;    location, 


4. 


Regulations,  see  Library  regula- 
tions. 

Religion,  216-23. 

Reserve  books,  6. 

Rhyming  dictionaries,   133-34. 

Riemann.  Dictionary  of  music, 
275. 

Rogers.     Tree  book,  284. 

Roget.  Thesaurus  of  English  words 
and  phrases,  131. 

Rules,  see  Library  regulations. 

Sandys.  Companion  to  Latin  stud- 
ies, 180. 

Schaff.  New  Schaff-Herzog  ency- 
clopedia of  religious  knowledge, 
217. 

Science,  276-90. 

Scientific  American  cyclopedia  of 
formulas,  307. 

"See  also"  card,  37;  filing,  72. 

"See"  card,  35,  36. 

Serial  number,  363-64;  how  to 
find,  367-69. 

set,  362-63;  indexes,  364- 

68. 

Series  card,  53. 

Severance.  Guide  to  the  current 
periodicals,  267. 

Shelf  list,  24;    location,  4. 

Shelving,  23. 

Shepherd.     Historical  atlas,  173. 

"Shipping  world"  yearbook,  335. 

Short  stories,  index,  260. 


177 


INDEX 


Smith.     Dictionary  of  Greek  and 

Roman  antiquities,  178; 

biography,  179. 

Smithsonian    institution.      Annual 
report,  276. 

Sociology,   186-215;    bibliography, 
376. 

Soule.   Dictionary  of  English  syno- 
nymes,  129. 

Sources,  historical,  165-70. 

Spence.      Dictionary    of   medieval 
romance,  243. 

Standard  dictionary,  122. 

handbook    for    electrical 

engineers,  324. 

Statesman's  year-book,  187. 

Statistical  abstract  of  the    U.  S. 
209. 

Statistics,  187,  206-10. 

Stedman.      American    anthology ; 
232;  Victorian  anthology,  233. 

and  Hutchinson.  Library 

of  American  literature,  226. 

Stevens.     Bibliography  of  munici- 
pal utility  regulation,  378. 

Stevenson.     Home  book  of  verse, 
231. 

Stories,  see  Fiction;  Short  stories. 

Stieler.     Atlas  of  modern  geogra- 
phy, 151. 

Sturgis.     Dictionary  of  architect- 
ure, 268. 

Subject  card,    31;    filing,    68-75; 
headings,  38-46. 

See  also  Biography,  Bibliog- 
raphy, Criticism,  Customs,  His- 
tory, Literature,  Magazines, 
Maps,  Travel. 

headings,     see      Subject 

"card. 

Swan.     Dictionary    of    contempo- 
rary quotations,  252. 

Swanton.    Guide  to  U.  S.  govern- 
ment publications,  359. 


Synonym  dictionaries,  126-32. 
Table  of  contents,  purpose,  80. 
Textiles,  308. 
Thomas'    Register     of    American 

manufacturers,  337. 
Universal       pronouncing 

dictionary  of  biography,  136. 
Thorne.     Fugitive  facts,  243. 
Thorpe.      Dictionary    of     applied 

chemistry,  277. 
Title  card,  30;    filing,  62,  71,  73- 

74. 

Title-page,  77. 
Toasts,  255. 

Trade  bibliographies,  264-65,  384. 
Translator  card,  49. 
Trautwine.    Civil  engineers'  pock- 

etbook,  324. 
Travel  books,  catalog  subject  card, 

144. 
Trees,  282-84,  292. 

United  States.  Agriculture  dept. 
Department  bulletin,  299;  De- 
partment circular,  300;  Experi- 
ment station  record,  303;  Farm- 
ers' bulletin,  298;  Journal  of 
agricultural  research,  302; 
Monthly  list  of  publications, 
304;  Office  of  the  secretary 
circular,  301;  Yearbook,  297. 

catalog,  264. 

Census  bureau.  Census 

of  the  United  States,  210. 

compiled  statutes,  199. 

Congress.  Congressional 

record,  2-01;  Official  congres- 
sional directory,  197. 

Education  bureau. 


An- 
nual report,  350;  Bulletin,  351; 
Educational  directory,  352; 
Monthly  record  of  current  edu- 
cational publications,  353. 


178 


INDEX 


U.  S.  Foreign  and  domestic  com- 
merce bureau.  Commerce  re- 
ports, 332;  Foreign  commerce 
and  navigation  of  the  U.  S.  333 ; 
Statistical  abstract,  209. 

Geological  survey.  Geo- 
logic atlas,  279;  Topographic 
sheets,  156. 

history,  183-85;  bibliog- 
raphies, 382-83. 

Interstate  commerce  com- 


mission, 345. 
Labor   statistics   bureau. 


Bulletin,  194. 

Superintendent  of  docu- 
ments. Catalogue,  367;  Check- 
list of  U.  S.  public  documents, 
364;  Index  to  reports,  368; 
Monthly  catalogue,  360. 

Price  lists,  361; 

agriculture,  304;  economics, 
196;  education,  357;  engineer- 
ing, 327;  geography,  147;  ge- 
ology, 147;  history,  170;  home 
economics,  316;  maps,  157; 
political  science,  196;  science, 
290;  sociology,  196. 

University  musical  encyclopedia, 
274. 

Victorian  anthology,  233. 

Walker.    Ehyming  dictionary,  134. 

Walsh.  Curiosities  of  popular 
customs,  212;  Handy-book  of 


literary  curiosities,  243;  Heroes 
and  heroines  of  fiction,  243; 
International  encyclopedia  of 
quotations,  247. 

Ward,  A.  Encyclopedia  of  foods 
and  beverages,  315. 

T.  H.  English  poets,  229. 

Warner.  Library  of  the  world's 
best  literature,  225. 

Webb.  New  dictionary  of  statis- 
tics, 208. 

Webster.  New  international  dic- 
tionary, 121. 

Wheeler.  Noted  names  of  fiction, 
243;  Who  wrote  it?  243. 

Whibley.  Companion  to  Greek 
studies,  180. 

Whitaker.     Almanack,  117. 

Who 's  who,  140.    in  America,  141. 

Wiley.     10-01  tests  of  foods,  314. 

Wilson.     Handbook  series,  193. 

Work  mark,  19. 

World  almanac,  118. 

World's  best  essays,  236. 

orations,  235. 

poetry,  228. 

Year  books  for  special  countries, 

195. 
Young.    Analytical  concordance  to 

the  Bible,  220. 

Zoology,  286-89. 


179 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 

|    MAY  14  1967 

MAR     3  1970. 

jUNH^'6 

LD  21-40m-10,'65                                T  .General  Library 
(F7763slO)476                                University  of  California 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


